Kinetic

Advanced MES
Integration
Guide
Version 2024.2

1 October, 2024
Disclaimer
This document is for informational purposes only and is subject to change without notice. This
document and its contents, including the viewpoints, dates and functional content expressed herein
are believed to be accurate as of its date of publication. However, Epicor Software Corporation makes
no guarantee, representations or warranties with regard to the enclosed information and specifically
disclaims any applicable implied warranties, such as fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability,
satisfactory quality or reasonable skill and care. As each user of Epicor software is likely to be unique
in their requirements in the use of such software and their business processes, users of this document
are always advised to discuss the content of this document with their Epicor account manager. All
information contained herein is subject to change without notice and changes to this document since
printing and other important information about the software product are made or published in release
notes, and you are urged to obtain the current release notes for the software product. We welcome
user comments and reserve the right to revise this publication and/or make improvements or changes
to the products or programs described in this publication at any time, without notice.

The usage of any Epicor software shall be pursuant to an Epicor end user license agreement and the
performance of any consulting services by Epicor personnel shall be pursuant to Epicor's standard
services terms and conditions. Usage of the solution(s) described in this document with other Epicor
software or third party products may require the purchase of licenses for such other products. Where
any software is expressed to be compliant with local laws or requirements in this document, such
compliance is not a warranty and is based solely on Epicor's current understanding of such laws and
requirements. All laws and requirements are subject to varying interpretations as well as to change
and accordingly Epicor cannot guarantee that the software will be compliant and up to date with such
changes. All statements of platform and product compatibility in this document shall be considered
individually in relation to the products referred to in the relevant statement, i.e., where any Epicor
software is stated to be compatible with one product and also stated to be compatible with another
product, it should not be interpreted that such Epicor software is compatible with both of the products
running at the same time on the same platform or environment. Additionally platform or product
compatibility may require the application of Epicor or third-party updates, patches and/or service packs
and Epicor has no responsibility for compatibility issues which may be caused by updates, patches
and/or service packs released by third parties after the date of publication of this document.

Epicor® is a registered trademark and/or trademark of Epicor Software Corporation in the United
States, certain other countries and/or the EU. All other trademarks mentioned are the property of their
respective owners.

Copyright © 2024 Epicor Software Corporation Epicor.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the prior written
consent of Epicor Software Corporation.

2 October, 2024
Table of Contents
Introduction 7
Intended Audience 7
How it is Organized 7
Data Integration with Kinetic and Advanced MES 9
Data Integration Data Flow 9
About Advanced MES Process cards 12
Data Integration Setup on Kinetic 15
Kinetic Company Configuration 16
Default Standard Format Field 16
Set Job Default Standard Format 17
Kinetic Site Configuration 17
Machine MES Fields 18
Configure Site Integration with Advanced MES 19
Kinetic Scrap Reason Codes 20
Scrap Reason Codes - Details 21
Reason Code Maintenance - GL Control Data 24
Kinetic Indirect Labor Codes 26
Detail Fields 27
Update Indirect Labor Codes 28
Kinetic Resource Type 29
Detail Fields 29
Machine MES Fields 30
Set up Machine MES Resource Type 31
Capability Maintenance 31
Capability Maintenance - Detail 32
Capability Maintenance - Additional Capabilities 34
Capability Maintenance - Resources 35
Set up Capability Integration 37
Kinetic Resource Group Setup 38
Detail Fields 39
Detail Fields 54
Capabilities Fields 68
Machine MES Fields 69
Set up Kinetic Machine Resource Group 72
Set up Kinetic Machine Resource 74
Set up Kinetic Tool Resource 77
Kinetic Operation Maintenance 78
Detail Fields 79
Scheduling Requirements 84

3 October, 2024
 Kinetic Part Maintenance 90
Set up Parts 92
Part Method of Manufacture Operations 102
Detail Fields 103
Detail Fields 114
Add a New Operation Record 118
Drag and Drop a New Operation Record 118
Update Operation and Machine MES Details 118
Resequence All Operation Records 119
Add a New Scheduling Resource to an Operation Record 120
Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Scheduling Resources - Detail 120
Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Standard Breaks 132
Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Subcontract 132
Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - RoHS 137
Machine MES - Machine Parameters 138
Kinetic Employee Maintenance 143
Production Info 144
Machine MES 144
Data Integration Setup on Advanced MES 148
Plants 148
Advanced MES Machine Configurations 149
Add a Machine Configuration 149
Advanced MES Scrap Maps 168
Add a Scrap Map 168
Advanced MES Down Maps 169
Add a Down Map 170
Assign Advanced MES Scrap and Down Code Maps 172
Assigning Scrap Maps and Down Code Maps 172
Export Data from Kinetic 174
Export to Advanced MES 176
Export to Advanced MES - Selection 176
Export to Advanced MES - Filter 179
Export Data from Kinetic 183
Import Data into Advanced MES from Kinetic Output 186
Importing Data into Advanced MES via CSV Files 187
Data Import Fields 187
Manually Import Data from a Text File 187
Automatically Execute Data Import 188
Data Import Records 190
Importing Data into Advanced MES via REST 223
Set Up System Configuration String 223

4 October, 2024
 Configure Epicor Web API Channel 226
Using the Advanced MES Job Scheduler 228
Select Machines to Include in Job Schedule 228
Job Scheduler 229
About Family Production 230
Job Scheduler Functions 231
Using the Timescale Bar 232
Job Scheduler-Finding a Job 233
Job Scheduler-Job Details 234
Job Scheduler-Scheduled Jobs Tool 237
Job Scheduler-Unscheduled Jobs Tool 240
Gantt-In-Gantt Family Job Scheduling 244
Moving Jobs 245
Change Bar Label Text 245
Job Scheduler-Tool Conflicts 245
Job Scheduler-Show Resources Tool 247
Job Scheduler-Where to Run Tool 248
Job Scheduler- Status Override Utility 250
Exporting Data from Advanced MES to Import into Kinetic 252
Configuring Advanced MES to Export Data in CSV Files 252
Configure Machine Plant and Default Operator ID 253
Set Up Chronology 254
Configure Machine Agenda 256
Configure Server Agenda 258
Data Export Records 261
Configuring Advanced MES to Export Data via REST 265
Importing Advanced MES Data into Kinetic 269
Selection Fields 269
Import Data into Kinetic 271
Viewing Imported Time and Expense Data 273
Time Entry and Expense Entry - Employee 273
Employee Fields 273
View Time 274
Time Entry - Calendar 274
Time Entry - Daily 275
Time Entry - Weekly 275
Time Entry - Calendar 275
Time Entry - Time Details 275
Time Entry - Time - Daily Time 275
Time Entry - Weekly Time 295

5 October, 2024
 Time Entry - Work Hours / Work Hours Details 299
Expense Entry - Expense 303
Expense Entry - Detail 303
Expense Entry - Detail - Approvals 307
Expense Entry - Expenses - Tax 307
Expense Entry - Expenses - Comments 308
Expense Entry - Search 309
Time Entry and Expense Entry - Overflow menu 310
Time Entry and Expense Entry - Retrieve Options 310
Time Entry and Expense Entry - Delete Transactions 311
Viewing Imported Schedule Data in Kinetic 313
Resource Scheduling Board Kinetic 313
Resource Scheduling Board - Selection 314
Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule 315
Detail 317
Resource Scheduling Board - Operations List 318
Move Job 320
Overflow menu 326
Multi Resource Scheduling Board Kinetic 342
Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Selection 342
Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule 342
Move Job 344
Detail 350
Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Operations List 352
Overflow menu 352

6 October, 2024
Introduction
Kinetic Advanced MES Integraiton Guide explores how Kinetic integrates with the Advanced MES
application.

This guide is intended to describe the process of setting up integration information on both Kinetic
and Advanced MES application and provide an understanding of the data flow between the two
applications. The guide also explains how to view imported Advanced MES data on Kinetic.

Please note that many of the primary components discussed in this guide perform more functions
than what is described here. For more information about these features, review the related help
articles in the Online Help, speak with your consultant, or enroll in an appropriate Epicor education
course.

Intended Audience
This guide is for individuals within your company responsible or partially responsible for setting up
integration data on Kinetic or Advanced MES. It is also intended for system administrators managing
the integration between the two applications, job schedulers responsible for managing and
monitoring jobs or financial employees responsible for managing time and expense data imported
from Advanced MES.

How it is Organized
This guide first explores the concepts behind job costing and then details the items that affect the
outcome of the estimated and actual costing results. The second half of the guide explores more
detailed information about each transaction type, account, and modifier involved in some aspect of
the job costing process.

The following are the main sections of this guide:

l Job Costing Concepts- This section explores the underlying concepts behind job costing. We
recommend that you read this section first, as the rest of the guide references the information
detailed here.

l Primary Components- This section documents the main records used by the costing
processes, such as assemblies, cost groups and suppliers.

l Calculations- This section details the main calculations used to run costing. Review this
material to learn about costing methods, labor costing, burden costing and material costing.

l Transaction Types- Each inventory transaction is assigned a specific transaction type. This
section details all the transactions types and the specific transactions that they capture.

7 October, 2024
l Modifiers- This section documents any fields and options you can use to adjust the estimated
and actual costing results. It also examines subjects such as Labor Rates, Burden Rates,
Move to DMR, and other modifiers.

l Costing in Action- This section contains a more complex example that explores how the
Costing Workbench arrives at final standard costs.

8 October, 2024
Data Integration with Kinetic and Advanced MES
Use Data Integration to manage production from a central location and seamlessly integrate data
flow between Kinetic and Advanced MES. This integration allows you to reduce errors from manual
data entry in both applications and get timely and accurate data to enable better manufacturing
decisions.

Kinetic production planning and job data are exported to Advanced MES for use when performing
and monitoring shop floor activities. In Advanced MES, production data is monitored and recorded
for use in process and quality control monitoring and analysis.

Labor and production data recorded in Advanced MES will then flow back to Kinetic where the data
can be used for costing, reporting and production analysis.

In Kinetic, you can only export database entry records marked as Machine MES and
records linked to them.

Data Integration Data Flow

The Data Flow Process and Diagram shows how data flows between Kinetic and Epicor Advanced
MES.

Data integration between Kinetic and Epicor Advanced MES allows data to flow seamlessly between
Kinetic and Epicor MES. Data selected for export from Kinetic is exported in bulk files, which are
then automatically imported into Advanced MES on a scheduled basis. Production labor data
recorded in Advanced MES is exported from Advanced MES to a text file which is then automatically
imported into Kinetic.

9 October, 2024
The following sections provide more detailed information on how data flows between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

Data Flow from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES

l In Kinetic, data you select for export is exported from Kinetic in batches. You can do this
automatically based on a schedule or manually, using the Export to Advanced MES process
in Kinetic. The Epicor application exports in bulk (folder) rather than individual CSV files. The
following types of data flow from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES:

l Scrap Codes

l Indirect Labor Codes marked as Downtime

l Resources marked as Tools

l Manufactured Parts

l Production Methods and Operations or Process cards

l Operation Machine Parameters

l Production Jobs

l Preventative Maintenance Jobs

10 October, 2024
 l Material Parts

l Operator IDS

Currently, resources marked as machines are not included in the import process
and you must define machine configurations manually in Advanced MES in
System Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration. For instructions on adding
machine configurations in Advanced MES, refer to the Advanced MES System
Configuration User Guide.

All export files are placed in the Output directory defined in Kinetic for the Advanced MES
machine MES site.

The Advanced MES import process is scheduled to run automatically through the Windows™
Scheduled Tasks wizard. Once Kinetic export files are in the Output directory, the exported
data is automatically imported into Advanced MES based on the defined schedule. You can
also manually import data into the Advanced MES database using the Data Import/Export
application.

If errors occur during the import process, the error is written to a defined error log file. If
Advanced MES Services does not define a specific error directory and file name, any error will
write to C:\[Link].

Once you import data, you can view it as needed in Advanced MES.

l As an option, you can use OData Calls to export data from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES.
This export process executes API calls that write data directly to Advanced MES instead of
creating CSV files and manually importing data to Advanced MES. In this case, the following
types of data flow from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES:

l Scrap Codes

l Indirect Labor Codes marked as Downtime (Down Codes)

l Operators

l Molds

l Parts

l Materials

l Part Materials

l Jobs

l Machines

11 October, 2024
 l Machine Parameters

l Process Sets

l Schedules

Data Flow from Epicor Advanced MES to Kinetic

l In Advanced MES, production labor data is automatically exported in regularly timed intervals,
based on a schedule defined directly in the Advanced MES database by Advanced MES
personnel. Data is exported into a Unicode text file that contains the labor data records. The
first field of each labor record includes the type of data being exported. The following types of
data flow from Epicor Advanced MES to Kinetic:

l Labor Details

l Labor completed parts and the quantity completed

l Labor equipment counter associated with reported quantities

l Scheduling parameters, including company and job data, operation data and production
start and end dates

l All Advanced MES export files are placed in an export directory. The export directory is
defined directly in the Advanced MES database by Advanced MES personnel and must be the
same directory as the Input directory defined in Kinetic for the Advanced MES machine MES
site.

l Once the record file exported from Advanced MES is in Kinetic input folder, it is automatically
imported into Kinetic based on a schedule defined for the process within Kinetic.

For further information on setting up the Input directory and the import process
for Advanced MES data in Kinetic, please refer to Kinetic Help and Support
Panel.

l In Kinetic, you can view time and expense data imported from Advanced MES in Time Entry
and Expense Entry.

l In Kinetic, you can view schedule data imported from Advanced MES in the Resource
Scheduling Board or the Multi Resource Scheduling Board.

About Advanced MES Process cards

When Kinetic part revision operations are imported into Advanced MES, they become process
cards. Process cards link machine, tool and part information together.

12 October, 2024
In Advanced MES, a process card defines the production process used in a job to produce a part
with a defined tool that is performed on a specific machine. A process card links together a machine,
a part ID and a tool ID and is required to perform production on a machine. Process card information
includes machine-specific process specification and control limits.

A single or component job is comprised of a Process card, which in turn is comprised of a Machine
ID, a Part ID, a Tool ID, and an optional Sample card. A job must specify a Process card when it is
created, either in the Job Schedule or the Data Import/Export application.

When you move a job from one machine to another machine (via the Job Schedule application), it
continues to produce the same part with the same tool, but it will necessarily use a different process
card. This allows your company to define different standards for jobs, depending on which machines
the job runs.

If a particular machine does not have a Process card defined that would permit that job to run on the
machine, an error is displayed and the person is prevented from moving the job to that machine. This
allows you to define rules that prevent jobs from being scheduled on machines that aren't capable of
running the job.

Only Machine, Part and Tool combinations are unique on each machine i.e. one tool
and part combination per machine.

Process card Export Logic

When producing parts, there can be multiple resources capable of producing that part. Advanced
MES process cards use a combination of machine, tool and part to maintain production process
information for the part. When you export a process card (machine/tool/part) from Kinetic, the
machine resource element of the process card is located using the following logic:

l If a machine part operation detail with a part operation detail resource ID is located, the
resource is used.

l If a machine cannot be found through the resource, use the part operation detail resource
group to determine if a machine resource group exists.

l If the machine cannot be found through the resource or resource group, use the part operation
detail capability Machine MES setting to locate the machine.

When a machine is located during the export process, one export line for each tool/machine
combination for the part is created.

l If the machine is a resource, an export line is created for the one part/machine/tool
combination.

l If the machine is a resource group, an export line is created for each resource in the resource
group to create all available machine/tool combinations for the part.

13 October, 2024
l If the machine is a capability, an export line is created for each of the following to create all
available machine/tool combinations for the part:

l Each resource in the capability

l Each resource within a resource group in the capability

l Each resource in a defined additional capability

l Each resource within a resource group in a defined additional capability

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is
selected, only resource, resource group and capability data that has been added
or changed since the last synchronized date is included in the exported data.

14 October, 2024
Data Integration Setup on Kinetic
To implement data integration between Kinetic and Advanced MES, you must set company and site
configuration settings in Kinetic. You must also enable Machine MES integration in several areas in
Kinetic for data to integrate between the two applications.

In Kinetic, data to be exported to Epicor Advanced MES must have the Machine MES option
enabled. In addition, the Machine MES type must be set as Advanced MES and the output and input
locations must be set. There are also different options that can be set for integration.

In Kinetic, the following integration information must be defined:

l Company Configuration - Set the default standard format when you create jobs.

l Site Configuration Control - Define integration type, input and output location and machine
MES settings. If you execute OData Calls to export data Kinetic to Advanced MES, also define
OData settings and test the OData connection.

l Scrap Reason Codes - Add or edit scrap reason codes as needed. All Kinetic scrap reason
codes are integrated with Advanced MES.

l Indirect Labor Codes - Define which indirect labor codes should be integrated with Advanced
MES as downtime codes to use when reporting down time in Advanced MES.

Only indirect labor codes marked as Downtime are integrated with Advanced
MES.

l Resource Types - Set Machine MES Type settings for machine and tool resources.

l Resources - Define Machine MES settings for machine and tool resources.

Kinetic machine resources are machine configurations in Advanced MES. Kinetic

tool resources are tool IDs in Advanced MES.

l Operation Maintenance - Define Machine MES settings for the procedures that need to be
performed by your shop employees when they are working on a job.

l Parts - Define Machine MES settings for manufactured parts. All material parts linked to the
part through the part operation are automatically integrated with Advanced MES and become
material IDs in Advanced MES.

For each part to integrate, you must select the Machine MES checkbox on the
Site Tab. The integration is by site and different sites will have different
manufactured parts.

15 October, 2024
 l Part Revisions - Define Advanced MES integration settings for part revisions.

In Advanced MES, part revisions do not exist. Each Kinetic part revision with a
status of Active is treated as an individual Advanced MES Part ID. Kinetic part
revision number is included in the Advanced MES Part ID part number.

l Part Method of Manufacture Operations - Define Machine MES and machine parameter
settings for procedures that employees must perform when producing a part. Operation
sequences define the sequence of labor steps required to make each part. You can define
operations for each part in Quote Entry, Job Entry and you can also enter operations as
routing information in the Engineering module.

l Employees - Set integration and security information for Kinetic employees that should be
integrated with Advanced MES.

Refer to Appendix A - Data Integration Best Practices for Epicor recommendations for
data integration setup on Kinetic.

Kinetic Company Configuration

In Company Configuration, use the Default Standard Format field in the Modules > Production >
Job card to define the default production cycle settings for resources integrated between Kinetic and
the Epicor Advanced MES Machine application.

Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration

Default Standard Format Field

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Default Standard Format

Indicates the default format, like Cycles per Hour, for your operations. The format may vary for each
operation, but this value controls the default format selected on all new job and quote operations.

Select one of the following options:

l Hours/Piece

l Minutes/Piece

l Hours/Piece

l Minutes/Piece

16 October, 2024
 l Pieces/Hour

l Pieces/Minute

l Operations/Hour

l Operations/Minute

l Fixed Hours

l Cycles/Minute

l Cycles/Hour

For resources that are integrated between Kinetic and Advanced MES, the production
rate must be expressed in cycles per hour or cycles per minute.

Set Job Default Standard Format

Navigate to Company Configuration.

Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Configuration

1. Navigate to the Modules > Production > Job card.

2. In the Default Standard Format field, select either Cycles/Minute or Cycles/Hour. This value
determines the standard format that appears by default when defining operations.

All resources that are integrated between Kinetic and Advanced MES must have
a standard format of Cycles/Minute or Cycles/Hour.

3. Click Save.

Kinetic Site Configuration

Use the Modules > Production Management > Machine Integrations card in Site Configuration
Control in Kinetic to define settings for the integration between Kinetic and the Epicor Advanced
MES Machine application.

You can use one of the following methods to connect the systems:

l CSV files - Kinetic and Advanced MES generate comma-separated values files with the
required data and exchange them through the output and input folders to which both systems
have access.

17 October, 2024
 l REST API - the systems use the OData protocol to exchange their data through a REST
server.

After you configure Kinetic, you must also configure the same data transfer method in Advanced
MES.

Machine MES Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Input Location

Specifies the location for the data flow from the machine MES into Kinetic.

For data integration with Advanced MES, data exported from Advanced MES is placed
in this folder location where it can then be imported into Kinetic by Kinetic import
process. This Input location must be accessible from by Kinetic and Advanced MES
servers.

Input Location ...

Click this button to search for and select the location for the data flow from the machine MES into
Kinetic.

Machine MES Integration

Select this check box to enable external MES integration for this site. When selected, all this fields
located in this card activate.

If this check box is selected, the application prompts you to enter both Input and Output Locations,
and/or enter OData URL, OData Username, OData Password.

Machine MES Type

Select the machine MES with which you want this Site to integrate.

For Advanced MES integration, this value must be Advanced MES.

OData Password

Enter your password to be used for Machine MES OData Calls authorization.

OData URL

Enter the Machine MES OData URL that will be used to make the calls.

18 October, 2024
OData Username

Enter your username to be used for Machine MES OData Calls authorization.

Output Location

Specifies the location for the data flow from Kinetic into the machine MES.

For data output to Advanced MES, data exported from Kinetic is placed in this folder
location where it can then be imported into Advanced MES by the Advanced MES
import process. This Output location must be accessible from by Kinetic and Advanced
MES servers.

Output Location ...

Click this button to search for and select the location for the data flow from Kinetic into the machine
MES.

Test OData Connection ...

Hit this button to test the Machine MES OData connection.

Configure Site Integration with Advanced MES

Use these steps to configure production sites for integration with Advanced MES either using the
CSV or the REST API method.

1. Select the Machine MES Integration check box.

2. In the Machine MES Type field, select Advanced MES.

3. If you want to use CSV files to integrate the systems, you need to define the data exchange
folders:

l In the Output Location... field, enter the full path to the output location for the data flow
from Kinetic to the Advanced MES. You can also click Output Location... to open a
Windows Explorer window where you can navigate to the output location. Machine MES
data exported from Kinetic is placed in the Output location.

l In the Input Location... field, enter the full path to the input location for the data flow from
Advanced MES to Kinetic. You can also click Input Location... to open Windows
Explorer where you can navigate to the input location. Machine MES data exported from
Advanced MES to be imported into Kinetic is placed in the Input location.

19 October, 2024
 The paths to the Input and Output location must be accessible to both Kinetic and
Advanced MES servers.

4. If you prefer to integrate Kinetic and Advanced MES through REST API, enter the OData URL
to use for making the OData calls and define your Username and Password for Advanced
MES OData Calls authorization.

5. Click Test OData Connection... to verify the connection is successful.

6. Click Save.

Kinetic Scrap Reason Codes

Use to define and update standard explanations for labor scrap.

Scrap codes are integrated with Advanced MES Scrap codes and are used to identify scrapped
quantities.

When data exports to Advanced MES during Kinetic export batch, Kinetic reason codes
with a Reason Type of Scrap that are new or have been changed since the last export
process are automatically exported.

In Advanced MES, scrap codes imported from Kinetic are located in System Configuration > Site >
Codes > Scrap.

In Advanced MES, some scrap codes are defined by default. You must review those
scrap codes in . If a scrap code is not valid for integration, either remove the code or do
not include it in a scrap map. If a scrap code is valid for integration but is not in Kinetic,
create a matching scrap code in Kinetic. If you include invalid scrap codes in a scrap
map, errors occur when you import scrap data into Kinetic and the import will fail.

Before you can use scrap reason codes to report scrap on a machine in Advanced
MES, you must assign the scrap reasons to a scrap map in Advanced MES and assign
the map to a machine configuration. For more information, refer to the Scrap Maps
section of this document.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

20 October, 2024
 l Financial Management > Deferred Revenue Accounting > Setup > Reason Code

l Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Reason Code

l Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Reason Code

l Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Reason Code

l Sales Management > Customer Relationship Management > Setup > Reason Code

l Service Management > Field Service > Setup > Reason Code

Scrap Reason Codes - Details

Use the Detail card to define reason codes.

Nonconformance fields in this card are optional for Kinetic quality assurance
transactions but are not used in Advanced MES.

The fields in the Machine MES pane display if data for the current scrap reason code
needs to be synchronized between Kinetic and Advanced MES and the last date and
time a synchronization occurred.

Reason Code Maintenance Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Reason Type

Each Reason Type identifies a grouping of reason codes related to a specific purpose or activity.
Refer to the Reason Type Listing help article in Working with Job Management to view a listing of
fields that are enabled for each Reason Type.

The Course Results reason type code appears on this list only if the Enhanced Quality
Assurance license is installed in Kinetic.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Reason Code

21 October, 2024
Specifies a unique identifier of the reason for scrapping or reworking parts, adjusting inventory, or
accepting a customer return.

Description

Specifies the reason code description.

Cause

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used as a Root Cause in the Corrective Actions
application.

Corrective Action

Select this check box to indicate it is a valid reason to be used as a Corrective Action.

Count Discrepancy Reason

Select this check box to indicate the reason code can be used for counting discrepancies.

DMR Accept Inventory/RMA

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR inventory or RMA item is accepted.

DMR Accept Material

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR material is accepted.

DMR Accept Operation

This check indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR transactions,
where the DMR operation is accepted.

DMR Accept Subcontract

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR subcontract item is accepted.

DMR Reject Inventory/RMA

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR inventory or RMA item is rejected.

DMR Reject Material

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR material is rejected.

DMR Reject Operation

22 October, 2024
This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR operation is rejected.

DMR Reject Subcontract

This check box indicates if the reason code can be used for the Quality Assurance DMR
transactions, where the DMR subcontract is rejected.

Insp Fail Inventory/RMA

Select this check box to indicate if this reason code should be used when failing an inventory item
during inspection processing. If you select this checkbox, then this reason code will display in the
Inventory > Detail and Material > Detail cards in the Inspection Processing Entry application.

Insp Fail Material

Select this check box to indicate if this reason code should be used when failing material during
inspection processing. If you select this checkbox, then this reason code will display in the Material >
Detail card in the Inspection Processing Entry application.

Insp Fail Operation

Select this check box to indicate if this reason code should be used when failing an operation during
inspection processing. If you select this checkbox, then this reason code will display in the Operation
> Detail card in the Inspection Processing Entry application.

Insp Fail Subcontract

Select this check box to indicate if this reason code should be used when failing a subcontract
operation during inspection processing. If you select this checkbox, then this reason code will display
in the PO Receipts > Detail card in the Inspection Processing Entry application.

Machine MES Last Sync

Displays the date and time that the scrap reason code data between Kinetic and the machine MES
was last synchronized.

Nonconformance Inventory

Select this check box to indicate if it is a valid reason to be used for nonconformance inventory. This
reason code can be used for Quality Assurance transactions related to nonconformance inventory.

Nonconformance Material

Select this check box to indicate if it is a valid reason to be used for nonconformance processing of
material. This reason code can be used for Quality Assurance transactions related to
nonconformance materials.

Nonconformance Operation

23 October, 2024
Select this check box to indicate it is a valid reason to be used for Nonconformance processing of an
operation.

Nonconformance Other

Select this check box to indicate it is a valid reason to be used for Nonconformance processing of
something other than an Operation, Material, or Subcontract Operation.

Nonconformance Subcontract

Select this check box to indicate it is a valid reason to be used for nonconformance processing of a
subcontract operation.

Passed

This check box indicates if a course taken by an employee has been passed successfully. This
check box is only valid for the Course Result reason code.

Reason Code...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application pulls in the record type
displayed on the button label.

Scrap

Select this check box to indicate if it is a valid reason to be used for scrap. This reason code can be
used for Quality Assurance transactions related to scrap: ASM-INS, MTL-INS, or SUB-INS.

Sync Required

Indicates that a scrap reason code description has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced
MES application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when
the scrap reason code data between Kinetic and the machine MES application is out of sync.

Only reason codes with a type of Scrap, that are new or have unsynchronized
description changes are included in the synchronization process.

Update Reason Code Details

1. In Reasons Codes, select the scrap reason code you want to edit.

2. The Reason Code > Detail card displays.

3. Make the necessary changes to the reason code.

4. On the Standard toolbar, click Save.

Reason Code Maintenance - GL Control Data

24 October, 2024
The GL control or controls selected on this card define the accounts and journal codes available to
the application's posting processes. The controls determine the accounts and journal codes used to
post the transactions.

Defining GL control data is essential to Kinetic but this data is not used in Advanced
MES. Please ensure people responsible for maintaining financial information in Kinetic
review the scrap reason codes.

You can apply multiple controls to each record maintained in the application. If you use multiple
controls, each control must be based on a different GL control type.

Example you might use two controls with a record: a control that groups AP-type accounts and a
control that groups AR-type accounts. As a result, general ledger transactions include lines that
affect both sides of the balance card.

You cannot association GL controls with applications where users select posting accounts when
they enter transactions. Examples of this type of application include AP Adjustment and Cash
Receipts. The Master COA defines the accounts available to users of these applications.

Detail Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Control

Displays the ID of the selected GL control code. You can also enter this value manually.

Control...

Click the Control button to search for an existing GL control.

Description (Control)

Displays the description for the selected GL control.

Description (Type)

Displays the description for the GL control type.

GL Control Type

Displays the selected GL control type. You can also enter the type manually.

Type...

Click the Type button to search for the appropriate GL control type.

Select a GL Control

25 October, 2024
A GL control defines the accounts and journal codes available when posting the selected record.
You can apply multiple controls to each record maintained in the application. If you use multiple
controls, each control must be based on a different GL control type.

Changes in the controls applied to a record can result in the creation of invalid journals.
Ensure the posting process creates valid accounts after the changes.

1. Select the record to which the control will apply.

2. Click New on the Standard toolbar and select New GL Control. The application creates the
record and displays the GL Control Detail card.

3. Enter the identifier of the type to which the control belongs in the Type field or click the Type
button to find and select a type. You can select types that reference the entity managed by the
application. Selection of the type limits selection of GL controls to those based on the type.

4. Enter the identifier of the control in the Control field or click the Control button to find and
select a control.

5. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.

Kinetic Indirect Labor Codes

Use Indirect Labor Maintenance to create indirect labor codes that are used to track labor not
performed for a specific job or as downtime when clocked into a job.

Indirect Labor Codes that are marked as downtime, and are new or have been changed since the
last synchronization are exported to Advanced MES as downtime codes during the data
synchronization process.

In Advanced MES, some down codes are defined by default. You must review those
down codes in . If a down code is not valid for integration, either remove the code, do
not include it in a down map or create a matching indirect labor down code in Kinetic. If
you include invalid down codes in a down map, errors occur when you import labor data
into Kinetic and the labor import will fail.

In Advanced MES Down Codes, the first down code (number 1) must be set to None. This is the
down code that is used by default when down time occurs on the MIU or PCMIU before down time
reasons are assigned. You must also define the None down code as an indirect labor code in Kinetic
or errors will occur when you import labor from Advanced MES.

26 October, 2024
 Defining indirect labor expense data is essential to Kinetic, but this data is not used in
Advanced MES. Ensure people responsible for maintaining financial information in
Kinetic review the indirect labor down codes.

Before you can use down codes to categorize down time on a machine in Advanced MES, you must
assign the down reasons to a down map in Advanced MES and assign the map to a machine
configuration. For more information, refer to the Down Maps section of this document.

In Kinetic, indirect labor codes allow a maximum of six characters. Advanced MES down codes have
a maximum of 30 characters. To permit integration, you must update Advanced MES down codes to
have a maximum of six characters.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Menu Path: Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Indirect Labor

Detail Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Expense Code

The Expense Code that displays as the default during Labor Entry when you enter this indirect labor
code. This is a required field. For example:

l ENG (Engineering)

Indirect Code

A four-character code that uniquely identifies each type of indirect labor you want to track. Use a
meaningful code, such as initials or the first portion of the description. On certain reports and
displays where space is limited, you will see only the code, not the full description. Meaningful codes
also help employees remember the codes they need to report.

Description

Specifies additional information to describe the indirect labor code.

Code...

Click this button to search for select an existing indirect code record.

Downtime

27 October, 2024
Select the Downtime check box to indicate that the indirect code in focus can be used to report
downtime during a manufacturing process.

Downtime is used when the resource is in production and something interrupts that production and
the resource is down requiring immediate attention. This is different from indirect codes which are
used to track non-production time for a variety of reasons.

Example You start production activity on job '1111' but the machine runs out of material and you are
waiting for material to continue. Instead of clocking out of the job, you report downtime by selecting
an appropriate indirect code. When the downtime button is selected in MES the application
suspends time to any job(s) the employee is currently clocked into and starts accruing time to the
selected downtime code. When whatever condition that caused the downtime is resolved the
employee ends downtime and time again will start to accrue to the job(s).

Downtime is a variant of indirect time and never is costed to a job. The downtime record
holds the job number for analytical purposes as identification of root cause can lead to
downtime reduction and increased productivity.

Downtime is reported through the Manufacturing Execution System (MES) and Time
and Expense Entry by clicking the Downtime button and defining a reason for what
caused the production downtime.

Machine MES Last Sync

Displays the date and time that the downtime indirect labor code data between Kinetic and the
machine MES was last synchronized.

Sync Required

Indicates that a synchronization to the Advanced MES application is required to synchronize the
indirect labor code data. This check box is automatically selected when a new indirect labor code
used to report downtime is added or changed and the data between Kinetic and the machine MES
application becomes out of sync.

Only indirect labor codes with a selected Downtime check box and that are new or have
unsynchronized changes are included in the synchronization process.

Update Indirect Labor Codes

1. Select the indirect labor code you want to edit.

The Indirect Labor Code > Detail card displays.

2. Make the necessary changes to the reason code.

28 October, 2024
 For indirect labor codes to be automatically exported during Kinetic data export
process, the Downtime check box must be selected.

3. On the Standard toolbar, click Save.

Kinetic Resource Type

Use Resource Type Maintenance to set up Machine MES Type settings for machine and tool
resources.

Use the Machine MES card to indicate whether the selected resource type will be integrated with the
Advanced MES Manufacturing Execution System (MES). Resource types are linked to resources in
Resource Group Maintenance. Any resource or resource group that is linked to a resource type
marked as Machine MES will be integrated as well.

l Machine resources or resource groups that are also set up in Advanced MES as machine
configurations must have a resource type with a Machine MES Type of M.

l Tool resources to integrate with Advanced MES must have a resource type with a Machine
MES Type of T.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Resource Type

l Production Management > Scheduling > Setup > Resource Type

Detail Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

A brief description of the resource type. For example:

l Machine

l Person

l Supplier

29 October, 2024
 l CNC Machine

l Apprentice

Inactive

Select this check box if this resource type is to be considered inactive (not presently being used).

Type

The unique one-character code that identifies the resource type. For example:

l M (for Machine)

l P (for Person)

l S (for supplier)

For integration with Advanced MES, resources and resource groups are exported to
Advanced MES as either machines or tools. M indicates the resource is a machine. T
indicates the resource is a tool.

This field is only active if you select the Machine MES Integration check box located in
the Site Configuration Control > Modules > Production Management > Machine MES.

Type...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Machine MES Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Type

Further specifies a resource type in focus, if you wish the selected record to be integrated with a
machine MES. The options in this field include Machine and Tool.

Example Assume that your Machine MES integration is with Advanced MES. If you select the
Machine option in this field, all the resources using this resource type are Advanced MES machines.

To define which Machine MES applies to the Site that you are working in, you have to select the
Machine MES Type record in the Machine MES Type field. This field is located in the Site
Configuration Control > Modules > Production Management > Machine MES card.

30 October, 2024
 This field is only active is you select the Machine MES Integration check box located in
the Site Configuration Control > Modules > Production Management > Machine
MES card.

Set up Machine MES Resource Type

1. For each resource type you want to set up as a machine MES type, enter one of the following
options in the Machine MES Type field:

a. For each tool resource type, select Tool.

b. For each machine resource type, enter Machine.

2. Click Save.

Capability Maintenance
Use Capability Maintenance to integrate resources and additional capabilities within a capability
with Advanced MES.

Use the Advanced MES check box to determine if the resources that belong to a capability should
be integrated with Advanced MES during the synchronization process.

If a capability is integrated with Advanced MES, the synchronization process synchronizes resource
data for all resources assigned to the capability (both through the selected primary resource group
and any additional resources). It also synchronizes resource data for all resources assigned to any
additional capabilities defined for the capability.

The resources within capabilities and additional capabilities are synchronized with machines in
Advanced MES. When synchronization occurs, new or updated resource information in capabilities
is exported from Kinetic to Advanced MES.

You can view whether a resource or additional capability requires synchronization with Advanced
MES and the date and time data was last synchronized.

To be included in the synchronization, capabilities must have the Machine MES check
box selected in the Detail card.

If a capability has the Machine MES check box selected, all resources that are
assigned to the capability must be machines and all additional capabilities assigned to
the capability must also have the Advanced MES check box selected.

31 October, 2024
 Machine resources are not sent to Advanced MES. Machine configurations must be
manually created in Advanced MES in . Kinetic resource ID and the Advanced MES
machine configuration ID MUST be the same. During the synchronization process,
resource data is synchronized between the resource and the Advanced MES machine
configuration.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Scheduling > Setup > Capability

Capability Maintenance - Detail

Use the Detail card to select if the capability should be integrated with Advanced MES and define
additional details for the capability.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Capability...

The unique identifier for the capability. If you want to modify or delete an existing capability, and you
do not know the capability ID, click Capability to access Capability Search and browse for the correct
ID.

Description

Description of the capability is displayed.

Additional Resources Required?

Select this check box to indicate that additional resources should be added to a routing operation
sequence that uses this capability in Job Entry, Quote Entry, and in the Engineering Workbench.

Description

A brief description of the primary resource group.

Description

32 October, 2024
The Operation Standard description.

Description

The operation description is displayed.

Machine MES

Select this check box to synchronize the entered capability with an external Manufacturing Execution
System (MES).

If the Machine MES check box is selected, all resources on the capability must be a
machine.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, all additional capabilities defined for the
capability must also have the Machine MES check box selected.

Operation

The default operation associated with this capability. If you do not know the code, click Operation to
access Operation Search and browse for the correct code. The operation description is displayed.

When this capability is added to a method of manufacture (routing) during Job Entry, Quote Entry, or
in the Engineering Workbench, this operation is the one used to create the operation sequence.

Operation Standard

The default operation standard associated with this capability. If you do not know the code, click
Operation Standard to access Operation Standards Search and browse for the correct code.

Operation Standard...

The default operation standard associated with this capability. If you do not know the code, click
Operation Standard to access Operation Standards Search and browse for the correct code.

Operation...

The default operation associated with this capability. If you do not know the code, click Operation to
access Operation Search and browse for the correct code. The operation description is displayed.

When this capability is added to a method of manufacture (routing) during Job Entry, Quote Entry, or
in the Engineering Workbench, this operation is the one used to create the operation sequence.

Primary Resource Group...

The primary resource group associated with the capability. If you do not know the code, click
Primary Resource Group to access Resource Group Search and browse for the correct code.

33 October, 2024
This is a mandatory field. Assigning a primary resource group to the capability has the effect of
attaching default labor or burden rates to the capability.

Set Up Group Required?

Select this check box to indicate that a setup group is required to perform this capability.

Type

This list defines from where this capability will pull costs; these costs will be placed against the
resource or resource group used during production. You can pull costs from Labor, Burden, or Both.

Capability Maintenance - Additional Capabilities

Use the Additional Capabilities card to add and maintain additional capabilities for the capability.

When you select an additional capability for a capability that is integrated with Advanced MES, all
resources defined for the additional capability are also integrated with Advanced MES.

For each additional capability in the list, you can view the last synchronization date and time and
whether a synchronization is required.

To synchronize data for a resource, there must be an existing machine configuration

with the same ID defined on Advanced MES. This must be manually defined.

If a capability has the Machine MES check box selected, all additional capabilities
assigned to the capability must also have the Advanced MES check box selected.

Additional Capabilities Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

CapAddID

Enter the capability code for an additional capability needed to perform the capability which you are
maintaining. If you do not know the code, click Search on the Navigation Toolbar to access
Capability Search and browse for the correct code.

Description

The description of the capability is displayed. This field is for display only.

ExternalMESLastSync

34 October, 2024
Displays the date and time that this capability record was last synchronized between Kinetic and the
machine MES.

ExternalMESSyncRequired

Indicates that data for a capability record has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced MES
application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when the
data between Kinetic and the machine MES application for this resource is out of sync.

The Sync Required check box enables for new resources and when any of the following data
changes for an existing resource that synchronizes with a machine MES:

l Capability resource link

l Additional resource link

Only capabilities that have the Machine MES check box selected on the Detail card are
included in the synchronization process.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, all additional capabilities defined for the
capability must also have the Machine MES check box selected.

ProductionCap

Select the check box to indicate that the additional capability is a capability used directly in
production.

SetupCap

Select the check box to indicate that the additional capability is a capability used only during setup.

Capability Maintenance - Resources

Use the Resources card to add and maintain resources for the capability.

You can also add, edit and remove machine resources assigned to a capability.

For each resource in the list, you can view the last synchronization date and time and whether a
synchronization is required.

To synchronize data for a machine resource, there must be an existing machine

configuration with the same ID defined on Advanced MES. This must be manually
defined on Advanced MES.

If a capability has the Machine MES check box selected, all resources that are
assigned to the capability must be machines.

35 October, 2024
Resources Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

ExternalMESLastSync

Displays the date and time that this record was last synchronized between Kinetic and the machine
MES.

ExternalMESSyncRequired

Indicates that data for a capability record has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced MES
application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when the
data between Kinetic and the machine MES application for this resource is out of sync.

The Sync Required check box enables for new resources and when any of the following data
changes for an existing resource that synchronizes with a machine MES:

l Capability resource link

l Additional resource link

Only capabilities that have the Machine MES check box selected on the Detail card are
included in the synchronization process.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, all resources on the capability must be a
machine.

ProductionFactor

The ratio of the production time of the resource as compared to the production time of the capability.
The default is 1.0, meaning that the resource is equal to the capability with respect to production
time.

ResourceDescription

The description of the specified resource displays. This field is for display only.

ResourceID

The ID of the resource that has the capability with which you are working. If you do not know the ID,
right-click in this field to access Resource Search and browse for the correct ID.

ResourcePriority

36 October, 2024
Defines the priority or sequence in which the specified resources will be reviewed for availability
during job scheduling. An optional field, this value is used by the scheduling engine to break ties
when two or more resources are available at the same time. The resource with a higher resource
priority value is selected first. For example, a resource with a “3” resource priority is selected before
a resource with a “1” resource priority. The higher the number assigned to the resource, the more
likely the resource will be used during capability selection.

If priority codes (such as 1, 2, 3, and so on) are not entered, the resources are checked for
availability in the order in which they are entered in the grid on this card.

You may also enter a 99999999 value in this field. The scheduling engine now cannot locate this
resource during job scheduling. However, the resource is available to select within Start Activity
(MES Interface) and Labor Entry. Shop employees can then report labor against this resource.

SetupFactor

The ratio of the setup time of the resource as compared to the setup time of the capability. The
default is 1.0, meaning that the resource is equal to the capability with respect to setup time.

Set up Capability Integration

1. For each capability to integrate with Advanced MES, locate the and select the capability in the
Capability field.

2. On the Detail card, select the Machine MES check box.

3. Update any additional capability details.

4. On the Additional Capabilities card, update details for the additional capabilities in the grid.

5. To add a new additional capability, click New > New Additional Capability. Enter the required
information for the additional capability and click Save.

All additional capabilities must also have the Advanced MES check box
selected.

6. On the Resources card, update details for the resources in the grid.

7. To add a new resource, click New > New Resource. Enter the required information for the
resource and click Save.

All resources added to the capability must have a resource type of Machine (M).

8. Repeat these steps for each capability to integrate with Advanced MES.

37 October, 2024
Kinetic Resource Group Setup
To integrate Epicor resources with Advanced MES, you must define Machine MES settings for them.

To integrate resources between Kinetic and Advanced MES, the Epicor Preventative main module
must be installed.

Resource groups, resources and capabilities are synchronized with machines and tools in Advanced
MES. When synchronization occurs, new or changed resource information is exported from Kinetic
to Advanced MES.

The following details how resource groups, capabilities and resources are included in the integration
and what occurs during the synchronization process:

l Resource groups must have the Machine MES check box selected and a Resource Type of
M (machine) in the Detail card. When the synchronization process runs, all resources that
belong to the resource group AND have the Sync Required check box selected synchronize
with Advanced MES.

l Capabilities must have the Machine MES Sync Required check box selected in the Resources
> Capabilities card. When the synchronization process runs, all machine resources that
belong to the capability and all machine resources that belong to additional capabilities
assigned to the capability that have the Machine MES Sync Required check box selected
synchronize with Advanced MES.

l Resources must have the Machine MES check box selected in the Resources > Details card.
When the synchronization process runs, all resources that have the Sync Required check box
selected synchronize with Advanced MES.

When Kinetic tool resources are exported to Advanced MES, they become Tool IDs and are
displayed in .

In Advanced MES, Kinetic machine resources are called machine configurations.

Machine configurations must be manually created in Advanced MES in System

Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration. Kinetic resource ID and the Advanced
MES machine configuration ID MUST be the same. The synchronization process sends
new and updated machine resource data from Kinetic to the corresponding machine
configuration in Advanced MES.

If the resource group has a Resource Type of M (machine) and the Machine MES
check box is selected, all resources moved to the group must also have a Resource
Type of M (machine) and the Machine MES check box must be selected. If the
resource has a Resource Type of M (machine) and the Machine MES check box is

38 October, 2024
 selected, it can only move to a resource group with a Resource Type of M and a
selected Machine MES check box.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Resource Group

l Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Resource Group

l Production Management > Scheduling > Setup > Resource Group

l Sales Management > Configurator Management > Setup > Resource Group

l Service Management > Expense Management > Setup > Resource Group

l Service Management > Field Service > Setup > Resource Group

l Service Management > Maintenance Management > Setup > Resource Group

l Service Management > Project Management > Setup > Resource Group

l Service Management > Time Management > Setup > Resource Group

This application is not available in Epicor Web Access.

Detail Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Percent

Indicates that the Burden Rate is a percentage of the Labor Rate. The default is a flat hourly dollar
rate (Flat).

Flat

Indicates that the Burden Rate is a flat hourly dollar rate. The other choice is a percentage of the
Labor Rate (Percent).The default is Flat.

39 October, 2024
Resource Group

The code that uniquely identifies each resource group. For example:

l LATHES

l C-MILLS

l ASSY BENCH

If you want to edit an existing resource group, and you do not know the resource group code, click
Resource Group to access Resource Group Search and browse for the correct code.

You can also search for a specific resource from within Resource Group Search. Once
you have accessed the Search window, click the Resource button to access Resource
Search to browse for a resource. Once you select the resource and click OK, you can
use Resource Group Search to find the resource group that contains that resource.

Description

Further identifies each resource group. The description appears on reports or windows throughout
the system. For example:

l Lathe Group 120

l CNC Milling Center

l Assembly Bench North

Auto Move

Select this check box to indicate that you do not want to create a material queue request when
completing work in this resource group.

Backflush Bin

Specifies the bin used for backflushing warehouse/bin picking logic. If the resource group's Input
Warehouse/Bin values do not have a positive on-hand quantity at the location, operations are
backflushed from this location. If you do not know the bin ID, click Backflush Bin to access
Warehouse Bin Search and browse for the correct ID.

Backflush Bin...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Backflush Warehouse

40 October, 2024
Specifies the warehouse that is used for warehouse/bin picking. If the resource group's Input
Warehouse/Bin values do not have a positive on-hand quantity at the location, operations are
backflushed from this location.

Definition:

Backflushing The automatic issuing of material. This can occur as the material is
needed for specific labor operations on the site floor, or as part of the job closing
process.

Both warehouses contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on this list.

Burden = Labor

Select this check box to indicate that you want the number of burden hours to be the same as the
number of labor hours entered. Like Split Burden, this option applies only to entered in the Data
Collection module.

Definition:

Direct Labor Time that is spent working on a job. Operating a drill press and doing
assembly work are examples of direct labor. Direct labor can be further identified as
setup or production.

Example: An employee clocks in to two different jobs. Later, the employee clocks out of both jobs.
The results are: Job 1 had 4 hours of labor and 8 hours of burden, and Job 2 also had 4 hours of
labor and 8 hours of burden. With Burden = Labor the check box selected, the total burden in this
example would be 8, not 16.

Calendar

Specifies the description of the calendar.

Calendar

Specifies the production calendar associated with the resource group. This is used as the default
calendar for all resources assigned to this group, but it can be overridden at the resource level.

If you do not know the calendar ID, click Calendar to access Production Calendar Search and
browse for the correct ID.

Use the Resource Calendar card to establish working day exceptions on the specified
calendar for this resource.

41 October, 2024
Please note: The fields listed here are the default fields for the Resource Group Detail card, and
they are grouped by category. Click a category to advance to those field definitions.

Calendar...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Daily Production Capacity

Specifies the production quantity developed to satisfy demand.

The value you enter in this field will have no effect on scheduling unless you define a
Production Consumption Rate value in the following locations:

l Job Entry > Job Details > Operations > Scheduling Resources > Detail >
Production Consumption Rate field.

l Engineering Workbench > Method of Manufacturing > Operations >

Scheduling Resources > Detail > Production Consumption Rate field.

Department

Select the department to which this resource group is assigned. Assigning a department to a
resource group provides a way to collect multiple resource groups for various reporting and selection
purposes.

The department you select on the resource will also override any departments originally
selected to record applied labor and burden.

Description

Specifies the default operation associated with this resource group.

Description

Specifies the operation standard associated with the specified Operation and this resource group.

Employee

Select the employee assigned to the resource group. When labor detail is created, the employee
specified here is used. If this field is blank, the employee ID from the manually entered transaction is
used.

Definition:

42 October, 2024
 Backflushing The automatic issuing of material. This can occur as the material is
needed for specific labor operations on the site floor, or as part of the job closing
process.

Finite Horizon

This field specifies the default horizon (in production days) used by the resource group to specify
how many days ahead of the current application date load is calculated.

Definition:

Finite Capacity - A resource group that has a certain number of machines working for a
certain number of hours in a day, and job operations cannot exceed this capacity.

Infinite Capacity - This resource group has no capacity constraints. In this situation, the
application schedules jobs at the resource group as if its capacity is unlimited.

The settings here for Finite Horizon is the default for each resource that is added to this
resource group, but these values can be changed at the resource level.

The value in this field cannot be greater than the horizon value defined for a site in Site
Maintenance, with an exception of zero. If you attempt to change the value in this field
and you enter a value that is greater than the value defined in Site Maintenance, the
Horizon value cannot be greater than Horizon of the site XXXX error message
displays (where XXXX is your site).

Finite Horizon Hierarchy:

Resource > Resource Group > Site

The Finite Horizon hierarchy is correct, only if Site Horizon is >= than the Resource /
Resource Group horizon.

Flat

Indicates that the Quoting Burden Rate is a flat hourly dollar rate. The other choice is a percentage of
the Quote Labor Rate (Percent).The default is Flat.

In Bin

Specifies the warehouse bin from which the resource group pulls its material. If you do not know the
bin ID, click In Bin to access Warehouse Bin Search and browse for the correct ID.

In Bin...

43 October, 2024
Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Inactive

Select this check box to indicate that this resource group is no longer being used or no longer exists.
If no resources exist for this resource group, this check box will be display as selected, and it will also
be disabled.

Inactive

Select this check box to indicate that this resource group is no longer being used or no longer exists.
If no resources exist for this resource group, this check box will be display as selected, and it will also
be disabled.

Inform of Overload

Select this check box to indicate that you want overload information from this resource group to
appear on the Overload Informer when it occurs.

This field is useful if, for example, you have a subcontract resource group or an
resource group, and you do not want lots of detail about them appearing on the
Overload Informer.

Input Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse from which the resource group pulls its material. Both warehouses
contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on this list.

If you use the Advanced Material module, you should assign input warehouses as soon
as possible. If a resource group for a job operation does not have an input warehouse,
inspection applications DMR Processing and Inspection Processing could
misintKineticret the absence of an input warehouse as a reason to assign a blank
destination warehouse. If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse,
a corresponding move queue is not created on the Material Queue.

When the Input Warehouse and In Bin are the same as the Output Warehouse and
Out Bin, and if Auto Move is checked, no automatic move request is generated, and
the Request Move check box is not selected in Data Collection Report Quantity or
End Activity. This arrangement works well for a production line, cell, or other resource
group that is in close proximity to other resource groups that also need this material.

Location

44 October, 2024
Select this check box to indicate that this resource group is a physical location on the shop floor. This
means that an employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource group will be
posted to the labor transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

Be sure to select this check box if employees will report labor against the current
resource group. If the Location check box is not selected, users will receive an error
within Labor Entry when they attempt to select this resource group.

If this check box is cleared, the rest of the fields in this section are not required.

Machine MES

Select this check box if the machine resources in this group should be synchronized with an external
Manufacturing Execution System (MES). You can assign resources in this group to operation
records which are integrated with a machine MES.

When you select this check box, a confirmation message notifies you that the machine type for all
resources in the group will be changed to M (Machine). Click Yes to continue or No to cancel.

If the select resource type is not M (Machine), this check box is disabled.

If the Machine MES check box is selected and the Resource Type for the resource
group is M (Machine), all resources in the resource group must have a resource type of
Machine.

Min. Overload %

Specifies the minimum overload percentage that this resource group should have to appear on the
Overload Informer. By default, the field is set at 0, meaning that any overload appears on the
Overload Informer. You can enter a value here to set a minimum below which you do not want
resource group details to appear, freeing the Overload Informer of unnecessary information.

Move Hours

Specifies the average number of hours parts "sit" when they leave a particular resource group before
the next operation begins, or the number of hours it takes to move the parts from one resource group
to another. This will be added to the estimated operation hours when operations are scheduled at
this resource group.

Number of Resources

Specifies the number of resources that are linked to this resource group. This field is for display only.

Operation

Specifies the default operation associated with this resource group.

45 October, 2024
When this resource group is added to a method of manufacture (routing) during Job Entry, Quote
Entry, or in the Engineering Workbench, this operation is the one used to create the operation
sequence.

Operation Standard

Specifies the operation standard associated with the specified Operation and this resource group.

The default setup and production estimates from this operation standard will also be the defaults for
any job, quote, or part where this resource group is part of the method of manufacture.

Operation Std...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Operation...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Out Bin

Specifies the warehouse bin where material is to go once the work from this resource group needs to
be moved. If you do not know the bin ID, click Out Bin to access Warehouse Bin Search and browse
for the correct ID.

Out Bin...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Output Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse where material is to go once the work from this resource group needs to be
moved. Both warehouses contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on
this list.

If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse, a corresponding move
queue is not created on the Material Queue.

Percent

Indicates that the Quoting Burden Rate is a percentage of the Quote Labor Rate. The default is a flat
hourly dollar rate (Flat).

Production

46 October, 2024
Specifies the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on an
operation simultaneously. This is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. This is the production crew size that will be the default on methods of manufacture,
quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Production Detail Report

The Estimated Hours on the Production Detail Report reflect the Crew Size value entered in
Resource Group Maintenance. The Crew Size value is used as a multiplier to calculate the
estimated hours displayed on the report. Based on the Crew Size setting in Resource Group
Maintenance, this value may vary from the the value displayed in the Hours field located on the Job
Entry > Job Details > Operations > Detail card.

Example: In Job Entry, you add a single operation with two resource groups and each resource
group carries the following Crew Size values:

Resource Group Crew Size

Assembly 1
Painting 2
The job includes the following job/operation details:

Prod Qty (Make To Stock) Qty/Parent Prod Std Production Hrs (Result)
1 1 2 (Hours/Piece) 2

The Hours field located on the Job Entry > Job Details > Operations > Detail displays 2 hours. Kinetic
calculates this value as follows:

1(Prod Qty) * 2(Prod Std) = 2 (Production Hrs)

If you run the Production Detail Report for this job, based on the Crew Size setting in Resource
Group Maintenance, Kinetic calculates the Estimated Hours as follows:

3(2+1 Crew Size) * 2(Est Hrs) = 6 Est Prod Hours

If the Crew Size value is less than 1, the calculation for the Estimated Hours assume
the value of 1.

For example, in Job Entry, if you add an operation with two resource groups as follows:

47 October, 2024
 l Resource Group #1 - 0.5 (Crew Size)

l Resource Group #2 - 2 (Crew Size).

then the total Crew Size calculates as 3, because:

1 (changes from 0.5 to 1) + 2 = 3 (total crew size)

Production

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as getting
the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Production

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Production

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as getting
the machine ready.

48 October, 2024
The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Production

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Queue Hours

Specifies the average number of hours that parts "sit" before work begins in this resource group. This
will be added to the estimated operation hours when operations are scheduled at this resource
group.

Resource Group...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Resource Type

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource group to classify it for custom reporting
purposes.

If the Machine MES check box is selected and the resource group is integrated with
Advanced MES, this field indicates how the resource group integrates with Advanced
MES.

Machine - Indicates resource group contains Advanced MES machine resources.

These resources are manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine
Configuration.

Tool - Indicates resources in the group are Advanced MES tool resources. This
resource is exported to Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

If the Resource Type is M (machine) and the Machine MES check box is selected, all
resources in the resource group must have a resource type of M (machine).

Resource Type...

Click this button to search for and select a resource type record.

49 October, 2024
Scheduling Blocks

Specifies the number of resources a single job operation requires. This value is normally set to 1.

The scheduling engine divides the production time by the number of scheduling blocks. This
application then finds resources that have capacity available in the required time frame. If enough
capacity is available, the operation's total time can be reduced.

Do not enter more than 1 unless you typically set up more than 1 resource for the same
operation on the same job. If you enter more than 1, operations scheduled in this
resource group will use more of the available capacity. For example, a resource group
with 4 resources at 8 hours per day has a production capacity of 32 hours and a work
day of 8 hours. If you enter a 2 here, a single operation will be scheduled for 16 hours in
a day (using 2 resources) instead of just 8.

Setup

Specifies the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on setup
simultaneously. This is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each operation.
This is the setup crew size that will be the default on methods of manufacture, quotes, and jobs that
use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Production Detail Report

The Estimated Hours on the Production Detail Report reflect the Crew Size value entered in
Resource Group Maintenance. The Crew Size value is used as a multiplier to calculate the
estimated hours displayed on the report. Based on the Crew Size setting in Resource Group
Maintenance, this value may vary from the the value displayed in the Hours field located on the Job
Entry > Job Details > Operations > Detail card.

Example: In Job Entry, you add a single operation with two resource groups and each resource
group carries the following Crew Size values:

Resource Group Crew Size

Assembly 1
Painting 2
The job includes the following job/operation details:

Prod Qty (Make To Stock) Qty/Parent Prod Std Production Hrs (Result)
1 1 2 (Hours/Piece) 2

50 October, 2024
The Hours field located on the Job Entry > Job Details > Operations > Detail displays 2 hours. Kinetic
calculates this value as follows:

1(Prod Qty) * 2(Prod Std) = 2 (Production Hrs)

If you run the Production Detail Report for this job, based on the Crew Size setting in Resource
Group Maintenance, Kinetic calculates the Estimated Hours as follows:

3(2+1 Crew Size) * 2(Est Hrs) = 6 Est Prod Hours

If the Crew Size value is less than 1, the calculation for the Estimated Hours assume
the value of 1.

For example, in Job Entry, if you add an operation with two resource groups as follows:

l Resource Group #1 - 0.5 (Crew Size)

l Resource Group #2 - 2 (Crew Size).

then the total Crew Size calculates as 3, because:

1 (changes from 0.5 to 1) + 2 = 3 (total crew size)

Setup

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as getting
the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Setup

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

51 October, 2024
Setup

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as getting
the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Setup

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Split Burden

This check box controls the distribution of labor and burden hours during entry in the Data Collection
module. Use this option only if you use Data Collection. If multiple employees work on the same job
operation at the same time, and you normally want to split the burden (machine) hours among those
labor entries to more accurately reflect the actual machine usage, select this check box.

Definition:

Direct Labor Time that is spent working on a job. Operating a drill press and doing
assembly work are examples of direct labor. Direct labor can be further identified as
setup or production.

On the other hand, if you always want burden hours to equal labor hours (for example, for an
assembly resource group where the resources are employees), select the Burden = Labor check
box.

Example: One employee reports working on a job operation from 7:00 to 8:00; another reports
working on the same operation from 7:30 to 8:30. If you select to split the burden at the resource
group where the operation occurred, the system will calculate labor and burden hours by assuming
that the resource was only running for 1 ½ hours (7 - 8:30), even though 2 labor hours were reported.

52 October, 2024
Split Operations

Select this check box to indicate Production Time on a resource can be divided evenly between
multiple scheduling blocks at different points within the schedule for all resources in this resource
group. As the engine allocates scheduling blocks against a resource, it can separate these blocks at
points wherever capacity is available.

When this check box is selected, the scheduling engine can create scheduling blocks that produce
fractions of quantities like 33 , 33 , and 34. The split means that a part quantity can be started during
one scheduling block but then finished during another scheduling block.

Subcontract

Select this check box to indicate that this resource group is used for subcontract (outside processing)
operations. You would select this check box if the resource group you are creating is actually one of
your suppliers or is located at a supplier's site.

Track

Select this check box to track production activity of the resource group.

Use Calendar for Move Time

Select this check box to use the calendar for move time.

Use Calendar for Queue Time

Select this check box to use the calendar for queue time.

Use Estimates

Select this check box to apportion the actual labor time reported against operations by using the
estimated time on each operation. When an employee clocks into multiple operations on the same
resource group at the same time, this functionality uses the estimated hours on each operation to
calculate how much actual labor time to place against each operation.

If an employee is clocked into multiple operations within different resource groups -- and one
resource group has its Use Estimates check box selected, the application includes the operation
estimates when applying labor against each operation.

This check box is available regardless of whether you calculate burden using either the Split Burden
or Burden = Labor options.

Example:

P.T. Jones clocks into two operations at the same resource group which has the Use Estimates
option selected on its record:

-- The first operation has a run quantity of 5 with a production standard of 2 hours per piece for a total
of 10 hours of estimated production.

53 October, 2024
-- The second operation has a run quantity of 10 with a production standard of 2 pieces per hour for a
total of 5 hours of estimated production.

P.T. Jones works for 9 hours total on both operations. The application apportions the time, assigning
6hours of labor to the first operation and 3 hours of labor to the second operation.

Detail Fields
Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Resource

Specifies the code that uniquely identifies each resource. For example:

l 3VM1

l ARC2

l AUX1

You can search for a specific resource from within Resource Group Search. Once you
have accessed the Search window, click the Resource button to access Resource
Search to browse for a resource. Once you select the resource and click OK, you can
use Resource Group Search to find the resource group that contains that resource.

For machine resources, if you integrate your Kinetic with Advanced MES, Kinetic
resource ID must match the Advanced MES machine configuration ID.

Description

Further identifies each resource. The description appears on reports or windows throughout the
application.

Asset Number

If applicable, specify the asset number for this resource.

The following Asset Management license rules apply to this field:

l If you don't have the Asset Management license installed, the Asset Number field remains
active and you can enter a value in this field. However, the entered value is for informational
purposes only.

l If you do have the Asset Management license installed, the application will link the asset value
you enter in this field with the existing asset record entered in Asset Maintenance.

54 October, 2024
 Example: Using Asset Maintenance, you enter a new asset called AssetOne. If you enter
AssetOne in this field for a resource group and relaunch Asset Maintenance, the AssetOne
record will display the resource group you entered this asset for in the Asset Maintenance >
Asset > References > Resource Group field.

Auto Move

Select this check box to indicates that you want to create a material queue record when completing
work at this resource.

Backflush Bin

Specifies the bin used for backflushing warehouse/bin picking logic. If the resource's Input
Warehouse/Bin values do not have a positive on-hand quantity at the location, operations are
backflushed from this location. If you do not know the bin ID, click Backflush Bin to access
Warehouse Bin Search and browse for the correct ID.

Logic:

1. Resource Input Warehouse/Bin if Onhand Qty > 0.

2. Resource Group Input Warehouse/Bin if Onhand Qty > 0.

3. Resource Backflush Warehouse/Bin if defined.

4. Resource Group Backflush Warehouse/Bin if defined.

5. Primary Bin of the Job Material Warehouse if defined.

6. First bin of Job Material Warehouse that has quantity for the Inventory Tracking UOM.

7. First bin of Job Material Warehouse that has quantity regardless of UOM.

8. First bin of Warehouse.

Backflush Bin...

Click this button to search for and select an existing backflush bin record.

Backflush Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse used for warehouse/bin picking. If the resource group's Input
Warehouse/Bin values do not have a positive on-hand quantity at the location, operations are
backflushed from this location.

Definition:

55 October, 2024
 Backflushing The automatic issuing of material. This can occur as the material is
needed for specific labor operations on the site floor, or as part of the job closing
process.

Logic:

1. Resource Input Warehouse/Bin if Onhand Qty > 0.

2. Resource Group Input Warehouse/Bin if Onhand Qty > 0.

3. Resource Backflush Warehouse/Bin if defined.

4. Resource Group Backflush Warehouse/Bin if defined.

5. Primary Bin of the Job Material Warehouse if defined.

6. First bin of Job Material Warehouse that has quantity for the Inventory Tracking UOM.

7. First bin of Job Material Warehouse that has quantity regardless of UOM.

8. First bin of a Warehouse.

Calendar Description

Description of the production calendar associated with the resource.

Calendar ID

Specifies the production calendar associated with the resource.

If you do not know the calendar ID, click Calendar to access Production Calendar Search and
browse for the correct ID.

Use the Resource Calendar card to establish working day exceptions on the specified
calendar for this resource.

The settings here for Finite Capacity, Finite Horizon, and Calendar are the defaults
from the associated resource group, but they can be changed at this level.

Please note: The fields listed here are the default fields for the Resources Detail card, and they are
grouped by category. Click a category to advance to those field definitions.

The fields in this section are only available if you have the Advanced Materials
Management module installed.

Calendar...

56 October, 2024
Click this button to search for and select an existing production calendar record.

Concurrent Capacity

Specifies the amount of capacity available on the resource that can run during a specific moment in
time. This value is a non-time constraint that prevents scheduled operations from overloading the
resource. This is because the resource has, at any given time, only this defined amount of
concurrent capacity available.

Definition:

Concurrent Happening at the same time. Operating in conjunction.

Use this value when you have different operations with items you produce using the same resource.
If this value is defined, the engine adds another modifier in addition to time. When this Concurrent
Capacity value is reached, the engine will not schedule additional operations at this resource – even
if more capacity or time is available. The engine will then schedule the operation when both time and
concurrent capacity are available.

Example: An oven resource has 4 racks. You typically have capacity for 40 racks per day. The
oven's 4 racks can be used simultaneously for the same operation, but once they have been
selected for that operation, they are tied up until this operation is complete. For this resource, the
Daily Production Capacity is set to 40; this is the most capacity that can ever be scheduled at this
resource during a single day. Likewise, the Concurrent Capacity is set to 4; this is the maximum
number of racks that can be run at the same time.

The scheduling system checks to make sure the concurrent capacity for a resource is not exceeded
during a specific time. If concurrent capacity is exceeded, the system schedules the operation at the
next available time.

Example: Operation A needs an oven rack from 1:15 to 3:30. If Operation B is already using 4 racks
between 2:01 to 2:15, Operation A will not be scheduled during this requested time. If you forward
schedule, Operation A would be rescheduled with a new start time of 2:15. If you backward
schedule, Operation A would be rescheduled using a new end time of 2:01.

Create

Specifies if a capital equipment record should be created for this resource. Select the check box to
create an equipment record for use in the Maintenance Management module. This allows you to
identify the resource as a capital piece of equipment, for which maintenance tasks are being tracked
in the Maintenance Management module. You can update the resulting record in Equipment
Maintenance.

Clear the check box to skip creation of an equipment maintenance record for this resource.

Daily Production Capacity

57 October, 2024
Specifies the amount of non-time units the resource can produce in a day. This setting can be used
to mark a resource as constrained in a way other than time. For instance, a resource may only be
able to produce a certain number of cubic yards of cement per day, or an oven may only have a
certain number of racks that can be filled in a day.

Example: An oven resource contains 4 racks. This is its Daily Production Capacity. If one part takes
up 1/4 of a rack as it's being manufactured, enter .25 as its Production Consumption Rate at the job
or method of manufacture level. If a job has a production quantity of 16, it would consume all 4 racks
for the day.

(Production Qty) 16 * (Production Consumption Rate) .25 = 4 (Daily Production Capacity is 4 for
the resource).

The value you enter in this field will have no effect on scheduling unless you define a
Production Consumption Rate value in the following locations:

l Job Entry > Job Details > Operations > Scheduling Resources > Detail >
Production Consumption Rate field.

l Engineering Workbench > Method of Manufacturing > Operations >

Scheduling Resources > Detail > Production Consumption Rate field.

Description

Specifies a description of the operation.

Description

Specifies a description of the operation standard.

Description

Displays a description of the linked part.

Equipment ID

Displays the identifier for the equipment record (if any) associated with this resource.

Finite Capacity

Capacity is the supply of each resource. It measures either how much time is available on the
resource or the number of units that can be produced (non-time constraints) during each working
day.

Select this check box to indicate this resource has limited, or finite capacity. The scheduling engine
will consider this resource only works for a certain number of hours or produces a specific quantity
each day, and that job operations cannot exceed this capacity. For example, if a resources's
capacity is fifteen hours per day, only fifteen hours of load are assigned against this resource each

58 October, 2024
working day. Finite scheduling also takes into account any required, or constrained, materials the
operation needs to complete production. If these materials are not available, load will not be
assigned to the resource on that working day.

Clear this check box to indicate this resource has infinite capacity. The scheduling engine will than
place more load against a resource, even if this load exceeds the resource's available capacity. This
calculation logic creates the best possible schedule, which can help you locate resources causing
bottlenecks in your production workflow.

You must select the Finite Capacity check box to use finite scheduling on quotes. You
can then more accurately predict when you can deliver a part quantity on the quote.

Finite Horizon

Specifies the default horizon (in production days) used by the resource to specify how many days
ahead of the current system date load is calculated using . Any load required on the next day after
the last finite horizon date is calculated using.

Definition:

Finite Capacity A resource has a certain number of machines working for a certain
number of hours in a day, and job operations cannot exceed this capacity.

Infinite Capacity The resource has no capacity constraints. In this situation, the
application schedules jobs at the resource as if its capacity is unlimited.

If you enter a 0 in this field, it means that there is no horizon limit. The engine always calculates this
resource using infinite scheduling capacity.

The Finite Horizon value defined for the resource group displays here by default. If needed, however,
you can change this value.

The value in this field cannot be greater than the horizon value defined for a site in Site
Maintenance, with an exception of zero. If you attempt to change the value in this field
and you enter a value that is greater than the value defined in Site Maintenance, the
Horizon value cannot be greater than Horizon of the site XXXX error message
displays (where XXXX are your site).

Finite Horizon Hierarchy:

Resource > Resource Group > Site

The Finite Horizon hierarchy is correct, only if Site Horizon is >= than the Resource /
Resource Group horizon.

59 October, 2024
Flat

Indicates how you calculate burden cost for this resource. Flat rates are dollar amounts that will be
multiplied by the number of burden hours reported. Percent rates will be multiplied by the operation's
labor rate for each transaction to generate the burden cost.

Flat

Indicates how you calculate burden cost for this resource. Flat rates are dollar amounts that will be
multiplied by the number of burden hours reported. Percent rates will be multiplied by the operation's
labor rate for each transaction to generate the burden cost.

In Bin

Specifies the warehouse bin from which the resource pulls its material. If you do not know the bin ID,
click In Bin to access Warehouse Bin Search and browse for the correct ID.

In Bin...

Click this button to search for and select an existing in bin record.

Inactive

Select this check box to indicate that this resource is no longer being used or no longer exists.

If this box is checked, the Resource is not displayed during a search for Resources for Engineering
purposes. However, it is still available for labor reporting. If a job exists that requires an inactive
Resource, an error appears when the job is Engineered.

If a currently Engineered job has a resource, and then the resource becomes Inactive, the
scheduling engine will return an error when the job is scheduled.

Inform of Overload

Select this check box to indicate that you want overload information from this resource to display on
the Overload Informer when it occurs.

This field is useful if, for example, you have a subcontract resource or an resource, and you do not
want lots of detail about them appearing on the Overload Informer.

Input Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse from which the resource pulls its material.

If you use the Advanced Material module, you should assign input warehouses as
soon as possible. If a resource for a job operation does not have an input warehouse,
inspection applications DMR Processing and Inspection Processing could

60 October, 2024
 misintKineticret the absence of an input warehouse as a reason to assign a blank
destination warehouse.

When the Input Warehouse and In Bin are the same as the Output Warehouse and
Out Bin, no automatic move request is generated, and the Request Move check box is
not selected in Data Collection Report Quantity or End Activity. This arrangement
works well for a resource that is in close proximity to other resources that also need this
material.

Insp Plan Num

Indicates the identifier for the inspection plan being used for calibration of the piece of equipment (if
any) associated with this resource. You select an inspection plan if the Enhanced Quality Assurance
module is being used.

Inspection Plan...

Click this button to search for and select an inspection plan record.

Last Calibration Date

Specifies a date when the item was calibrated using the Inspection Data Entry process.

Linked Part

If the resource is a tool or something else has a part number associated with it, enter that part
number in this field. You can also click the Linked Part button to find and select the part. Note that
the part you enter here must exist in your part records (the part master).

Linked Part...

Click this botton to search for and select a part record.

Location

Select this check box to indicate that this resource is a physical location on the shop floor. This
means that an employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource will be posted
to the labor transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

If this check box is cleared, the rest of the fields in this section are not required.

A resource cannot be flagged as a Location if the resource group is not flagged as a

Location.

Machine MES

61 October, 2024
Select this check box to synchronize the entered resource with an external Manufacturing Execution
System (MES). You can assign this resource to operation records which are integrated with an
external MES.

Min. Overload %

Specifies the minimum overload percentage that this resource should have to display on the
Overload Informer. By default, the field is set at 0, meaning that any overload displays on the
Overload Informer. You can enter a value in this field to set a minimum below which you do not want
resource details to appear, freeing the Overload Informer of unnecessary information.

Move Hours

Specifies the average number of hours parts sit when they leave a particular resource before the
next operation begins, or the number of hours it takes to move the parts from one resource to
another. This will be added to the estimated operation hours when operations are scheduled at this
resource.

Move Resource...

Click the button to move the resource.

Operation

Specifies the default operation associated with this resource. When this resource is added to a
method of manufacture (routing) during Job Entry, Quote Entry, or in the Engineering Workbench,
this operation is the one used to create the operation sequence.

Operation Std

Specifies the operation standard associated with the specified Operation and this resource. The
default setup and production estimates from this operation standard will also be the defaults for any
job, quote, or part where this resource is part of the method of manufacture.

Operation Std...

Click this button to search for and select an operation standard record.

Operation...

Click this button to search for and select an operation record.

Out Bin

Specifies the warehouse bin that receives quantities when material work from this resource needs to
be moved. If you do not know the bin ID, click the Out Bin button to access Warehouse Bin Search
and browse for the correct ID; all bins contained within the selected Output Warehouse display
through this search application. The output warehouse and its corresponding bin display on material

62 October, 2024
queue requests. If you leave this field blank, the warehouse bin selected as the In Bin is used by
default.

Out Bin...

Click this button to search for and select an existing out bin record.

Output Warehouse

Defines a warehouse for the output of a Resource Group. This must be valid in the Warehouse table.

Percent

Indicates how you calculate burden cost for this resource. Flat rates are dollar amounts that will be
multiplied by the number of burden hours reported. Percent rates will be multiplied by the operation's
labor rate for each transaction to generate the burden cost.

Percent

Indicates how you calculate burden cost for this resource. Flat rates are dollar amounts that will be
multiplied by the number of burden hours reported. Percent rates will be multiplied by the operation's
labor rate for each transaction to generate the burden cost.

Production

These rates control the labor cost associated with running each resource. Separate rates can be
assigned for production and reported in each resource. The Production Rate is multiplied by the
labor hours at the time of labor entry.

Production

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource. Separate
rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the
time of labor entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The
Setup Rate is multiplied by the setup hours or cost.

Example:

If you cost production burden as 110% of labor, select Percent as the burden rate type and enter a
production costing rate of 110.00.

63 October, 2024
If you cost setup burden at $55.00 per hour, select Flat as the burden rate type and enter a setup
costing rate of 55.00.

You must select either Percent or Flat for both the production and the setup costing burden rates. In
other words, you cannot select Percent for the production burden rate type and then select Flat as
the setup burden rate type.

Note that the system calculates burden by first checking the rates defined on the resource used for
the labor transaction. If the resource does not have burden rates, the application will then use the
rates defined on the resource group.

Production

Kinetic uses these rates as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource. If
you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the defaults in
Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not used. The
Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry.

Production

Kinetic uses these rates as the burden costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote
Management module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup burden quoted in
each resource. If you do not enter any quoting rates (here or at the resource group level), the rates
appear as zero in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are
not used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Example:

If you quote production burden as 120% of labor, select Percent as the burden rate type and enter a
production quoting burden rate of 120.00.

If you quote setup burden at $45.00 per hour, select Flat as the burden rate type and enter a setup
quoting burden rate of 45.00

You must select either Percent or Flat for both the production and the setup costing burden rates. In
other words, you cannot select Percent for the production burden rate type and then select Flat as
the setup burden rate type.

Note that the system calculates burden by first checking the rates defined on the resource used for
the labor transaction. If the resource does not have burden rates, the system will then use the rates
defined on the resource group.

64 October, 2024
 If this resource integrates with a machine in Advanced MES, you must align the
production rate with the cycle speeds in Advanced MES. In Advanced MES, the
production rate may match cycles per Hour or Minute in Kinetic and cannot be changed
per routing. The easiest option is Cycle/Hour or Strokes/Min.

It is important to know how the Advanced MES machine is configured. The Machine
Speed value in Advanced MES is located in the Advanced MES > System
Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration > General card.

The available cycle speed options in Advanced MES are the following:

l Cycle Time

l Cycles/Hour = Cycles/Hour

l Strokes/Minute = Pieces/Minute

l [Link]

l Feet/Minute

Queue Hours

Specifies the average number of hours that parts sit before work begins in this resource. This will be
added to the estimated operation hours when operations are scheduled at this resource.

Resource Type

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource to classify it for custom reporting purposes.

If the resource is integrated with Advanced MES, this field indicates how the resource
integrates with Advanced MES.
l Machine - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES machine resource. This
resource is manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine
Configuration.
l Tool - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES tool resource. This resource is
exported to Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

Resource Type Description

Description of the resource type assigned to this resource.

Resource Type...

Click this button to search for and select a resource type record.

Setup

65 October, 2024
These rates control the labor cost associated with running each resource. Separate rates can be
assigned for production and reported in each resource. The Setup Rate is multiplied by the setup
hours.

Setup

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource. Separate
rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

Depending on your costing conventions, you will multiply the hours worked at this
resource group by either the production rate or labor rate to determine the total
burdened cost for the production run.

Example:

If you cost production burden as 110% of labor, select Percent as the burden rate type and enter a
production costing rate of 110.00.

If you cost setup burden at $55.00 per hour, select Flat as the burden rate type and enter a setup
costing rate of 55.00.

You must select either Percent or Flat for both the production and the setup costing burden rates. In
other words, you cannot select Percent for the production burden rate type and then select Flat as
the setup burden rate type.

Note that the system calculates burden by first checking the rates defined on the resource used for
the labor transaction. If the resource does not have burden rates, the application will then use the
rates defined on the resource group.

Setup

Kinetic uses these rates as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource. If
you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates display as the defaults in
Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not used. The
Setup Rate is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Setup

Kinetic uses these rates as the burden costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote
Management module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup burden quoted in
each resource. If you do not enter any quoting rates (here or at the resource group level), the rates

66 October, 2024
appear as zero in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are
not used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Example:

If you quote production burden as 120% of labor, select Percent as the burden rate type and enter a
production quoting burden rate of 120.00.

If you quote setup burden at $45.00 per hour, select Flat as the burden rate type and enter a setup
quoting burden rate of 45.00

You must select either Percent or Flat for both the production and the setup costing burden rates. In
other words, you cannot select Percent for the production burden rate type and then select Flat as
the setup burden rate type.

Note that the system calculates burden by first checking the rates defined on the resource used for
the labor transaction. If the resource does not have burden rates, the system will then use the rates
defined on the resource group.

Spec ID

Indicates the identifier for the specification being used for calibration of the piece of equipment (if
any) associated with this resource. You select a specification if the Enhanced Quality Assurance
module is being used.

Specification ID...

Click this button to search for and select a specification record.

Split Operations

Select this check box to indicate Production Time on this resource can be divided evenly between
multiple scheduling blocks at different points within the schedule. As the engine allocates scheduling
blocks against a resource, it can separate these blocks at points wherever capacity is available.

When this check box is selected, the scheduling engine can create scheduling blocks that produce
fractions of quantities like 33 , 33 , and 34. The split means that a part quantity can be started during
one scheduling block but then finished during another scheduling block.

Use Resource Group Values

Select this check box for the application to look at the values defined at the resource group level.

Use Resource Group Values

Select this check box if you want this resource to use the costing and quoting labor rate values set at
the resource group level on the Resource Group Maintenance > Detail card.

67 October, 2024
If you select this check box, the fields in this section are set to the resource group values, and they
are unavailable for update.

Use Resource Group Values

Select this check box if you want this resource to use the costing and quoting burden rate values set
at the resource group level on the Resource Group Maintenance > Detail card.

If you select this check box, the fields in this section are set to the resource group values, and they
are unavailable for update.

Capabilities Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

CapIDDescription

The description of the capability.

CapabilityID

The ID of the capability that the resource possesses.

Machine MES Last Sync

Displays the date and time that this record was last synchronized between Kinetic and the machine
MES.

Machine MES Sync Required

Indicates that data for a capability record has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced MES
application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when the
data between Kinetic and the machine MES application for this resource is out of sync.

The Sync Required check box enables for new resources and when any of the following data
changes for an existing resource that synchronizes with a machine MES:

l Capability resource link

l Additional resource link

Only capabilities that have the Machine MES check box selected on the Detail card are
included in the synchronization process.

68 October, 2024
 Capabilities must have the Machine MES Sync Required check box selected in the
Resources > Capabilities card. When the synchronization process runs, all machine
resources that belong to the capability and all machine resources that belong to
additional capabilities assigned to the capability that have the Machine MES Sync
Required check box selected synchronize with Advanced MES.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, all resources on the capability must be a
machine.

Machine MES Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Brand

Specifies the tool maker for the tool.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Maker value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID > General
card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Loc Id

Specifies a present location of the tool.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Location value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID > General
card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Machine MES Last Sync

Displays the date and time that this resource record was last synchronized between Kinetic and the
machine MES.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Misc Info

69 October, 2024
Specifies additional notes about the tool. This is a user definable field.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Comment 1 value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID > General
card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Num Cavs

Specifies the total number of cavities for the tool. If the resource type for the resource is T (Tool), the
value cannot be 0.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Total Cavities value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID >
General card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Pm Map No

Specifies a PM map number. The PM map is the preventative maintenance map selected for this
tool. PM maps are collections of PM codes used for preventive maintenance tracking and
forecasting. When you create machine maintenance codes, you can set up the application to
forecast the next maintenance based on the machine run time, calendar time, or machine cycles.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the PM Map value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID > General
card.

The PM codes and maps are defined in the System Configuration > Site > Codes > Tool
PM Code Map card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Runner Wt

Specifies the runner weight value. The tool runner weight is the amount of excess material that is
consumed during a machine cycle and that does not go into the resulting part.

70 October, 2024
 This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Runner Weight value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID >
General card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Setup Time

Specifies a setup time value. The setup time is an estimate of the amount of time that is required to
setup the tool before the job will be ready to produce parts. The Job Schedule uses this value to
adjust forecasted start/end times for non-running jobs.

Setup time is only defined here and is ignored on the operation. The setup time on the operation is
used for scheduling and an estimated cost.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Setup Time value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID > General
card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Setup URL

Specifies a web address (URL) of a setup card that is associated with this tool. You can view the
web-based setup card using the Document Control Center or by pressing the View Document
button.

The Setup URL displays in the Advanced MES application to the shop floor and can be used to set
up instructions.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Setup Document value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID >
General card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Sync Required

Indicates that data for a resource record has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced MES
application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when the
data between Kinetic and the machine MES application for this resource is out of sync.

71 October, 2024
The Sync Required check box enables for new resources and when any of the following data
changes for an existing resource that synchronizes with a machine MES:

l Resource type

l Machine MES check box

l Number of cavities

l Runner weight

l Resource description

l Setup time and tear down time

l Status

l Miscellaneous info

l Brand and location

l (PM) Preventative maintenance map

l Setup URL

Only resources that have the Machine MES check box selected on the Resource >
Detail card are included in the synchronization process.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Tear Down Time

Specifies a tear-down time value. The tear-down time is an estimate of the time that is required to
tear down/uninstall this tool after the job is complete. The Job Scheduled uses this value to adjust
forecasted start times.

Tear down time is not supported in Kinetic, but it is in Advanced MES. The entered time is in minutes.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only, where a user defines
the Tear-Down Time value for each tool in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Tool ID >
General card.

If the resource does not have a resource type of T (Tool), this field is disabled. Select
the resource type for the resource in the Resources > Detail card.

Set up Kinetic Machine Resource Group

72 October, 2024
Use the Detail card in the Resource Group Maintenance application to set up machine resource
groups for integration with Advanced MES machine configurations. If the resource group has a
resource type of (M) Machine and is Machine MES enabled, all resources that belong to the group
are integrated with Advanced MES and must have a Machine Resource Type. Machine resource
groups are not sent to Advanced MES during the export batch process, but the resources in the
resource group must be manually synchronized with Advanced MES.

To set a resource group up for Advanced MES integration, all resources in the group
must have a product type of M (Machine) and must have the Advanced MES check
box selected. If you add a resource to a Advanced MES enabled resource group, the
resource must be a machine and must have the Machine MES selected.

1. For each machine resource group to integrate with MES, locate the resource group in
Resource Group Maintenance and press Edit.

2. On the Detail card, enter the following data for each resource group to integrate with
Advanced MES:

By default, resources in the resource group use the values defined for the
resource group but you can change them on the resource level as needed.

a. In the Resource Type field, select a resource type with an ExtMesToolType of M

(Machine).

b. Select the Machine MES check box.

When you select the Machine MES check box for a resource group, the
Machine MES check boxes for all existing resources in the group are
disabled. If the resource group has a Resource Type of Machine and the
Machine MES check box selected, all resources in the group must have a
Resource Type of Machine.

c. Enter the required detail information for the resource group. For more information on
resource group fields, refer to Resource Group Maintenance - Detail Fields.

d. Click Save.

e. Navigate to Resources > Detail card for each resource in the group. In the Resource
field, record the resource number for use when setting up the Machine Configuration for
the machine in Advanced MES. Kinetic machine resource ID and the Advanced MES
machine configuration ID must match. Epicor is x(8) and Advanced MES is x(6). In all
three master tables, Advanced MES Machine = Kinetic Resource = Kinetic Equipment.

73 October, 2024
 For more information on setting up machine resources on Kinetic, refer to
the Set up Kinetic Machine Resource section of this guide.

3. Repeat these steps for each machine resource group to integrate with Advanced MES
machine configurations.

Set up Kinetic Machine Resource

If the resource group is Machine MES enabled, all resources in the group must have a Resource
Type of M (Machine) and must have the Machine MES check box selected.

Use the Detail card in the Resource Group Maintenance application to set up machine
resources for integration with Advanced MES machine configurations. Machine
resources are not sent to Advanced MES during the export batch process, but must be
manually synchronized with Advanced MES.

1. For each machine resource to integrate with MES, locate the machine in Resource Group
Maintenance and press Edit.

2. On the Resources > Detail card, enter the following data for each machine to integrate with
Advanced MES:

a. In the Resource field, record the resource number for use when setting up the Machine
Configuration for the machine in Advanced MES. Kinetic machine resource ID and the
Advanced MES machine configuration ID must match. Epicor is x(8) and Advanced
MES is x(6). In all three master tables, Advanced MES Machine = Kinetic Resource =
Kinetic Equipment.

b. In the Description field, enter the resource description.

c. In the Resource Type field, select a resource type with an ExtMesToolType of M.

d. Select the Machine MES check box.

If the Machine MES check box for the resource group is selected, this field
is view only.

e. If the machine resource is a physical location on the shop floor, select the Location
check box. This means that an employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from
this resource will be posted to the labor transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

74 October, 2024
 You must enter In, Out and Backflush Warehouse and Bin information if
you have AMM - Advanced Material Module installed. For more information
on the Advanced Material Module, refer to Kinetic help for AMM and
Consulting.

f. If the Location check box is selected and you have the AMM - Advanced Material
Module, enter the warehouse location from which inventory will be pulled in the Input
Warehouse field.

g. If the Location check box is selected, enter the stock location bin from which inventory
will be pulled to fulfill production requirements in the In Bin field. Click In Bin to display a
list of bins for the selected Input Warehouse.

In and Out Bins are mandatory if your company has Kinetic AMM -
Advanced Materials Management. If you do not use AMM, do not select in
and out bins. For more information, refer to Kinetic Help for AMM and
Consulting.

h. If the Location check box is selected, enter the warehouse where items will be placed
for this resource in the Output Warehouse field.

i. If the Location check box is selected, enter the stock location bin where inventory will be
placed for the machine resource in the Out Bin field. Click Out Bin to display a list of
bins for the selected Output Warehouse.

In and Out Bins are mandatory if your company has Kinetic AMM -
Advanced Materials Management. If you do not use AMM, do not select in
and out bins. For more information, refer to Kinetic Help for AMM and
Consulting.

j. If the Location check box is selected, enter the warehouse location that should be used
for backflushing if the Input Warehouse does not have sufficient parts in the Backflush
Warehouse field.

k. If the Location check box is selected, enter the stock location bin from which inventory
will be pulled when the input bin does not have adequate inventory levels in the
Backflush Bin field. Click Backflush Bin to display a list of bins for the selected
Backflush Warehouse.

l. In the Costing Burden Rates field, try to match the Advanced MES > System
Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration > General card > Machine Speed value as
closely as possible.

75 October, 2024
 m. Select the Create check box next to the Equipment ID field to populate the Equipment
ID field with the Resource ID. The Equipment ID field must match the Resource ID
field. This field is required for Advanced MES integration.

n. In the Inspection Plan field, enter the inspection plan if known.

o. Enter all other required detail information for the resource. For more information on
individual fields, refer to the Resource - Detail Fields section of this document.

p. Click Save.

3. On the Resources > Capabilities card, verify that the Machine MES Sync Required check box
is selected for each capability in the list. If there are no capabilities in the list, skip this step.

4. On the Resources > Machine MES card, enter the following data:

a. In the Num Cavs field, enter 1. The number of cavities must be 1.

b. In the Runner Wt field, enter the amount of excess material that is consumed during a
machine cycle and that does not go into the resulting part.

c. In the Setup Time field, enter the amount of time required perform setup for the Machine
in minutes. Setup time is only defined here and is ignored on the operation.

d. In the Tear Down Time field, enter the amount of time required to tear down the
machine after use in minutes. Tear down time is not supported in Kinetic but is
supported in Advanced MES.

e. In the Misc Info field, enter any miscellaneous information about the machine that
should appear in Advanced MES.

f. In the Brand field, enter the maker for the machine.

g. In the Loc ID field, enter the present physical location for the machine.

h. In the PM Map No field, enter the Advanced MES preventative maintenance map
number. This number corresponds to the preventative map code number defined in
Advanced MES.

i. In the Setup URL field, enter the URL path to the setup card associated with this
machine. In Advanced MES, the setup card displays on the PCMIU and MIU and can be
used for setup instructions.

j. Select the Sync Required check box to indicate that this resource record needs to be
synchronized between Kinetic and Advanced MES. Once the synchronization process
runs, this check box is selected automatically when changes are made to the resource
that require synchronization. You can also select it manually to indicate that you want to

76 October, 2024
 synchronize the record the next time the synchronization process runs.

k. Click Save.

5. Repeat these steps for each machine resource to integrate with Advanced MES machine
configurations.

Set up Kinetic Tool Resource

Use the Detail card in the Resource Group Maintenance application to set up tool resources for
integration with Advanced MES.

A tool resource cannot be in a resource group that has the Machine MES check box
selected and has a resource type of M (Machine).

1. For each tool resource to integrate with MES, locate the tool in Resource Group Maintenance
and press Edit.

2. On the Resources > Detail card, enter the following data for each tool to integrate with
Advanced MES:

a. In the Resource Type field, select a resource type with an ExtMesToolType of T.

b. Select the Machine MES check box.

c. Clear the Location check box. For tools, location must not be selected.

d. Select the Create check box next to the Equipment ID field to populate the Equipment
ID field with the Resource ID. The Equipment ID field must match the Resource ID
field. This field is required for Advanced MES integration.

e. In the Inspection Plan field, enter an inspection plan if known.

f. Enter any other required details for the tool. For more information on individual fields,
refer to the Resource - Detail Fields section of this document.

g. Click Save.

3. On the Resources > Machine MES card, enter the following data:

a. In the Num Cavs field, enter 1. The number of cavities must be 1 or the actual number of
cavities in the mold.

b. In the Runner Wt field, enter the amount of excess material that is consumed during a
machine cycle and that does not go into the resulting part.

77 October, 2024
 c. In the Setup Time field, enter the amount of time required perform setup for the tool in
minutes. Setup time is only defined here and is ignored on the operation.

d. In the Tear Down Time field, enter the amount of time required to tear down the tool
after use in minutes. Tear down time is not supported in Kinetic, but is supported in
Advanced MES.

e. In the Misc Info field, enter any miscellaneous information about the tool that should
appear in Advanced MES.

f. In the Brand field, enter the maker for the tool.

g. In the Loc ID field, enter the present physical location for the tool.

h. In the PM Map No field, enter the Advanced MES preventative maintenance map
number. This number corresponds to the preventative map code number defined in
Advanced MES.

i. In the Setup URL field, enter the URL path to the setup card associated with this tool. In
Advanced MES, the setup card displays on the PCMIU and MIU and can be used for
setup instructions.

j. Click Save.

4. Repeat these steps for each tool resource to integrate with Advanced MES Tool IDs.

Kinetic Operation Maintenance

Use Operation Maintenance to enter procedures that shop employees must perform when working
on a job.

Operations are not interfaced with Advanced MES. They are used for building the routing for the
manufacture of products in Kinetic. Operations you create in this application can be used to create
part specific operations in Quotes, Jobs and the Engineering Work Bench. The Operations created in
the Engineering Work Bench are part-specific and are used to create Advanced MES Process cards.

Review About Advanced MES Process cards for more information about process
cards.

Job operations or operation sequences define the sequence of labor steps required to make each
part.

Example: Mold, Stamp and C&C Machine.

In the Engineering Work Bench, you enter operations for each part revision or alternate revision.
You can also enter operations in Opportunity/Quote Entry and Job Entry, but only operations

78 October, 2024
entered in the Engineering Work Bench create process cards in Advanced MES. The export
interface creates a process card for each part/tool/machine combination within a Machine MES
operation. Process cards are used when Advanced MES job are created from Kinetic Job
Operations that are Machine MES enabled.

For all operations to integrate with Advanced MES, you must select the Machine MES
check box on the Details card.

Each operation to be connected with Advanced MES must be linked to the following:

l One resource which is linked to a resource type marked as Machine MES with
the Tool type selected.

l One resource, resource group or capability which is linked to a resource type

marked as Machine MES with the Machine type selected.

Scheduling Capabilities and Resource Groups are not currently supported by the interface so each
scheduling detail line must define the resource. If an operation record has the Machine MES check
box selected, the exporting process automatically selects all the materials part records linked to the
operation in an Engineering Workbench method of manufacture and transfers them to Epicor
Advanced MES as materials.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Operation

l Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Operation

l Production Management > Scheduling > Setup > Operation

l Sales Management > Configurator Management > Setup > Operation

l Service Management > Project Management > Setup > Operation

Detail Fields
Follow these steps to create your account lockout policy.

Operation

Displays the code that uniquely identifies the operation. Enter the code you want in this field.
Examples of Operation codes and descriptions include:

l SHR Shear

l SAW Saw

79 October, 2024
 l WLD Weld

l RIV Rivet

Example: You have several ways to remove a rough edge in your production center. If you just
assign one general operation for deburring, it is not clear to production what method the estimator
had in mind when the part was quoted. If you assign different operation codes to Tumble, Hand File
and Sand, it is very clear what the estimator had in mind. If the method of deburring that actually
occurs during production is different, it is easy to identify why the actual hours are less than or
greater than planned.

Description

Displays a brief description of the operation. Job, BOM, and Quote methods use this value as a
default description when you use this operation within a method. For example:

l 307 Pump Line - Station 1

l Tumble deburr

Analysis Code

Assign an analysis code to this operation in order to segregate job costs in Project Analysis. Use
these codes to group materials, operations, assemblies, and headers together. You then run a
project analysis using a specific analysis code. Leverage this code to compare costs across defined
bill of material areas within all selected jobs.

Buyer

If applicable, select the Buyer who handles this subcontracted operation for your shop. Your
selection is used in the automated purchasing functions.

Create Shop Warning

Indicates whether a pre-defined message should display when this operation results in over-
production or under-production. If you select this check box, you will also need to enter a percentage
tolerance for the shop warning in the Variance Under % field and/or the Variance Over % field on
this card.

The application looks for a variance between the actual and estimated production quantities of the
operation. If the variance is greater than the percentage you enter in the Variance Under % field (the
under-production delta) and/or the Variance Over % field (the over-production delta), the application
will send out a shop warning to all users who receive shop warnings.

For this setting to come into effect, you will also need to select the Production Yield check box on
the Job Entry > Header card for jobs that use this operation. If a job uses multiple operations, you
will need to select the Create Shop Warning check box on each operation used on the job.

80 October, 2024
 Use the Create Shop Warning check box to define if warning Code 60 (Operation was
completed under quantity) and Code 70 (Operation is over quantity) will apply to the
operation record. If this check box is selected, Kinetic will display a warning if there is
variance between the actual and estimated production quantities that exceeds the
percentage specified in the Detail card. If the Create Shop Warning check box is clear,
Kinetic will not display a warning message if there is a variance, overriding the shop
warning setting defined in Company Maintenance.

Default Role

Specifies the default role code for the operation. Employees assigned to this role code that work on
this operation are then linked to various time and expense options. These options include Employee
Submit Role and Project Manager Approval Role. You can then track time and expense recorded
against this operation using the Time Management and Expense Management functionality.

Estimated Hours

If this is a Service Call operation, enter the estimated number of hours that this operation requires
for completion.

Labor Rate

If this is a Service Call operation, enter the estimated quoting rate per hour for labor for this
operation.

Machine MES

Select the Machine MES check box to integrate the operation in focus with a machine MES.

To be able to select this check box you must:

l Assign one resource which is linked to a resource type marked as Machine MES with the Tool
type selected.

l Assign one resource, resource group or capability which is linked to a resource type marked
as Machine MES with the Machine type selected.

If you select this check box and attempt to save the operation record without meeting
the two resources criteria, a message displays informing you that at least one machine
resource, resource group or capability and one tool resource are needed for the
operation in focus to be Machine MES enabled.

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected, the exporting process
automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a method
of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced

81 October, 2024
 MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are
manufactured items.

Only operations marked as Machine MES are sent to the external MES application.

Example: A method of manufacture (MOM) for a part includes five operations, three of which are
marked as Machine MES. If your external MES is Advanced MES, each operation marked as
Machine MES in your MOM creates one job in the Advanced MES application, as it does not have a
concept of multiple operations. Therefore, one Machine MES operation in Kinetic equals to one job
in Advanced MES.

Changes made to Operations and Materials are not sent to the Epicor Advanced MES
application. Advanced MES job details are always created from the Machine MES
parameters stored in a method of manufacture.

The following are examples of changes that can cause changes to be ignored or the
import to fail:

l When you add a new material to a job's method of manufacture, the changes will
be ignored.

l When you change a resource to a job's methods of manufacture that is not in the
Engineering Work Bench Method of Manufacture the Advanced MES import will
not find a related Process card and the import will fail.

Operation...

Click this button to search for and select the required operation master record.

Primary Production Operation Detail

Use this list to select the capability, resource, or resource group that will be used as the main item
for production labor and burden costing purposes. A required field, all the items attached to the
operation through the Scheduling Requirements cards display on this list.

Primary Production Operation Detail Description

Describes the selected capability, resource, or resource group that will be used as the main item for
production labor and burden costing purposes. You select the item which will be used on the Primary
Production Operation Detail drop-down list.

Primary Setup Operation Detail

Use this list to select the capability, resource, or resource group that will be used as the main item
for setup labor and burden costing purposes. All the items attached to the operation through the
Scheduling Requirements cards display on this list.

82 October, 2024
Primary Setup Operation Detail Description

Describes the capability, resource, or resource group that will be used as the main item for setup
labor and burden costing purposes. You select the item which will be used on the Primary Setup
Operation Detail drop-down list.

Supplier Description

Contains the name of the supplier you selected for the current subcontract operation. The
Description value from the supplier record displays in this field; you cannot change this value.

Text

Select the standard text that should be printed on the traveler for this operation. These standard
comments are printed in the report, along with details for job operations.

Operation text is set up in Operation Text Maintenance. Once you set up standard text, you can use
it for any operation. You do not have to retype and store it for every operation in Job Entry.

Operation Text should not be confused with Operation Description or Operation Comments. The
operation description and comments apply to a specific operation on a specific part, and can be
overridden in Job Entry. Operation text is printed on the traveler, and does not appear in Job Entry.

Type (Manufacturing)

Indicates this operation is used for manufacturing jobs. If this operation will be used for a
manufacturing step, select this radio button.

Type (Service Call)

Indicates this operation is used for service call jobs. If this operation will be used as a step on service
call procedures, select this radio button.

Variance Over %

After selecting the Create Shop Warning check box and/or the Send Shop Warning Alert check
box, enter the increased production percentage for the operation that should trigger the application
action (warning or alert) that you selected.

This value is the over-production delta. If the application finds a variance between the actual and
estimated production quantities of the operation, and that variance is greater than the percentage
you enter in this field, the application will create a shop warning and/or alert, depending on which
application action you selected.

The Create Shop Warning option and the Send Shop Warning Alert option use the
same over-production threshold. A variance of 0 is a valid value, and does not turn off
the functionality. If you enter a zero, the selected application action ( Create Shop

83 October, 2024
 Warning or Send Shop Warning Alert) will be triggered in the event of any change. If
you do not want the application to take any action, enter a high percentage or do not
select either the Create Shop Warning check box or the Send Shop Warning Alert
check box. Note that shop warning Code 70 (Operation is over quantity) uses the
threshold specified here, instead of the threshold in Shop Warning Maintenance.

Variance Under %

After selecting the Create Shop Warning check box and/or the Send Shop Warning Alert check
box, enter the shrink percentage for the operation that should trigger the application to create the
particular application action (warning or alert) that you selected.

This value is the under-production delta. The application looks for a variance between the actual and
estimated production quantities of the operation. If the variance is greater than the percentage you
enter in this field, the application will create a shop warning and/or alert, depending on the
application action you selected.

The Create Shop Warning option and the Send Shop Warning Alert option use the
same under-production threshold. A variance of 0 is a valid value, and does not turn
off the functionality. If you enter a zero, the selected system action ( Create Shop
Warning or Send Shop Warning Alert) will be triggered in the event of any change. If
you do not want the system to take any action, enter a high percentage or do not select
either the Create Shop Warning check box or the Send Shop Warning Alert check
box. Note that shop warning Code 60 (Operation was completed under quantity)
uses the threshold specified here, instead of the threshold specified in Shop Warning
Maintenance.

Scheduling Requirements
Use the Scheduling Requirements cards to add resources to the operation. You add these items for
scheduling, labor, burden rates, and costing purposes.

For each scheduling requirement you add to a maintenance operation, a maintenance operation
detail record is created. You can only add two detail records to each maintenance operation.

If you have the Advanced Planning and Scheduling license installed, you can add an extensive
number of resource groups and resources to the operation. The interface creates a process card
with the first machine resource and the first tool resource.

Operation Maintenance - Scheduling Requirements Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

84 October, 2024
Seq

The sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement that is added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Seq Desc

The description of the operation detail sequence.

Capability

Enter the ID of the capability you want to attach to this operation. If you do not know the ID, right-click
in this field to access Capability Search and browse for the correct ID.

Description

The resource's description displays. This field is for display only.

Seq

The sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement that is added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Seq Desc

The description of the resource group to which this resource belongs.

Resource

Enter the ID of the resource you want to attach to this operation. If you do not know the ID, right-click
in this field to access Resource Search and browse for the correct ID.

Description

The resource's description displays. This field is for display only.

Location

This check box, when selected, indicates if this resource is an actual physical location on the shop
floor. This means that an employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource will
be posted to the labor transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

Seq

The sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement that is added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Seq Desc

The description of the operation detail sequence.

85 October, 2024
Resource Group

Enter the ID of the resource group you want to attach to this operation. If you do not know the ID,
right-click in this field to access Resource Group Search and browse for the correct ID.

Description

The resource group's description displays. This field is for display only.

Location

This check box, when selected, indicates if this resource group is an actual physical location on the
shop floor. This means that an employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource
group will be posted to the labor transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

Capabilities Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

CapabilityID

Enter the ID of the capability you want to attach to this operation. If you do not know the ID, right-click
in this field to access Capability Search or Capability Entry and browse for the correct ID.

If you have the Advanced Planning and Scheduling license installed, you can use capabilities.

A capability is a skill or ability that a resource can possess. For example, a machine resource can
have a Shear capability or a human resource can have an Engineer capability. The scheduling
engine uses capabilities to search for resources which are available to complete the operation.

Description

Displays the concise explanation for the capability. This value displays the description defined within
Capability Maintenance. If you need, you can change this value within the operation record.

OpDtlSeq

Defines the sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Prod Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on an operation
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. This value defines the production crew size that will be the default on methods of
manufacture, quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

86 October, 2024
 Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Scheduling Blocks

Defines the number of scheduling blocks available for this capability. If you need, you can enter a
new value in this field.

Scheduling blocks are base units of time calculated by the scheduling engine. They measure the
load that needs to be placed against each resource's capacity.

Each scheduling block defines a specific amount of time that will be allocated to handle the load.
Blocks are used to place Production Time on the schedule. The engine assigns scheduling blocks to
a resource's available capacity. The blocks can vary in length, depending on the quantity being
produced and any adjustments defined on the resource group or operation.

Seq Desc

Displays either the resource description or resource group description used with this capability.

Setup Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on setup
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. Thisdefines the setup crew size that will be the default on methods of manufacture,
quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Resources Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Displays the concise explanation for the resource. This value displays the description defined within
Resource Maintenance. If you need, you can change this value within the operation record.

Location

Indicates this resource is a physical location on the shop floor. This means that an employee can
report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource posts to the labor transaction, which then
posts to the job.

87 October, 2024
 A resource cannot be flagged as a Location if the resource group is not flagged as a
Location.

OpDtlSeq

Defines the sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Prod Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on an operation
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. This value defines the production crew size that will be the default on methods of
manufacture, quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

ResourceID

Defines the code that uniquely identifies each resource. For example:

l 3VM1

l ARC2

l AUX1

Either enter the identifier for the resource in the Resource ID field or right-click this field, highlight
Open With... and select Resource Scheduling Board or Resource Search.

Scheduling Blocks

Defines the number of scheduling blocks available for this resource. If you need, you can enter a
new value in this field.

Scheduling blocks are base units of time calculated by the scheduling engine. They measure the
load that needs to be placed against each resource's capacity.

Each scheduling block defines a specific amount of time that will be allocated to handle the load.
Blocks are used to place Production Time on the schedule. The engine assigns scheduling blocks to
a resource's available capacity. The blocks can vary in length, depending on the quantity being
produced and any adjustments defined on the resource group or operation.

Seq Desc

Displays either the resource description or resource group description used with this capability.

88 October, 2024
Setup Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on setup
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. This defines the setup crew size that will be the default on methods of manufacture,
quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Resource Groups Fields

Follow these steps to create your account lockout policy.

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource group. The description appears on reports or windows throughout
the system. For example:

l Lathe Group 120

l CNC Milling Center

l Assembly Bench North

Location

Indicates this resource groups is a physical location on the shop floor. This means that an employee
can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource posts to the labor transaction, which
then posts to the job.

OpDtlSeq

Defines the sequence of this operation detail record. Each new scheduling requirement added to the
operation is assigned an operation detail sequence number in increments of 10.

Prod Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on an operation
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. This value defines the production crew size that will be the default on methods of
manufacture, quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

89 October, 2024
 Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

ResourceGrpID

The code that uniquely identifies each resource group. For example:

l LATHES

l C-MILLS

l ASSY BENCH

Scheduling Blocks

Defines the number of scheduling blocks available for this resource. If you need, you can enter a
new value in this field.

Scheduling blocks are base units of time calculated by the scheduling engine. They measure the
load that needs to be placed against each resource's capacity.

Each scheduling block defines a specific amount of time that will be allocated to handle the load.
Blocks are used to place Production Time on the schedule. The engine assigns scheduling blocks to
a resource's available capacity. The blocks can vary in length, depending on the quantity being
produced and any adjustments defined on the resource group or operation.

Seq Desc

Displays either the resource description or resource group description used with this capability.

Setup Crew Size

Defines the average number of operators in this resource group that will be working on setup
simultaneously. This value is used as a multiplier to calculate the estimated labor hours for each
operation. Thisdefines the setup crew size that will be the default on methods of manufacture,
quotes, and jobs that use this resource group.

Do not confuse crew size with resources per operation. Think of crew size as a factor
that increases your planned labor cost, because more people will be working the job.

Kinetic Part Maintenance

Use Kinetic Part Maintenance to define Advanced MES data integration settings for manufactured
parts.

90 October, 2024
In Advanced MES, manufactured items are parts and raw materials are materials. They are
maintained separately. For all manufactured parts and part revisions to integrate with Advanced
MES, the Machine MES check box must be selected. For all raw material requirements for
manufactured items, they are selected for export if they are related to a Advanced MES integrated
operation in a Machine MES integrated revision. Materials do not require the Machine MES check
box to be selected.

Use the Sites card to indicate whether the selected part will be integrated with the Advanced MES
Manufacturing Execution System (MES).

Use the Revisions card to add revisions to a part and indicate whether a selected part revision will
be integrated with Advanced MES as a unique part number.

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected in Operation Maintenance, the
exporting process automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a
method of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced MES
application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are manufactured items.

Any Kinetic part record that is synchronized with Advanced MES must contain less than
25 characters for a part ID. Parts that exceed 24 characters will create an error record in
the export log.

Kinetic multiple part revisions and activity dates are not supported in Advanced MES.
The current effective revision and alternate revisions will be sent to Advanced MES as
Process cards.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part

l Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > Setup > Part

l Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Part

l Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Setup > Part

l Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Part

l Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Part

l Production Management > Material Requirements Planning > Setup > Part

91 October, 2024
 l Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Part

l Sales Management > Configurator Management > Setup > Part

l Sales Management > Demand Management > Setup > Part

l Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Part

l Service Management > Field Service > Setup > Part

l Service Management > Field Service Integration > Setup > Part

Set up Parts
Use the Part > Sites > Detail card to set parts for integration with Advanced MES.

1. For each part to integrate with Advanced MES, locate the part in Part Maintenance and press
Edit.

2. On the Part > Sites > Detail card, select the Machine MES check box.

3. On the Integrations > Machine MES card, select the Sync Required check box to indicate this
part should be included in the next synchronization process.

Once the synchronization process runs, this check box is selected automatically
when changes are made to the part record that require synchronization. You can
also select it manually to indicate that you want to synchronize the record the
next time the synchronization process runs.

4. Click Save.

Define Part Revisions

Use the cards under the Revisions tab to enter and update revisions for the current part.

Each part in Part Maintenance can be associated with multiple revisions. A revision references a
version of a part record at a particular point in time. Each revision is associated with an effective
date, description, and other reference information.

If the Engineering module is implemented, at least one revision must be assigned to a part per
Method of Manufacture in the Part Maintenance or Engineering applications. Each method of
manufacture is associated with a specific revision. Blank revisions are also acceptable.

In Advanced MES, part revisions do not exist. Each part revision with the Machine MES check box
selected is sent to Advanced MES as a unique part number.

92 October, 2024
 If multiple revisions are in effect for a part, the machine MES operations must not
conflict with each other. Each part number/machine/tool number combination must be
unique.

Part Revision Details

Use the Detail card to select to integrate a part revision with Advanced MES and add details for the
part revision you are maintaining. You must set up at least one part revision.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Approved/Not Approved

This check box indicates whether this revision has been approved for use. Only approved revisions
will be considered valid revisions in entry applications.

Once a revision is Approved, you cannot make any maintenance changes to that revision or enter
any bill of material or routing information, so in order to check the revision out to an ECO Group for
maintenance, you must clear the Approved check box. If the Unapprove Revision on checkout
check box is selected in Inventory Configuration, you can check out a revision without first clearing
the Approved check box. In this case, once you have checked the revision out, Kinetic will
automatically clear the Approved check box.

When this check box is selected, the Not Approved button to the left will be highlighted (the default
highlight color is green), and the text on the button changes to Approved. Also when you select the
Approved check box, the Revision Change Description card appears so you can enter any
descriptive comments for this approval. The user ID and system date are also stored along with
these comments every time you approve a revision.

If the part is a configured part, and the configuration has not yet been approved, the
application disables this check box until the configuration has been approved.

Co-Parts

If selected, this check box indicates the selected part has co-parts associated with it.

Concurrency

Identifies whether the co-parts are processed concurrently or sequentially. The default is sequential.
The selected value determines quantity reporting and costing.

93 October, 2024
 l If sequential, the quantity requirements of the co-parts are factored in the total cost of the
revision and then split according to the labor/material cost split set up in the co-part.

l If concurrent, only the quantity requirement of the main part is considered and then divided by
yield to determine the total cost of the revision and then the labor and material cost factors are
used to split the costs.

Configurable

This check box indicates that the revision has either a configuration linked to it or the bill of materials
(BOM), created for the revision through the Engineering Workbench, contains a material or
subassembly that has a revision with a configuration linked to it.

l If the revision for the current part does not have a configuration, the Configurable check box
can still be selected because its BOM contains a material or subassembly that has
configuration, or it has a material or subassembly which itself has a configurable material or
subassembly in its revision.

l For example, if a revision is approved, the application launches a Configuration Sequence

process (visible through the System Monitor) that proceeds through all of the
subassemblies/materials in the BOM for the current part, and searches for configurations in
them and inside any lower-level BOMs. If any are found, the part revision in question is
marked as Configurable. After this, the same process branch upwards, going to any part that
contains the current part as a subassembly and then recalculates its Configured field by
performing the same logic that was executed for the original part (goes through all of its
subassemblies/materials).

Configurator ID...

Click this button to search for and select a configurator record that you want this part revision to be
linked with.

The specified Configurator ID must first be created in Configurator Entry. Assigning a

Configurator ID links the part revision to a specific configurator process you create for
the Configurator ID in the Configurator Designer. For more information about how to
enter a configurator record, refer to the Configurator Entry help article in the Help and
Support Panel.

Configure ID

Specifies the Configurator ID you wish to link to this part revision. The specified Configurator ID must
first be created in Configurator Entry. Assigning a Configurator ID links the part revision to a specific
configurator process you create for the Configurator ID in the Configurator Designer.

94 October, 2024
 For more information about how to enter a configurator record, refer to the Configurator
Entry help article in the Help and Support Panel.

Description

Specifies a brief description of the revision. A longer detailed description of the reason(s) for the
revision can be entered on the Revision Change Description card.

Draw

Specifies an optional engineering drawing reference. Any value you enter in this field displays as a
default reference in Job Entry.

ECO

Specifies an optional engineering change order reference. This field is for reference only.

ECO Group

Specifies the engineering change order group to which the revision is checked out. This field is for
display only.

Effective

Specifies the date on which this revision becomes effective. Kinetic uses this date to determine the
default revision whenever a part with revisions is entered. Enter the date directly, or click the arrow to
the right of the field to access a calendar and select a date.

Example: If you have part XYZ with revisions A (effective 05/02/04) and B (effective 01/15/05),
revision B appears as the default during for an order entered on 01/20/05.

This date is also used in the Engineering module reporting to determine current revisions in the bill of
material structure.

No other date validation occurs. You can enter as many revisions as you want, with any effective
dates. If the dates overlap, Kinetic will always refer to the most recent as the default revision.

Machine MES

Select the Machine MES check box to indicate that the part in focus is integrated with an external
Manufacturing Execution System (MES). Only top assembly parts must have this check box
selected.

Epicor Advanced MES considers manufactured items as parts and raw materials as materials. Use
the Machine MES checkbox to indicate the part in focus is a manufactured item that needs to be sent
to Advanced MES. Raw material requirements for manufactured items will be selected for export if
they are related to a Advanced MES integrated operation in the Machine MES integrated revision
and do not require the Machine MES checkbox to be selected.

95 October, 2024
Example: A top assembly part A includes two materials, B and C. If you mark part A as Machine
MES integrated, materials B and C will be exported to an external MES, because they are used for
manufacturing of part A. Part records in Kinetic that are considered materials in an external MES, do
not have to have the Machine MES check box selected.

This check box is only active if you create a part record for a site that is integrated with
an external MES. For more information about how to set up an Machine MES integrated
site, refer to the Setting Up Sites in Site Configuration help article.

You can select the Machine MES check box for both the Manufactured and Purchased parts. It is
import to realize the parts with the Machine MES check box at the site and Revision level are
considered at Manufactured in Advanced MES.

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected in Operation Maintenance, the
exporting process automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a
method of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced MES
application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are manufactured items.

Any Kinetic part record that is synchronized with an external MES must contain less
than 25 characters for a part ID. Parts that exceed 24 characters will create an error
record in the export log.

Machine MES Last Sync

Displays the date and time that this part revision record was last synchronized between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

This field is maintained by the Export Advanced MES process.

Primary

Select this check box to mark the part in focus as a Primary part. Once you link a part to a
Configurator using the Configurator ID field and select this check box, the part you are linking the
Configurator with will automatically default in the Configurator Rule Entry > Part/Rev > Part/Rev
field when you search for and select the Configurator record.

To be able to select this check box you must first select a Configurator record in the
Configurator ID field. If you attempt to select this check box without selecting a
Configurator, the A Configurator ID must be defined to select this Part as Primary
message displays.

96 October, 2024
 If you clear the Configurator ID from a part that is marked as Primary, the Primary check
box automatically clears.

If you add another part record and link it to the same Configurator ID and mark this part
as Primary, Kinetic will replace the current primary part and clear the Primary checkbox
on the replaced part.

Example: You create Part A (a non-stock, manufactured part) and link it to Configurator A, using the
Part Maintenance > Part > Revisions > Detail > Configurator ID field. You select the Primary
check box to mark this part as Primary. Next, you create Part B (a non-stock, manufactured part) and
link it to the same Configurator A. Once you select the Primary check box for Part B, the Primary
check box for Part A automatically clears. In Configurator Rule Entry, Part B will automatically default
once you select Configurator A.

Rev

Specifies the revision reference for a particular part. This can be referred to throughout Kinetic when
you enter this part. For example, if you enter an order for a certain part number, the current revision
for this part appears by default.

To enter any bill of material or routing information, you must enter a revision record with an effective
date and description.

Revision Shape

Displays the part revision indicator.

Rough Cut Code

Identifies the rough cut code to which this revision is assigned. Rough cut code includes modifiers to
further define production parameters. Can be left blank which indicates the revision will not use
defined modifiers during the MRP process.

Show Input Price On Web

If selected, this check box indicates that the input prices will be shown in the Customer Connect
Configuration Review.

Site

Specifies the site where this revision is manufactured.

Sync Required

Indicates that data for a part revision record has changed and a synchronization to the Advanced
MES application is required to synchronize the data. This check box is automatically selected when
the data between Kinetic and the external MES application for this part revision is out of sync.

97 October, 2024
The Sync Required check box enables for new part revisions and when any of the following data
changes for an existing part revision that synchronizes with an external MES:

l Part description

l Machine MES check box

l Parts per container

l Unit of measure

To exclude this record from the Epicor to Advanced MES data export process, clear the check box.

In Advanced MES, manufactured items are parts and raw materials are materials and
they are maintained separately. Only manufactured parts in Kinetic that have the
Machine MES check box selected on the Sites card are included in the synchronization
process. All raw material requirements for manufactured items are included in the
synchronization process if they are related to a Advanced MES integrated operation in
the Machine MES integrated revision. Materials do not require the Machine MES check
box to be selected.

l The Machine MES check box on the Sites card indicates whether the selected
part is integrated with the Advanced MES Manufacturing Execution System
(MES).

l The Machine MES check box on the Revisions card indicates whether a
selected revision added to a part is integrated with Advanced MES as a unique
part number.

l For parts uses as raw materials, if an operation record has the Machine MES
check box selected in Operation Maintenance, the exporting process
automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a
method of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the
Epicor Advanced MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced
MES application are manufactured items.

Use Stage Numbers

Indicates if this revision is to use stage number or operations on materials. If this check box is
selected, the staging numbers are to be used. If this check box is cleared, the operation sequences
are to be used.

Validate Ref Designators

If selected, this check box specifies if Kinetic should perform the following validations of reference
designators when creating and approving methods of manufacture for the part revision:

98 October, 2024
 l Determining if it is a valid number of reference designator for each material record.

l Determining if the reference designator being used is unique.

Select the check box to perform these validations for the part revision when the part is entered into
the Engineering Workbench or Job Entry. When Kinetic performs these validations, it displays an
error message if the validations fail, and prevents the revision from being checked in. Clear the
check box if these validations should not be performed when creating and approving methods of
manufacture for the part revision.

Web Configurable

If selected, this check box indicates the revision can be configured in StoreFront.

Edit a Part Revision Detail

Use the Part > Revisions > Detail card to add revision information for the part. Each revision with
the Machine MES check box selected is exported to Advanced MES as a part ID during the data
export process.

1. In the Effective Date field, enter the effective date for the part revision. Kinetic part revision
effective dates are not currently supported in Advanced MES.

2. In the Description field, enter a description of the part revision.

3. In the Draw field, enter an optional engineering drawing reference if required. Any value you
enter in this field displays as a default reference in Job Entry.

This field is disabled if the revision is approved.

4. If the part revision should be integrated with Advanced MES as a unique part, select the
Machine MES check box.

5. In the Configurator ID field, link a configurator record to the part revision by performing the
following:

a. If the revision is approved, clear the Approved check box to unapprove the revision.
This enables the Configurator ID field. The status of the revision must be Not Approved
in order to have access to the Description,Draw , and ECO fields.

b. Click the Configurator ID button and search for and select a configurator record that you
want to link to this part revision. Configurator records are created in Configurator Entry.

For more information about how to enter a configurator record in Kinetic,

99 October, 2024
 refer to the Configurator Entry help article in the Epicor Kinetic Help.

c. When you finish, click Save.

6. In the Site field, select the site where the part revision is manufactured.

7. In the Concurrency field, select whether the co-parts are processed concurrently or
sequentially. The selected value determines quantity reporting and costing.

8. Select the Use Stage Numbers check box if this revision is to use stage number or operations
on materials. If this check box is selected, the staging numbers are to be used. If this check
box is clear, the operation sequences are to be used.

9. In the Rough Cut Code field, enter the rough cut code to which this revision is assigned.

10. Select the Sync Required check box to indicate this part revision should be included in the
next synchronization process.

Once the synchronization process runs, this check box is selected automatically
when changes are made to the part revision record that require synchronization.
You can also select it manually to indicate that you want to synchronize the
record the next time the synchronization process runs.

11. Enter any other revision details. For more information on fields on this card, refer to the
Revisions Details Fields section of this document.

12. Click Save.

Check Out a Part Revision

Select the part on the Revisions grid. Then press the Check Out Revision button.

Access the Engineering Workbench for a Part Revision

Select the part on the Revisions grid. Then press the Engineering Workbench button.

Change a Revision

Complete the steps below if the Engineering module is not installed.

1. From the Overflow menu, select Revision > Change.

2. A dialog box displays where you can update the revision number and description.

3. Click Save.

Change Description

100 October, 2024

Use the Description of Change window to enter free-form text related to the description of the
change(s) to the part that precipitated this new revision.

When the Approved check box on the Part > Revisions > Detail card is selected, the
Description of Change window automatically displays to allow for entry of the revision
change description.

Enter a Revision Change Description

1. In the Description of Change text area, enter your revision change description.

2. Click OK.

Part Revision Comments

Comments are user defined notes that describe additional aspects of the part revision. Use the
Comments card to enter the revision comments to be printed.

Comment Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Revision Comments

The Comments card provides you with an area to enter specific notes on each record. You can
either create new comments or review the record's existing comments.

Enter Revision Comments

1. On the Detail card, select a part revision.

2. Navigate to the Part > Revisions > Comments card.

3. In the Revision Comments field, enter the comment text.

4. On the Standard toolbar, click Save.

Alternate Methods Detail

Use the Alternate Methods > Detail card to setup alternate method IDs. An alternate method ID is
essentially a sub-revision to a part's base revision, and it can be checked out just like a revision, so
that an alternate method of manufacture can be created for a part.

This functionality is valuable if you manufacture parts using different routings or bills of material
depending on the site and how it is manufactured.

101 October, 2024

 Alternate revisions with Machine MES operations will create multiple process cards in
Advanced MES. Use this to define alternate resources, tools and run rates.

For detailed field information and instructions for entering Alternate Methods, review Kinetic help.

Part Method of Manufacture Operations

Use and Opportunity/Quote Entry to set operation settings applicable to the Epicor Advanced MES
application

In Engineering Workbench, all Kinetic operations that should be integrated with Advanced MES
must have the Machine MES check box selected in the Method of Manufacturing > Operations >
Detail card.

Each operation lined with Advanced MES must be linked to:

l One resource which is linked to a resource type marked as Machine MES with the Tool type
selected.

l One resource, resource group or capability which is linked to a resource type marked as
Machine MES with the Machine type selected.

or

l At least one resource group that includes a tool resource and a resource, resource group or
capability linked to resource types marked as Machine MES with the Tool and Machine types
selected.

When you export an operation with a machine resource, resource group or capability, process cards
are created for each combination of part/tool/machine resource. Part revisions are exported as
unique parts.

l If the machine is a resource, a process card is created for the one part/machine/tool
combination.

l If the machine is a resource group, a process card is created for each resource in the resource
group to create all available machine/tool combinations for the part.

l If the machine is a capability, a process card is created for each of the following to create all
available machine/tool combinations for the part:

l Each resource within the capability

l Each resource within a resource group in the capability

102 October, 2024

 l Each resource in a defined additional capability

l Each resource within a resource group in a defined additional capability

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected, the exporting process
automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a method of
manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced MES application
as materials. In Advanced MES, parts are manufactured items only.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Kinetic tabs for Standard Breaks, Comments, Subcontract, RoHS, Roles and Inspection are not
interfaced with Machine MES. You can find detailed description of this functionality in integrated
Kinetic help. It is common for companies in some industries to have a mix of external MES and non-
external MES operations within the same routing.

Detail Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Qty/Parent

Specifies the operation quantity required to make one base unit of the parent assembly part. The
default value is 1. This value is multiplied by the assembly production quantity to calculate the
operation Production Qty.

Operation Production Quantity = Qty/Parent x Assembly Production Quantity

The Qty/Parent is 1 for many operations. If you do not have assemblies, this is the quantity required
to manufacture 1 of the end part. It can be greater than 1 if you work with multiple assemblies.

The quantity (whole, or fractional with decimals) that can be entered in this field, and the number of
allowed decimal places, is dependent on the setting of the Allow Decimals and Decimals fields in
UOM Maintenance for the selected UOM code.

After entering the price, select the UOM code that represents the unit of measure (for example,
Each, Case, Cubic Centimeters) in which the quantity is being expressed. The default is the base
UOM code defined for the job material part in the Primary UOMs - Inventory field in Part
Maintenance.

Example: If you are making a car with 4 doors, the operations involved with making the doors would
have a Qty/Parent of 4, since there are 4 doors for each car.

103 October, 2024

Note also that you can enter 0 (zero) quantity for a material. Do this if you need to add a reference
material to the BOM that may or may not be used during the manufacturing process. You can also do
this if you need to change a material on a BOM; set the original material's Qty/Parent to 0 and add a
new material.

If Qty/Parent is equal to 0:

l You can issue inventory to this material if the production worker uses it, using either Issue
Material or Mass Issue, by manually entering the amount used.

l Materials with a value of 0 in the Qty/Parent field are depicted on a tree field with a special
icon. If no materials are issued, the icon is blue. If materials have been issued, the icon is
green.

l It is skipped in backflush and no material is issued for it.

l In Job Actual Costing and Costing Workbench, Estimated Costs uses 0.00.

If you select Pull as Assembly or Plan as Assembly, you cannot enter a zero quantity
material.

Opr

Specifies the operation sequence number. This number identifies each operation used in the
method. The sequence numbers define the order in which you will do the operations through the
method of manufacturing. The application can assign this sequence number automatically. If you
need, however, you can enter the value manually as well.

The default sequence number is assigned through increments of 10. Enter the number that you
need. For example:

l 10

l 40

These radio buttons indicate if the scrap quantity that is enter is a fixed quantity or a percentage of
the quantity.

If it is a fixed quantity, this quantity appears in the Scrap field.

If the percentage radio button is selected, the Scrap field displays a percentage value. A percentage
is multiplied against the production quantity. This value is then added to the Production Quantity to
calculate the Run Quantity.

Addl Setup Qty

104 October, 2024

Indicates the quantity that needs to be run before any additional setup time is required on the
operation. You indicate this time within the Addl SetupHours field. During the scheduling process,
this additional time is added to determine the total setup time required for this operation.

Addl SetupHours

Defines any extra setup time needed after a certain quantity is run for the operation. You indicate this
quantity within the Addl Setup Qty field. During the scheduling process, this additional time is added
to determine the total setup time required for this operation.

Analysis Code

Assign an analysis code to this operation to segregate job costs in Project Analysis. Use these
codes to group materials, operations, assemblies, and headers together. You then run a project
analysis using a specific Analysis Code. Through this code, you can compare costs across defined
bill of material areas within all selected jobs.

Auto Receive into Inventory

Indicates whether labor or receipt transactions against this operation will create automatic receipts to
inventory. If you use this feature, this receipt updates the quantity on hand on the part record. The
process is triggered when you post labor quantities against this operation that exceed the quantities
required for the sales order. This checkbox is automatically selected if the job is created as part of a
project. As a result, the job does not have to be opened for the purpose of closing this operation. For
more information, see Project Entry - WBS Phases Detail.

Normally, you will select this check box for the last operation on the assembly or the final assembly.
Parts are received to inventory at the current unit cost, based on the part costing method (average,
standard or last).

Example: You enter job 12345 to make Widgets, linked to a sales order quantity of 75 and an
additional stock quantity of 25. The last operation is selected for Auto Receive. If you report a labor
quantity of 110 pieces against that operation, 35 pieces are received to inventory. This is calculated
by subtracting the sales order’s 75 quantity from the 110 quantity that was manufactured through the
operation.

You cannot use the Auto Receive function on an intersite job. If you attempt to select
the check box on such a job, an error message displays.

This check box is not available on service jobs, or if the Track Multiple UOMs check
box is selected in Part Maintenance on the record for the manufactured part.

You can automatically receive to stock a serial-tracked part on any job operation;
however, there are limitations. Refer to the Serialized Parts and Auto Receive help
article in Working with Job Management for more information.

105 October, 2024

 If legal numbers are used for the transaction type and a legal number has not been
assigned, the legal number automatically generates during the auto receive process.
The process first looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a generation type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock Transaction Document Type marked as System Default for the transaction type.
If the process cannot locate a legal number configuration that meets the first set of
criteria, the process looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a Generation Type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock transaction document type. If the process cannot locate an active, automatically
generated legal number configuration number for a WIP to WIP or WIP to Stock
transaction document type, no legal number is generated.

Description

Displays a brief description of the operation step. This description comes from the master record for
the operation entered in the Operation field, but it can be changed. If you later change the code in
the Operation field, this description does not change.

Final Operation

When selected, this check box indicates that this operation will be used to calculate the job
completion quantity.

Only one operation on any assembly can be selected as the final operation. If you do not select a
final operation, the last sequential operation on the assembly is used as the final operation.

The job Quantity Completed value is used on various reports and displays throughout the
application. This quantity is equal to the labor quantity reported to-date against the final operation.

The Final Operation check box also appears for operations in quote and methods entry.
This check box setting will also be copied if you create jobs using the manufacturing
details from either quotes or methods of manufacturing. This checkbox is
automatically checked if the job is automatically created as part of a project. As a result,
the job does not have to be opened for the purpose of closing this operation. For more
information, see Project Entry - WBS Phases Detail.

Finish-To-Finish

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

106 October, 2024

 l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

Finish-To-Start

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

First Article Quantity

Specifies the quantity from this operation that you want to submit to Inspection Processing. The
quantity you enter here will be inspected when it is complete.

To calculate an amount for this numeric field, right-click in the field, and from the context menu,
select Calculator.

Hours

Specifies the estimated hours it will take to set up this operation. This value is entered in a decimal
format. If this operation has an operation standard, this standard’s value appears by default, but you
can also change the setup hours.

107 October, 2024

If this operation will run on more than one machine, enter the estimated setup time per machine.

Specifies the total estimated production hours for this operation. The production hours calculation is
based on the production standard and the run quantity. Depending upon the production standard, it
may also include the standard per unit, pieces per cycle and the operation per part values. If you
need, you can change the hours needed to run this operation.

Labor Entry

Specifies the type of labor that this operation requires. Select the labor type from the list.

This information is useful for a backflush operation. For more information about
backflush labor, see Backflushing Labor.

Machine MES

Indicates that the operation in focus is integrated with an external Manufacturing Execution System
(MES).

Each operation integrated with a machine MES must be linked to:

l One resource which is linked to a resource type marked as Machine MES with the Tool type
selected.

l One resource, resource group or capability which is linked to a resource type marked as
Machine MES with the Machine type selected.

To verify that a machine resource exists for an operation, the following logic is used:

l If there is a resource, verify if the resource type is Machine.

l If the resource is not available, use the resource group to determine if the resource type is
Machine.

l If both the resource and resource group are not available, use the Machine MES selected
capability to determine if the resource type is Machine.

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected, the exporting process
automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a method
of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced
MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are
manufactured items.

Only operations marked as Machine MES are sent to the Machine MES application.

Example: A method of manufacture (MOM) for a part includes five operations, three of which are
marked as Machine MES. If your machine MES is Advanced MES, each operation marked as

108 October, 2024

Machine MES in your MOM creates one job in the Advanced MES application, as it does not have a
concept of multiple operations. Therefore, one Machine MES operation in Kinetic equals to one job
in Advanced MES.

Op-Standard

Operation standards let you identify default setup and production estimates for specific operations
within a resource group. An optional field, if you have an operation that consistently takes the same
amount of time – regardless of the part produced – you should link an operation standard to your
operation. For example:

l Per Piece Std

If your estimates always vary depending on the part produced, do not use operations
standards.

If the selected operation has a default operation standard, it will appear within this field. If you need,
you can select a different operation standard from this list.

Operation

Specifies the operation being performed. A required field, if an operation is linked to the selected
resource, that operation appears by default. If you need, you can select a different operation from the
list. For example:

l TRN Turning

l SHR Shear

l SAW Saw

Ops/Part

Only active if the production standard is set to Operations/Hour or Operations/Minute, this is the
number of times this operation must be performed on one part. For example:

l 1

l 10

The Operations per Part number is multiplied by the planned operation quantity to determine the
number of times this operation must be run to complete this operation. This quantity is then divided
by the production standard to determine total estimated production hours.

Total Operations = Ops per Part x Operation Quantity Estimated Production Hours = Total
Operations/Production Standard

Pcs/Cycle

109 October, 2024

Specifies the number of pieces produced per machine cycle. This value is used by Cycle/Minute and
Cycle/Hour standards to calculate the total estimated production hours for the operation.

Example: An injection mold has four cavities and the machine cycles once per minute. During each
minute, four parts are produced.

This field is enabled if the Prod Std value is Cycle/Minute or Cycle/Hour. For all other
production standards, this field is disabled.

Prod Std

Specifies the estimated production rate for this operation. If an operation standard is selected, the
default production standard appears here. The standard is used to calculate the total estimated
production hours for this operation.

The number you enter depends on the standard format you select. It can be a number of pieces,
hours, minutes, or operations.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, the production rate must be expressed in
cycles per hour or cycles per minute. Only Cycles / Minute or Cycles / Hour can be
selected in the Production Standard Format field.

Production (Labor Reporting Resource)

Specifies the physical location where the resource works to produce quantities during this operation,
such as an Assembly Area. Select the location from the list.

Production Standard Format

Indicates the production standard used on parts worked on through this operation. The application
uses this value as the qualifier field in operation details. Available qualifiers:

l Hours/Piece

l Minutes/Piece

l Pieces/Hour

l Pieces/Minute

l Operations/Hour

l Operations/Minute

l Fixed Hours

110 October, 2024

 l Cycles/Minute

l Cycles/Hour

If the Machine MES check box is selected, the production rate must be expressed in
cycles per hour or cycles per minute. Only Cycles / Minute or Cycles / Hour appear in
this field.

Qty

These radio buttons indicate if the scrap quantity that is enter is a fixed quantity or a percentage of
the quantity.

If it is a fixed quantity, this quantity appears in the Scrap field.

If the percentage radio button is selected, the Scrap field displays a percentage value. A percentage
is multiplied against the production quantity. This value is then added to the Production Quantity to
calculate the Run Quantity.

Scheduling Blocks

Specifies the number of resources a single job operation requires. This is normally 1. Do not enter
more than 1 unless you typically set up more than 1 resource for the same operation on the same
job.

If you enter more than 1, operations scheduled in its resource group will use more of the available.
The Scheduling application will divide the production time by the number of scheduling blocks. This
application then finds resources that have capacity available in the required time frame. If there is
enough capacity, the operation's total time can be reduced.

Definition:Production Capacity - The total of the hours that can be scheduled in a

department or a resource group per a unit of time.

Example: A resource group with 4 resources at 8 hours per day has a production capacity of 32
hours and a of 8 hours. If you enter a 2 here, a single operation will be for 16 hours in a day (using 2
resources) instead of just 8.

Scrap

Specifies the scrap quantity factor. This value can either be a defined quantity or a percentage,
depending upon which radio button, Quantity or Percentage, is selected. Enter the scrap factor that
is required for this operation. For example:

The Scrap Quantity is calculated in two ways: Scrap Quantity = The scrap quantity that is entered in
this field. Scrap Quantity = Scrap Percentage X the Production Quantity.

The Scrap Quantity is used to determine the Run Quantity.

111 October, 2024

Specifies the estimated scrap for this job. This estimate is calculated by Kinetic. You cannot edit the
value in this field. Use the scrap fields that are displayed in the Quantity Factors section to calculate
the scrap quantity.

Send Ahead Offset

Defines the value used during scheduling to calculate when parts from this current operation can be
moved on to the next operation. These operations must share a Start-to-Start relationship. Use this
functionality when finished quantities on the current operation can be advanced to the next operation
before the current operation is complete. This generates a schedule that more accurately reflects
your manufacturing process. You indicate on each site whether the Send Ahead Offset calculation
starts from either the operation's Setup Time or Production Time.

You first define how the Send Ahead Offset value will be calculated using the Send Ahead Type
drop-down list. Select a type option from this drop-down list. You can send ahead a quantity based
on Hours (elapsed time), Pieces (number of finished pieces), and Percentage Complete (a
percentage of the operation duration). After you select a type, enter the Send Ahead Offset value you
need in this field.

Send Ahead Type

Defines what scheduling offset value will be used for the operation that runs after this current
operation when these operations share a Start-to-Start relationship. Use this functionality when
finished quantities on the current operation can be advanced to the next operation before the current
operation is complete. This generates a schedule that more accurately reflects your manufacturing
process. You indicate on each site whether the Send Ahead Offset calculation starts from either the
operation's Setup Time or Production Time.

When you use this functionality, the following operation in a Start-to-Start relationship is scheduled
to begin using the value you enter in the Send Ahead Offset field. Select an option on the Send
Ahead Type drop-down list to determine how this value will be measured during the scheduling
process. You can send ahead a quantity using the following types:

l Hours -- A set period of time

l Pieces -- A number of completed parts

l Percentage -- A percentage of the operation duration that is complete

After you select the type, you can then enter the value you will use within the Send Ahead Offset
field.

Serial Numbers Required From This Operation

Triggers a prompt in the End Labor Activity and Labor Entry applications for the serial numbers
produced from this operation when you select this check box. Selecting this option also automatically
selects the Serial Number Required when Shipping option in the Subcontract Detail card of the
Engineering Workbench.

112 October, 2024

Setup (Labor Reporting Resource)

Specifies the physical location where the resource performs the preparation work for this operation.
Select the location from the list.

Setup Group

Specifies the group used to sort schedules on the Scheduling Board. Each group is assigned a
precedence value; the higher the group's value, the more precedence this operation will have during
scheduling. Select the setup group you need from the list.

Stage

Defines the stage number for the operation sequence in an alternate method of manufacture. Stage
numbers are assigned to operation sequences in the method of manufacture, and then as each
alternate method is built, the appropriate stage number is assigned to the material sequence to
indicate at which operation sequence the material is used.

Example: A final assembly is made up of PartA, PartB, and PartC. You manufacture this assembly
using alternate methods. In one method, you need PartA at operation sequence 10, but in another
method, you need PartA at operation sequence 20. Assign different stage numbers to operation
sequences 10 and 20 in the Engineering Workbench, and then assign the appropriate operation
sequence stage number to PartA depending on which method you are building.

Standard Basis

Indicates the basis divisor used against either Hours Per Piece or Minutes Per Piece production
standards. This basis value is used to calcuate the estimated production hours.

Logic: Hours = Operation Quantity/Standard Basis x Production Standard

Available standard basis values:

l Each

l 100s

l 1000s

l 10,000s

Start-To-Start

Only active if the production standard is set to Operations/Hour or Operations/Minute, this is the
number of times this operation must be performed on one part. For example:

l 1

l 10

113 October, 2024

The Operations per Part number is multiplied by the planned operation quantity to determine the
number of times this operation must be run to complete this operation. This quantity is then divided
by the production standard to determine total estimated production hours.

Total Operations = Ops per Part x Operation Quantity Estimated Production Hours = Total
Operations/Production Standard

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

Subcontract

Indicates whether the current operation is a subcontract operation. Subcontract operations are
manufacturing steps in your process run by external companies. For example, you manufacture
automobile parts. When these parts reach a stage in the method of manufacturing, you send them
out to an external company for painting. This painting step is a subcontract operation.

When you create a new subcontract operation, this check box is automatically selected. You cannot
change this value. Only selected fields are then available on the Operations> Detail card, like
Operation, Description, Send Ahead Type, and so on. To add more subcontract details, navigate to
the Method of Manufacturing>Operations>Subcontract card.

Detail Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Auto Spc Enable

114 October, 2024

If you select this check box, statistical process control sample data is automatically collected for this
process.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Automatic
SPC Sampling Enabled setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in
Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Settings card.

Auto Spc Period

The sample period value is the frequency that the automatic SPC will take its random sampling.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The SPC Sample
Period value in minutes is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit
Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Settings card.

Auto Spc Subgroup

The subgroup size is the number of observations that will be taken for each automatic statistical
process control sample.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Subgroup Size
value is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities > Standards >
Process card > SPC Settings card.

Exp Cyc Tm

The Standard Cycle Time field contains the expected cycle time for the machine while performing
the production process. The Job Schedule uses the standard value for non-running jobs when
calculating forecasted end dates and the yield efficiency.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Standard Expected
Cycle Time value is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities >
Standards > Process card > General card.

If the Machine MES check box is selected for the operation, the value for this field
comes from the Expected Cycle Time field for the production standard. The value is
displays in seconds so the calculation is one of the following, based on the selected
standard format.

l If the standard format is Cycles/Hour, then the Expected Cycle Time calculation is 3600 /
Production Standard.
l If the standard format is Cycles/Minute, then the Expected Cycle Time calculation is 60 /
Production Standard.

115 October, 2024

 This field is modifiable and you can change the value that you want to export to
Advanced MES.

Example: Using the Engineering Workbench > Method of Manufacturing > Operations > Detail
card you define the Prod Std of 148.00/Cycle Hour. The system converts the value to seconds, in this
case 24, based on the 3600/Production Standard calculation formula. Therefore, the Exp Cyc Tm
field, displays the value of 24. Using this example, change the value from 24 to 148 (native
Cycles/Hour units).

Exp Good

The Expected Good value is the expected percent of good parts produced while performing the
production process. The Expected Good Percentage value is calculated by subtracting the
machine's expected scrap percentage from the total percentage of parts produced (100%). The Job
Schedule uses the standard value for non-running jobs when calculating forecasted end dates and
the yield efficiency.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Standard Expected
Scrap Percent value is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities
> Standards > Process card > General card.

If the Machine MES check box is selected for the operation, the value in this field
cannot be 0.

Exp Pct Up

This value is the expected percent of the total machine time that the machine is up while performing
the production process. The Expected Percentage Up value is calculated by subtracting the
machine's expected down time percentage from 100% of machine time. The Job Schedule uses the
standard value for non-running jobs when calculating forecasted end dates and the yield efficiency.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Standard Expected
Down Time Percent value is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit
Facilities > Standards > Process card > General card.

Material Color Rating

The Color Rating value is the color rating of the materials used to produce the part, with 0 as the
lightest value.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Material Color
Rating value is defined for each part in Edit Facilities > Standards > Part ID > Material
List card.

116 October, 2024

Misc Info

This is a user definable field to contain additional notes about the process card.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Comment value is
defined for each part in Edit Facilities > Standards > Part ID > Material List card.

Non Prod Limit

The non-production limit is used by the MIU to determine that the machine is down and is not cycling.
After a machine cycle, the MIU expects to another machine cycle to occur within a certain period of
time. If the next machine cycle does not occur before the non-production limit is reached, the
machine is determined to be down.

Do not enter zero into this field. This field relates to the Exp Cycle Time which you will
need to calculate.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Non-Production
Limit value is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities >
Standards > Process card > General card.

Part Qual Enable

If you select this check box, the part qualification feature will be enabled for this Process card. Epicor
Advanced MES uses specification and control limits defined for monitored parameters in the process
card to qualify parts during production.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Part
Qualification setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities
> Standards > Process card > SPC Settings card.

Pct Reg

The Primary Material Percent Re-grind value is estimated percentage of the primary material that will
be used that is re-grind material.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Percent Re-grind
value is defined for each part in Edit Facilities > Standards > Part ID > Material List
card.

Setup Material

117 October, 2024

The Setup Material value is the quantity of the material that will be consumed during setting up
production for the part.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Setup Material
value is defined for each part in Edit Facilities > Standards > Part ID > Material List
card.

Setup URL

The Setup Document field is the web address (URL) of a setup card that is associated with this part.
This web-based setup card can be viewed using the Document Control Center or by pressing the
View Document button.

Add a New Operation Record

From the Overflow menu and the Operation sub-menu, select Add Operation.

Drag and Drop a New Operation Record

Navigate to the Method of Manufacturing > Engineering > Operation Master card and click the
Operation button to pull operations from the operation master into the Operations grid.

Find the operation you wish to add to the routing. Use your mouse to drag and drop the operation
onto the Operations list in the workbench's Tree View.

Update Operation and Machine MES Details

Perform the following steps for each operation you want to integrate with Advanced MES.

1. Select the operation in the tree and navigate to the Method of Manufacturing > Operations >
Detail card.

2. Select the Machine MES check box.

3. In the Prod Std field, the estimated production rate for this operation. For Advanced MES
integrated operations, enter the number of production cycles per minute or hour and select
whether the number of cycles is per minute or per hour.

If an operation standard is selected, the default production standard appears

here. The standard is used to calculate the total estimated production hours for
this operation.

4. In the Pcs/Cycle field, enter the standard number of pieces completed per cycle.

118 October, 2024

 5. Enter any other required details for the operation. For more information on the fields in this
card, refer to the Operation - Detail Fields section of this document.

6. Navigate to the Method of Manufacturing > Operations > Machine MES > Detail card.

7. In the Pct Reg field, enter the estimated percentage of the primary material used that is re-
grind material.

8. In the Material Color Rating field, enter the color rating of the materials used to produce the
part, with 0 as the lightest value.

9. In the Exp Pct Up field, enter the expected percent of the total machine time that the machine
is up while performing the operation.

10. The Exp Cyc Tm field displays the expected cycle time for the machine performing the
operation.

11. In the Exp Good field, enter the expected percent of good parts produced while performing the
operation.

12. In the Setup Material field, enter the quantity of the material that is consumed during setting
up production for the part.

13. Select the Part Qual Enable check box to enable the part qualification feature for this Process
card.

14. In the Non Prod Limit field, enter the non-production limit used by the MIU to determine that
the machine is down and is not cycling.

15. In the Misc Info field, enter any additional notes about the process card.

16. In the Setup URL field, enter the web URL of a setup card that is associated with this
production process.

17. Select the Auto Spc Enable check box if statistical process control sample data is
automatically collected for this process.

18. In the Auto Spc Subgroup field, enter the number of observations that will be taken for each
automatic statistical process control sample.

19. In the Auto Spc Period field, enter the frequency that the automatic SPC will take its random
sampling.

20. Click Save.

Resequence All Operation Records

119 October, 2024

 1. From the Overflow menu and the Operation sub-menu, select the Resequence command or
right-click the Operations node in the workbench's Tree View and select Resequence.

2. A dialog box displays prompting you to confirm your decision to resequence.

Add a New Scheduling Resource to an Operation Record

1. From the Overflow menu and the Operation sub-menu, select the Add Scheduling Resource
command.

2. The Scheduling Resources card opens.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Scheduling

Resources - Detail
Use the Scheduling Resources card to add scheduling resources (operation detail) records to an
operation in the part's method of manufacture (routing).

For each scheduling requirement that is added to the operation sequence, the software creates an
Operation Detail Sequence in increments of 10. You can only add two detail records to each
maintenance operation without an APS license.

If you have the Advanced Planning and Scheduling license installed, you can add an
extensive number of resources to the operation. The interface will create a process
card with the first Machine Resource and the First Tool Resource.

You can only mark a machine MES revision as Approved if all of the operations that have the
Machine MES check box selected marked in the method of manufacture have at least one machine
resource and one tool resource.

When a job or quote is created with the method of manufacture that has the operation
details established here, the labor and burden rates from each scheduling resource will
be displayed, and they can be overridden at that point.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Qty/Parent

120 October, 2024

Specifies the operation quantity required to make one base unit of the parent assembly part. The
default value is 1. This value is multiplied by the assembly production quantity to calculate the
operation Production Qty.

Operation Production Quantity = Qty/Parent x Assembly Production Quantity

The Qty/Parent is 1 for many operations. If you do not have assemblies, this is the quantity required
to manufacture 1 of the end part. It can be greater than 1 if you work with multiple assemblies.

The quantity (whole, or fractional with decimals) that can be entered in this field, and the number of
allowed decimal places, is dependent on the setting of the Allow Decimals and Decimals fields in
UOM Maintenance for the selected UOM code.

After entering the price, select the UOM code that represents the unit of measure (for example,
Each, Case, Cubic Centimeters) in which the quantity is being expressed. The default is the base
UOM code defined for the job material part in the Primary UOMs - Inventory field in Part
Maintenance.

Example: If you are making a car with 4 doors, the operations involved with making the doors would
have a Qty/Parent of 4, since there are 4 doors for each car.

Note also that you can enter 0 (zero) quantity for a material. Do this if you need to add a reference
material to the BOM that may or may not be used during the manufacturing process. You can also do
this if you need to change a material on a BOM; set the original material's Qty/Parent to 0 and add a
new material.

If Qty/Parent is equal to 0:

l You can issue inventory to this material if the production worker uses it, using either Issue
Material or Mass Issue, by manually entering the amount used.

l Materials with a value of 0 in the Qty/Parent field are depicted on a tree field with a special
icon. If no materials are issued, the icon is blue. If materials have been issued, the icon is
green.

l It is skipped in backflush and no material is issued for it.

l In Job Actual Costing and Costing Workbench, Estimated Costs uses 0.00.

If you select Pull as Assembly or Plan as Assembly, you cannot enter a zero quantity
material.

Opr

Specifies the operation sequence number. This number identifies each operation used in the
method. The sequence numbers define the order in which you will do the operations through the
method of manufacturing. The application can assign this sequence number automatically. If you
need, however, you can enter the value manually as well.

121 October, 2024

The default sequence number is assigned through increments of 10. Enter the number that you
need. For example:

l 10

l 40

These radio buttons indicate if the scrap quantity that is enter is a fixed quantity or a percentage of
the quantity.

If it is a fixed quantity, this quantity appears in the Scrap field.

If the percentage radio button is selected, the Scrap field displays a percentage value. A percentage
is multiplied against the production quantity. This value is then added to the Production Quantity to
calculate the Run Quantity.

Addl Setup Qty

Indicates the quantity that needs to be run before any additional setup time is required on the
operation. You indicate this time within the Addl SetupHours field. During the scheduling process,
this additional time is added to determine the total setup time required for this operation.

Addl SetupHours

Defines any extra setup time needed after a certain quantity is run for the operation. You indicate this
quantity within the Addl Setup Qty field. During the scheduling process, this additional time is added
to determine the total setup time required for this operation.

Analysis Code

Assign an analysis code to this operation to segregate job costs in Project Analysis. Use these
codes to group materials, operations, assemblies, and headers together. You then run a project
analysis using a specific Analysis Code. Through this code, you can compare costs across defined
bill of material areas within all selected jobs.

Auto Receive into Inventory

Indicates whether labor or receipt transactions against this operation will create automatic receipts to
inventory. If you use this feature, this receipt updates the quantity on hand on the part record. The
process is triggered when you post labor quantities against this operation that exceed the quantities
required for the sales order. This checkbox is automatically selected if the job is created as part of a
project. As a result, the job does not have to be opened for the purpose of closing this operation. For
more information, see Project Entry - WBS Phases Detail.

Normally, you will select this check box for the last operation on the assembly or the final assembly.
Parts are received to inventory at the current unit cost, based on the part costing method (average,
standard or last).

122 October, 2024

Example: You enter job 12345 to make Widgets, linked to a sales order quantity of 75 and an
additional stock quantity of 25. The last operation is selected for Auto Receive. If you report a labor
quantity of 110 pieces against that operation, 35 pieces are received to inventory. This is calculated
by subtracting the sales order’s 75 quantity from the 110 quantity that was manufactured through the
operation.

You cannot use the Auto Receive function on an intersite job. If you attempt to select
the check box on such a job, an error message displays.

This check box is not available on service jobs, or if the Track Multiple UOMs check
box is selected in Part Maintenance on the record for the manufactured part.

You can automatically receive to stock a serial-tracked part on any job operation;
however, there are limitations. Refer to the Serialized Parts and Auto Receive help
article in Working with Job Management for more information.

If legal numbers are used for the transaction type and a legal number has not been
assigned, the legal number automatically generates during the auto receive process.
The process first looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a generation type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock Transaction Document Type marked as System Default for the transaction type.
If the process cannot locate a legal number configuration that meets the first set of
criteria, the process looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a Generation Type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock transaction document type. If the process cannot locate an active, automatically
generated legal number configuration number for a WIP to WIP or WIP to Stock
transaction document type, no legal number is generated.

Description

Displays a brief description of the operation step. This description comes from the master record for
the operation entered in the Operation field, but it can be changed. If you later change the code in
the Operation field, this description does not change.

Final Operation

When selected, this check box indicates that this operation will be used to calculate the job
completion quantity.

Only one operation on any assembly can be selected as the final operation. If you do not select a
final operation, the last sequential operation on the assembly is used as the final operation.

The job Quantity Completed value is used on various reports and displays throughout the
application. This quantity is equal to the labor quantity reported to-date against the final operation.

123 October, 2024

 The Final Operation check box also appears for operations in quote and methods entry.
This check box setting will also be copied if you create jobs using the manufacturing
details from either quotes or methods of manufacturing. This checkbox is
automatically checked if the job is automatically created as part of a project. As a result,
the job does not have to be opened for the purpose of closing this operation. For more
information, see Project Entry - WBS Phases Detail.

Finish-To-Finish

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

Finish-To-Start

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

124 October, 2024

 The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

First Article Quantity

Specifies the quantity from this operation that you want to submit to Inspection Processing. The
quantity you enter here will be inspected when it is complete.

To calculate an amount for this numeric field, right-click in the field, and from the context menu,
select Calculator.

Hours

Specifies the estimated hours it will take to set up this operation. This value is entered in a decimal
format. If this operation has an operation standard, this standard’s value appears by default, but you
can also change the setup hours.

If this operation will run on more than one machine, enter the estimated setup time per machine.

Specifies the total estimated production hours for this operation. The production hours calculation is
based on the production standard and the run quantity. Depending upon the production standard, it
may also include the standard per unit, pieces per cycle and the operation per part values. If you
need, you can change the hours needed to run this operation.

Labor Entry

Specifies the type of labor that this operation requires. Select the labor type from the list.

This information is useful for a backflush operation. For more information about
backflush labor, see Backflushing Labor.

Machine MES

Indicates that the operation in focus is integrated with an external Manufacturing Execution System
(MES).

Each operation integrated with a machine MES must be linked to:

l One resource which is linked to a resource type marked as Machine MES with the Tool type
selected.

l One resource, resource group or capability which is linked to a resource type marked as
Machine MES with the Machine type selected.

To verify that a machine resource exists for an operation, the following logic is used:

125 October, 2024

 l If there is a resource, verify if the resource type is Machine.

l If the resource is not available, use the resource group to determine if the resource type is
Machine.

l If both the resource and resource group are not available, use the Machine MES selected
capability to determine if the resource type is Machine.

If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected, the exporting process
automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to this operation in a method
of manufacture (Engineering Workbench), and transfers them to the Epicor Advanced
MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are
manufactured items.

Only operations marked as Machine MES are sent to the Machine MES application.

Example: A method of manufacture (MOM) for a part includes five operations, three of which are
marked as Machine MES. If your machine MES is Advanced MES, each operation marked as
Machine MES in your MOM creates one job in the Advanced MES application, as it does not have a
concept of multiple operations. Therefore, one Machine MES operation in Kinetic equals to one job
in Advanced MES.

Op-Standard

Operation standards let you identify default setup and production estimates for specific operations
within a resource group. An optional field, if you have an operation that consistently takes the same
amount of time – regardless of the part produced – you should link an operation standard to your
operation. For example:

l Per Piece Std

If your estimates always vary depending on the part produced, do not use operations
standards.

If the selected operation has a default operation standard, it will appear within this field. If you need,
you can select a different operation standard from this list.

Operation

Specifies the operation being performed. A required field, if an operation is linked to the selected
resource, that operation appears by default. If you need, you can select a different operation from the
list. For example:

l TRN Turning

l SHR Shear

126 October, 2024

 l SAW Saw

Ops/Part

Only active if the production standard is set to Operations/Hour or Operations/Minute, this is the
number of times this operation must be performed on one part. For example:

l 1

l 10

The Operations per Part number is multiplied by the planned operation quantity to determine the
number of times this operation must be run to complete this operation. This quantity is then divided
by the production standard to determine total estimated production hours.

Total Operations = Ops per Part x Operation Quantity Estimated Production Hours = Total
Operations/Production Standard

Pcs/Cycle

Specifies the number of pieces produced per machine cycle. This value is used by Cycle/Minute and
Cycle/Hour standards to calculate the total estimated production hours for the operation.

Example: An injection mold has four cavities and the machine cycles once per minute. During each
minute, four parts are produced.

This field is enabled if the Prod Std value is Cycle/Minute or Cycle/Hour. For all other
production standards, this field is disabled.

Prod Std

Specifies the estimated production rate for this operation. If an operation standard is selected, the
default production standard appears here. The standard is used to calculate the total estimated
production hours for this operation.

The number you enter depends on the standard format you select. It can be a number of pieces,
hours, minutes, or operations.

If the Machine MES check box is selected, the production rate must be expressed in
cycles per hour or cycles per minute. Only Cycles / Minute or Cycles / Hour can be
selected in the Production Standard Format field.

Production (Labor Reporting Resource)

Specifies the physical location where the resource works to produce quantities during this operation,
such as an Assembly Area. Select the location from the list.

127 October, 2024

Production Standard Format

Indicates the production standard used on parts worked on through this operation. The application
uses this value as the qualifier field in operation details. Available qualifiers:

l Hours/Piece

l Minutes/Piece

l Pieces/Hour

l Pieces/Minute

l Operations/Hour

l Operations/Minute

l Fixed Hours

l Cycles/Minute

l Cycles/Hour

If the Machine MES check box is selected, the production rate must be expressed in
cycles per hour or cycles per minute. Only Cycles / Minute or Cycles / Hour appear in
this field.

Qty

These radio buttons indicate if the scrap quantity that is enter is a fixed quantity or a percentage of
the quantity.

If it is a fixed quantity, this quantity appears in the Scrap field.

If the percentage radio button is selected, the Scrap field displays a percentage value. A percentage
is multiplied against the production quantity. This value is then added to the Production Quantity to
calculate the Run Quantity.

Scheduling Blocks

Specifies the number of resources a single job operation requires. This is normally 1. Do not enter
more than 1 unless you typically set up more than 1 resource for the same operation on the same
job.

If you enter more than 1, operations scheduled in its resource group will use more of the available.
The Scheduling application will divide the production time by the number of scheduling blocks. This
application then finds resources that have capacity available in the required time frame. If there is
enough capacity, the operation's total time can be reduced.

128 October, 2024

 Definition:Production Capacity - The total of the hours that can be scheduled in a
department or a resource group per a unit of time.

Example: A resource group with 4 resources at 8 hours per day has a production capacity of 32
hours and a of 8 hours. If you enter a 2 here, a single operation will be for 16 hours in a day (using 2
resources) instead of just 8.

Scrap

Specifies the scrap quantity factor. This value can either be a defined quantity or a percentage,
depending upon which radio button, Quantity or Percentage, is selected. Enter the scrap factor that
is required for this operation. For example:

The Scrap Quantity is calculated in two ways: Scrap Quantity = The scrap quantity that is entered in
this field. Scrap Quantity = Scrap Percentage X the Production Quantity.

The Scrap Quantity is used to determine the Run Quantity.

Specifies the estimated scrap for this job. This estimate is calculated by Kinetic. You cannot edit the
value in this field. Use the scrap fields that are displayed in the Quantity Factors section to calculate
the scrap quantity.

Send Ahead Offset

Defines the value used during scheduling to calculate when parts from this current operation can be
moved on to the next operation. These operations must share a Start-to-Start relationship. Use this
functionality when finished quantities on the current operation can be advanced to the next operation
before the current operation is complete. This generates a schedule that more accurately reflects
your manufacturing process. You indicate on each site whether the Send Ahead Offset calculation
starts from either the operation's Setup Time or Production Time.

You first define how the Send Ahead Offset value will be calculated using the Send Ahead Type
drop-down list. Select a type option from this drop-down list. You can send ahead a quantity based
on Hours (elapsed time), Pieces (number of finished pieces), and Percentage Complete (a
percentage of the operation duration). After you select a type, enter the Send Ahead Offset value you
need in this field.

Send Ahead Type

Defines what scheduling offset value will be used for the operation that runs after this current
operation when these operations share a Start-to-Start relationship. Use this functionality when
finished quantities on the current operation can be advanced to the next operation before the current
operation is complete. This generates a schedule that more accurately reflects your manufacturing
process. You indicate on each site whether the Send Ahead Offset calculation starts from either the
operation's Setup Time or Production Time.

129 October, 2024

When you use this functionality, the following operation in a Start-to-Start relationship is scheduled
to begin using the value you enter in the Send Ahead Offset field. Select an option on the Send
Ahead Type drop-down list to determine how this value will be measured during the scheduling
process. You can send ahead a quantity using the following types:

l Hours -- A set period of time

l Pieces -- A number of completed parts

l Percentage -- A percentage of the operation duration that is complete

After you select the type, you can then enter the value you will use within the Send Ahead Offset
field.

Serial Numbers Required From This Operation

Triggers a prompt in the End Labor Activity and Labor Entry applications for the serial numbers
produced from this operation when you select this check box. Selecting this option also automatically
selects the Serial Number Required when Shipping option in the Subcontract Detail card of the
Engineering Workbench.

Setup (Labor Reporting Resource)

Specifies the physical location where the resource performs the preparation work for this operation.
Select the location from the list.

Setup Group

Specifies the group used to sort schedules on the Scheduling Board. Each group is assigned a
precedence value; the higher the group's value, the more precedence this operation will have during
scheduling. Select the setup group you need from the list.

Stage

Defines the stage number for the operation sequence in an alternate method of manufacture. Stage
numbers are assigned to operation sequences in the method of manufacture, and then as each
alternate method is built, the appropriate stage number is assigned to the material sequence to
indicate at which operation sequence the material is used.

Example: A final assembly is made up of PartA, PartB, and PartC. You manufacture this assembly
using alternate methods. In one method, you need PartA at operation sequence 10, but in another
method, you need PartA at operation sequence 20. Assign different stage numbers to operation
sequences 10 and 20 in the Engineering Workbench, and then assign the appropriate operation
sequence stage number to PartA depending on which method you are building.

Standard Basis

Indicates the basis divisor used against either Hours Per Piece or Minutes Per Piece production
standards. This basis value is used to calcuate the estimated production hours.

130 October, 2024

Logic: Hours = Operation Quantity/Standard Basis x Production Standard

Available standard basis values:

l Each

l 100s

l 1000s

l 10,000s

Start-To-Start

Only active if the production standard is set to Operations/Hour or Operations/Minute, this is the
number of times this operation must be performed on one part. For example:

l 1

l 10

The Operations per Part number is multiplied by the planned operation quantity to determine the
number of times this operation must be run to complete this operation. This quantity is then divided
by the production standard to determine total estimated production hours.

Total Operations = Ops per Part x Operation Quantity Estimated Production Hours = Total
Operations/Production Standard

Specifies the relationship between this operation and the preceding operation. This helps you
schedule the operations, as it defines the relationship each operation has with the other operations.
There are three options:

l Start-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to start as soon as the previous
operation begins.

l Finish-to-Finish – The application schedules one operation to finish at the same time that a
previous operation finishes.

l Finish-to-Start – The application schedules one operation to begin as soon as the previous
operation ends.

The scheduling option you select here is not used across all the assemblies. Select the scheduling
options you need on each operation.

The first operation on each assembly is always treated as finish-to-start. The operation
Start Date is based on the Due Date from the last operation on a previous assembly.

Subcontract

131 October, 2024

Indicates whether the current operation is a subcontract operation. Subcontract operations are
manufacturing steps in your process run by external companies. For example, you manufacture
automobile parts. When these parts reach a stage in the method of manufacturing, you send them
out to an external company for painting. This painting step is a subcontract operation.

When you create a new subcontract operation, this check box is automatically selected. You cannot
change this value. Only selected fields are then available on the Operations> Detail card, like
Operation, Description, Send Ahead Type, and so on. To add more subcontract details, navigate to
the Method of Manufacturing>Operations>Subcontract card.

Add a Scheduling Resource Record

1. While on this card, click New on the Standard Toolbar to open up fields for data entry.

2. Alternately, select Add Scheduling Resource from the Actions > Operation sub-menu.

3. Enter all required information, and then click Save on the Standard Toolbar.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Standard

Breaks
Use this card to modify an operation's production standard rates that may vary dependent on job
quantity. These settings are useful if your job quantities vary, and the more parts you manufacture,
the less time it takes.

The rates on this card should be entered based on the Prod Std entered on the Operations Detail
card.

Example: The Prod Std on the Operations Detail card is. However, if you manufacture 100 or more
parts, you can manufacture each part in hours instead of 2. Enter information on this Standard
Breaks card to reflect that when you produce 100 (Break Quantity 1), the Production Standard is 1.5
(Hours/Piece).

Kinetic tabs for Standard Breaks is not interfaced with External MES. You can find
detailed description of this functionality in integrated Kinetic help.

Enter Break Quantities

1. Enter up to 10 Break Quantities to indicate when your production standards change. To

calculate an amount for this numeric field, right-click in the field, and from the context menu,
select Calculator.

2. For each Break Quantity entered, enter the new Production Standard for that quantity.

3. Click Save on the Standard Toolbar.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - Subcontract

132 October, 2024

Use this card to add supplier and pricing details to subcontract operations that have been added to a
part's routing. You can also update existing subcontract operation records on this card.

The Navigation area of the card offers a list of operation sequence numbers from which to choose if
you want to update an existing subcontract operation record.

Subcontract Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Qty/Per

Specifies production quantity per one of the parent item.

Opr

Specifies a sequence number which uniquely identifies the operation record. The sequence can be
application generated or assigned by a user.

Attribute Set (Short Description)

Displays the base short description for the selected attribute set.

Example: You attribute set includes the following labels and field values:

Label Field Value

Length 100
Width 50
Dimension 4x8
Thickness 1/2
In this case, the Attribute Set field would display the following:

100,50,4x8,Half

Attribute Set Description

Displays a description of attributes tied to this attribute set.

Example: You attribute set includes the following labels and field values:

Label Field Value

Length 100
Width 50

133 October, 2024

 Label Field Value
Dimension 4x8
Thickness 1/2
In this case, the Description field would display the following:

Length: 100

Width: 50

Dimension: 4x8

Thickness: 1/2

Attribute Set...

Select this button to search for and select an attribute set.

Attribute sets allow you to you to use different dimensions (attribute sets) for the same part and then
reuse those attribute sets depending on the dimension you want to quote, order, purchase,
manufacture, ship, receive, transfer, quantity adjust, and so on.

In the system, each attribute set is tied to an attribute class and each attribute class is
associated with a part. You define your attribute values in Dynamic Attribute Class
Maintenance and each part that you want to select attribute sets for needs to be marked
as Track Inventory Attributes in Part Maintenance.

Example: Let us assume that you have a part called Angle Grinder that is a manufactured part. The
part comes in thee different sizes and power voltage.

Small Size (Attribute Set 01)

Height (Inch) Width (Inch) Power

5 7 1,000 KW

Medium Size (Attribute Set 02)

Height (Inch) Width (Inch) Power

8 10 1,500 KW

Large Size (Attribute Set 03)

Height (Inch) Width (Inch) Power

10 13 2,000 KW

134 October, 2024

The Angler Grinder also comes in three different colors, but you don't spray the device in-house.
Therefore, your method of manufacture holds a subcontract operation where you can define the size
of the devise (attribute set) you are sending to your subcontractor for painting.

Billing Address

Specifies the supplier billing address.

Days Out

Specifies the number of days required to complete the subcontract operation.

Description

Specifies a description for a subcontracted part.

Description...

Click this button to search for and select a description for a subcontracted part.

Description... (Attribute Set)

Select this button to search for and select an Attribute Set description.

Operation

Specifies the operation master ID.

Part ID

Specifies an identifier for a subcontracted part.

Part...

Click this button to search for and select a subcontracted part record.

Price Breaks...

Click the button to search for and select a price break record. A price break is a reduction in price for
a bulk purchase.

Purchase Point

Specifies supplier's purchase point ID.

Quotes Req

Specifies the number of vendor quotes that are required for the part's subcontract operation. The
value can be zero if RFQ(s) are not required.

RFQ Needed

135 October, 2024

This check box indicates that the part's operation requires a request for quote (RFQ). If the operation
requires RFQ, the user must enter the number of required supplier quotes. This only applies to
subcontract operations.

Serial Numbers Required When Shipping

This check box indicates whether serial numbers are required on a subcontract shipment.

Supplier ID

Specifies a unique identifier for a supplier.

Supplier ID...

Click this button to search for and select a supplier record.

UOM

Specifies the inventory unit of measure (UOM) for a part.

Unit Cost

Specifies the estimated unit Cost for a subcontract operation.

Add a Subcontract Operation Record

1. From the Overflow menu and the Operation sub-menu, select Add Subcontract Operation.

2. First complete the Operations Detail card, and then advance to this Subcontract card to enter
information about the supplier and the pricing for the operation.

3. Enter all required information and then click Save on the Standard Toolbar.

Drag and Drop a New Subcontract Operation

1. Advance to the Engineering - Operation Master card and use the Operation Search to pull
subcontract operations from the operation master into the Operations grid.

2. Find the subcontract operation you wish to add to the routing. Use your mouse to drag and
drop the operation onto the Operations list in the workbench's Tree View.

Resequence All Operation Records

1. Click Resequence from the Actions > Operation sub-menu or right-click the Operations node
in the workbench's Tree View and select Resequence.

2. A dialog box displays prompting you to confirm your decision to resequence.

Add a New Scheduling Resource to a Subcontract Operation Record

136 October, 2024

Click Add Scheduling Resource from the Actions > Operation sub-menu. The application will
advance to the Scheduling Resources card.

Review Price Break Information for a Subcontract Operation Record

Click the Price Breaks button.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - RoHS

Use the cards under the RoHS tab to view and enter information related to RoHS (Restriction of
Hazardous Substances) processing by operation.

For each operation, you can specify the operation weight limit for the operation to be in compliance
with your RoHS restrictions and substances rules. You can also specify if the operation is a
subcontract operation.

Kinetic tabs for RoHS are not interfaced with Machine MES. You can find detailed
description of this functionality in integrated Kinetic help.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - RoHS - Restrictions

Use the Restrictions card to view and enter information related to RoHS restriction types.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Compliance Date

Specifies the date of the RoHS Part Compliance roll-up process. The date is set when the Override
check box is selected or after a RoHS Part Compliance roll-up is successful. The date is cleared
when the Override check box is not selected or after a RoHS Part Compliance roll-up is
unsuccessful.

Description

Specifies a brief description of the substance restriction type.

Override

Restriction Type

Specifies the unique identifier for the substance restriction type.

Weight

137 October, 2024

Displays when the part has no net weight or when one or more of the selected substances has no
weight. Defaults from the Part Master.

Engineering Workbench - Method of Manufacturing - Operations - RoHS - Substances

Use the Substances card to view and enter information related to RoHS substances.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Specifies a brief description of the RoHS substance.

Exempt

Select this check box to indicate if this substance is exempt. Substances can be exempt if the
exempt date is greater or equal to today's date. Display only.

Exempt Certificate

Optionally, identifies exempt certificate information.

Exempt Date

Specifies the date when the exempt status for the substance expires. The default comes from the
Part Master.

Override

Substance

Specifies a unique identifier for the RoHS substance. The default comes from the Part Master.

Substance Weight

Identifies the weight of the substance per primary part UOM. The default comes from the Part
Master.

Substance Weight UOM

Identifies the unit of measure of the substance. The default comes from the Part Master.

Machine MES - Machine Parameters

138 October, 2024

Use the cards under Machine MES - Machine Parameters to add, edit or view machine parameters
for the method of manufacture operation.

When operation data synchronizes with Advanced MES, operation machine parameter data
synchronizes with process card data on Advanced MES.

The parameter number must match the parameter number defined for the machine configuration
performing the operation in Advanced MES. In Advanced MES, you create process parameters in
System Configuration > Site > Site > Parameter and assign parameters to a machine configuration
in System Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration. The parameter is selected for each
machine/tool/part combination in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > Specification
card. For more information on parameters and machine configurations on Advanced MES, refer to
the Data Integration Setup on Advanced MES section of this document.

You can update machine parameters in a detail or list view.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Machine Parameter Seq

Specifies the machine parameter sequence for the operation.

Parameter Delay Value

Specifies the amount of time the MIU should delay prior to measuring the process parameter.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Delay value is
defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Edit Facilities > Standards > Process
card > Specifications card.

If the parameter is not set to require a delay before measurement in Machine

Configuration in Advanced MES, this field is not used.

Parameter Lower Limit

Specifies the lower specification limit for the parameter. The lower limit is the lower bound of the
engineering limit that defines the range of acceptable values for a monitored process parameter or
part characteristic to produce a good part.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The LSL value is
defined for each machine/tool/part combination in the Advanced MES in the Edit

139 October, 2024

 Facilities > Standards > Process card > Specifications card.

Parameter Normal Value

Specifies the target value for the monitored process parameter.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Nominal value is
defined for each machine/tool/part combination in the Advanced MES in the Edit
Facilities > Standards > Process card > Specifications card.

Parameter Number

Specifies the number of the process parameter to be monitored when performing the production
process on the machine.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Number value is
automatically generated for the parameter in Advanced MES in the System
Configuration > Site > Site > Parameter card and is selected for each
machine/tool/part combination in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card >
Specification card.

Parameter Upper Limit

Specifies the upper specification limit for the parameter. The upper specification limit is the upper
bound of the engineering limit that defines the range of acceptable values for a monitored process
parameter or part characteristic to produce a good part.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The USL value is
defined for each machine/tool/part combination in the Advanced MES in the Edit
Facilities > Standards > Process card > Specifications card.

Part Number

Specifies the part produced by the production process.

This field relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Part Number value
is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Advanced MES in the Edit
Facilities > Standards > Process card.

Part Qual Control Enable

140 October, 2024

If selected, the part qualification feature is enabled for this parameter. Epicor Advanced MES uses
specification and control limits defined for monitored parameters in the process card to qualify parts
during production.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Part
Qualification setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Advanced
MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Settings card.

Part Qual Spec Enable

If selected, the part qualification specification feature is enabled for this parameter. Epicor Advanced
MES uses specification and control limits defined for monitored parameters in the process card to
qualify parts during production.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Part
Qualification Specification setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in
Advanced MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Enables
card.

Proc Control Alarm

If selected, the alarm is enabled for the process parameter control. If the value of the process
parameter is above or below the control limits set, the machine turns red in the Real Time Display in
Advanced MES, indicating a process violation.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Process
Alarm Control setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Advanced
MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Enables card.

Proc Spec Alarm

If selected, the alarm is enabled for process parameter specification. If the value of the process
parameter is above or below the specification limits set for the parameter, the machine turns red in
the Real Time Display in Advanced MES, indicating a process violation.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Process
Alarm Specification setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in
Advanced MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Enables
card.

Spec Control Alarm

Specifies whether the SPC alarm flag is turned on for control limit violations of this parameter.

141 October, 2024

 This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Process
Alarm Control setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Advanced
MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Enables card.

Spec Enable

If selected, statistical process control sample data is automatically collected for this process
parameter.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Automatic
SPC Sampling Enabled setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in
Advanced MES in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Settings
card.

Spec Run Alarm

Specifies whether the SPC alarm flag should be turned on when a run condition occurs on this
parameter.

This check box relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application only. The Process
Alarm Run setting is defined for each machine/tool/part combination in Advanced MES
in the Edit Facilities > Standards > Process card > SPC Enables card.

Add a Machine Parameter

Perform the following steps for each machine parameter you want to add to the operation.

1. Navigate to the Method of Manufacturing > Operations > Machine MES > Machine
Parameters > Detail card.

2. From the Overflow menu and the Operation sub-menu, select Add Machine Parameters.

3. In the Parameter Number field, enter the process parameter to be monitored when performing
the operation. This number must match an existing parameter defined for the machine
configuration in Advanced MES.

4. In the Parameter Upper Limit field, enter the upper specification limit for the parameter.

5. In the Parameter Normal Value field, enter the target value for the monitored machine
parameter.

6. In the Parameter Lower Limit field, enter the lower specification limit for the parameter.

142 October, 2024

 7. In the Parameter Delay Value field, enter the amount of time the MIU should delay prior to
measuring the process parameter.

8. Select the Spec Enable check box if statistical process control sample data should be
automatically calculated for this parameter.

9. Select the Spec Control Alarm check box if there should be an alarm in Advanced MES if the
parameter value is above or below the control limits set.

10. Select the Proc Spec Alarm check box if the SPC alarm flag should turn on when a run
condition occurs on the parameter.

11. Select the Proc Control Alarm check box if there should be an alarm in Advanced MES If the
value of the process parameter is above or below the control limits set.

12. Select the Proc Qual Spec Enable check box to enable the the part qualification specification
feature for this parameter.

13. Select the Proc Qual Control Enable check box to enable the the part qualification control
feature for this parameter.

14. Click Save. When data is synchronized between Epicor EP and a machine MES application
like Advanced MES, machine parameter information is synchronized between the operation
and the Advanced MES process card.

Kinetic Employee Maintenance

Use Employee Maintenance to set integration information for Kinetic employees that should be
integrated with Advanced MES.

In Employee Maintenance, define certain permissions governing what functions the employee can
access and execute in Epicor Advanced MES in the Machine MES card.

l Use the Production Info card to indicate whether the selected employee will be integrated with
the Advanced MES Manufacturing Execution System (MES).

l Use the Machine MES card to set certain permissions defining what functions the employee
can access and execute within the PCMIU or TSMIU devices in Advanced MES. Once the
selected employee record is imported to the Epicor Advanced MES, the defined permissions
will work in conjunction with the Epicor Advanced MES's Machine Interface Units (MIU) and
Touch Screen Machine Interface Units (TSMIU) security options.

In Kinetic Machine MES card, the Advanced MES security settings only apply if the corresponding
Advanced MES module has been installed on the Advanced MES application.

143 October, 2024

When Kinetic employee data is imported into Advanced MES, each employee enabled for Machine
MES becomes an operator in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Miscellaneous > Operator
ID.

Menu Path

Launch this application by pressing Kinetic > Employee Maintenance.

Production Info
Use the Production Info card to enable synchronization with Advanced MES for an employee.

Employees must have the Machine MES check box selected in this card to be
synchronized with Advanced MES.

Production Info Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Machine MES

Select this check box to specify whether the selected employee will be synchronized with the
external Advanced MES Manufacturing Execution System.v

Updating Employee Production Info

1. Select the Machine MES option to set the employee to be synchronized with Advanced MES.

2. Edit all required information and then click Save on the Standard Toolbar.

Machine MES
Use the Advanced MES card to define certain permissions governing what functions Kinetic
employee can access and execute within Advanced MES.

Example: If the machine MES integration is with Advanced MES, then the defined permissions will
work in conjunction with the Advanced MES's Machine Interface Units (MIU) and Touch Screen
Machine Interface Units (TSMIU) security options, once the selected employee record is imported
into Advanced MES.

In Kinetic Machine MES card, the Advanced MES security settings only apply if the
corresponding Advanced MES module has been installed on the Advanced MES

144 October, 2024

 application. If the Advanced MES module is not installed, the security setting is
disregarded.

Machine MES Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

In Kinetic Machine MES card, the Advanced MES security settings only apply if the
corresponding Advanced MES module is installed on the Advanced MES application.

These check boxes relates to the Epicor Advanced MES application, where you define
permissions for the operator in the System Configuration > Miscellaneous > Operator
ID > TSMIU Permissions card.

Permit Attribute Sqc

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to input manual attribute SQC samples on
the TSMIU device. Attribute defects often include important part non-conformities.

Permit Calibration

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to calibrate the Gain and Offset values for
the analog channels on the TSMIU device.

Permit Cavities

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to change cavities for a running job on the
TSMIU device.

Permit Down

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to enter downtime information on the TSMIU
device. If cleared, the operator is not permitted to enter downtime information on the TSMIU device.

Permit Help

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform a help call from the TSMIU device.

Permit Job Control

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform job control activities such as
ending, suspending, or starting a job on the TSMIU device.

Permit Job Next Control

145 October, 2024

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform Next Job activities on the TSMIU
device such as viewing production and material requirement information for a future job in the
production schedule. You can also view setup card and web setup information for the selected job
number.

Permit Machine Pm

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform machine preventive maintenance
operations on the TSMIU device.

Permit Manual Sqc

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform manual statistical process control
activities on the TSMIU device. Activities include initiating manual samples, editing data samples,
and viewing SPC charts.

Permit Material Lot

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to change material lots on the TSMIU device.

Permit Percent Regrind

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to modify the amount of virgin and regrind
material for a running job on the TSMIU device.

Permit Preference

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to change display preferences on the TSMIU
device.

Permit Save Profile

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to save new graph profile information on the
TSMIU device.

Permit Scrap

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to enter scrap information on the TSMIU
device. If cleared, the operator is not permitted to enter scrap information on the TSMIU device.

Permit Setup Material

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to add setup material for a running job on the
TSMIU device.

Permit Tool Pm

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to perform tool preventive maintenance
operations on the TSMIU device.

146 October, 2024

Permit Variable Sqc

Select this check box to permit an operator (employee) to enter and edit variable statistical quality
control sample data on the TSMIU device.

Updating Employee Machine MES Info

Edit all required information and then click Save on the Standard Toolbar.

147 October, 2024

Data Integration Setup on Advanced MES
To implement data integration between Kinetic and Advanced MES, you must setup configuration,
scrap and down time data on Advanced MES.

In Advanced MES, the following information must be defined:

l Machine Configuration - Define machine configurations in Advanced MES for each machine
MES enabled machine resource in Kinetic.

Kinetic machine resource ID and the Advanced MES machine configuration

number must match.

l Scrap Maps - Once you import Kinetic scrap reason codes into Advanced MES, you must
group the imported scrap codes into a scrap map. Once you create a scrap map, you can
assign it to a machine configuration for use on MIUs and PCMIUs when reporting scrap. You
can select any scrap reason included in the scrap map assigned to the machine configuration.

l Downtime Maps - Once you import Kinetic downtime enabled indirect labor codes into
Advanced MES, you must group the imported downtime codes into a down map. Once you
create a down map, you can assign it to a machine configuration for use when reporting down
time on MIUs and PCMIUs. You can select any down reason included in the down map
assigned to the machine configuration.

Refer to Appendix A - Data Integration Best Practices for Epicor recommendations for
data integration setup on Advanced MES.

Plants
To integrate Advanced MES with Kinetic, you need to create plants that correspond to Kinetic sites
that you are integrating with Advanced MES.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Miscellaneous > Plants.

2. Select New.

3. In the Plant Desc field, enter the ID of Kinetic site you are integrating with Advanced MES. It
must have the same name as Kinetic site you have enabled for integration.

4. In the Company Name field, specify the name of Kinetic company you are integrating with
Advanced MES.

5. Select Save.

Use these steps to create as many plants as you need.

148 October, 2024

Advanced MES Machine Configurations
Use Machine Configuration to define and configure the information for manufacturing machines
used at your plant. The machine configurations are manually synchronized with machine resources
defined in Kinetic.

Each machine corresponds to a physical or virtual MIU/AIU. Physical connection for the machine,
such as the inputs and reductions methods must correspond to the actual physical MIU/AIU
hardware that will be used.

Additional information, such as production cycle data, shift schedules, scrap, down and help maps,
voice and email maps, barcode print server and barcode printer, and process parameters are also
defined.

On Kinetic, you can define machine parameter data for existing Advanced MES parameters
assigned to machine configurations. When data synchronizes between Kinetic and Advanced MES,
machine parameter data synchronizes between Kinetic operation and the Advanced MES process
card. The parameter number on Kinetic and Advanced MES must match.

To integrate resources between Kinetic and Advanced MES, the Epicor Preventative
main module must be installed

If Advanced MES is integrated withKinetic, the Advanced MES machine configuration

ID must match Kinetic resource ID.

Menu Path

Launch this application using the Advanced MES Main Menu by pressing the Advanced MES >
System Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration.

Add a Machine Configuration

Use Add a Machine Configuration to add a machine configuration to Advanced MES.

1. Press New.

2. When creating a machine configuration, there are seven cards where you can define data.
Enter the required information in each card and press Save to save the new machine
configuration.

Machine Configuration General Card

Use the General card to enter general information for the machine configuration.

This information includes the machine number and description, the machine's department, physical
connection and networking information, production cycle data and the type of MIU being used.

149 October, 2024

General Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Address

Specifies the physical address used for RS-485 communications and machine assignment for multi-
machine MIU/AIU's. This field range is 0 - 126. In most cases, MIU/AIU's communicating RS-485 is
addressed in the 0 -15 address range.

A unique address is required for each machine on each channel regardless of the channel type.

Cavity Transfer

Specifies the analog channel that is used to transfer the machine from the injection phase to hold
pressure. The pressure value that causes the transfer is configured in the process card.

Channel

Specifies the manual channel, RS-485, or Ethernet channel that the MIU/AIU is using to
communicate production data.

Comment 1-2

Specifies the comment fields where additional information about the machine can be entered.

Department

Specifies the department to which the machine is assigned.

Description

Specifies a description of the machine. This field appears next to the Machine Number in many
areas of the application.

Down Cost $

Specifies the standard cost associated with downtime for this machine. This value can only be
viewed or modified by users with appropriate security permissions.

Heartbeat

If the MIU/AIU is communicating through an Ethernet connection, this field contains the number of
seconds between heartbeats. This value cannot be changed

Linear Rate Multiplier

If the machine speed is set to meters per hour or feet per hour, this field is used to convert the
number of machine cycles into a length of part produced.

MAC Address

150 October, 2024

If the MIU/AIU is using an Ethernet channel, this field contains the unique MAC address for the
device.

MIU Level

Specifies the type of Advanced MES MIU/AIU that is being used to record data from the machine.

MIU Type

Displays Advanced MES MIU and is disabled.

Machine Icon

The icon that is used for the machine on the graphical plant floor status display (graphical Real-Time
Display) and the PCMIU's Machine Selection Display. There are several options based on the type
of machine being created.

Machine Number

Specifies the unique alphanumeric identifier for the machine.

If Advanced MES is integrated with Kinetic, the Advanced MES machine configuration
ID must match Kinetic resource ID.

Port

If the MIU/AIU is communicating through an Ethernet connection, this field contains the connection
port number. This value cannot be changed.

Process Exception Logging Option

If this check box is selected, every machine cycle that is out-of-specification is logged in the Process
Exception log. The log will record any machine cycles that result in a violation of specification limits,
control limits, and or part qualification limits for any monitored process parameter. The Process
Exception log can be accessed from the main menu in .

The Process Exception Log has the potential to grow very rapidly and should only be
turned on if the data collected will be used. The Process Exception Log is intended to
be a short term debugging tool and should not be used in place of statistical analysis of
data.

Remote Scrap Option

When this option is checked (enabled), any time that digital contact #2 in the MIU/AIU fires, a scrap
part is entered for the running job for the first scrap reason that is defined in the scrap map. If a family
job is running, one machine cycle (not one part) is scrapped. This feature requires a supported MIU .

151 October, 2024

Shift Configuration

Specifies the Shift Configuration that is used for the machine. To use the shift configuration that has
been assigned to the department, select Department Default.

Setting General Information

1. In the Machine Number field, enter a unique alphanumeric identifier for the machine. This is
the number that appears when selecting or viewing the machine.

If Advanced MES is integrated with Kinetic, the Advanced MES machine

configuration ID must match Kinetic resource ID.

2. In the Description field, enter a more detailed description for the machine.

3. In the Comment 1 and Comment 2 fields, enter any additional information for the machine.

4. In the Machine Icon field, select an icon to use to represent the machine. This icon is used as
a visual display for the machine in the Graphical Plant Floor display.

5. If the machine transfers from an injection to a hold pressure phase as part of the
manufacturing process, enter the analog channel that is used for this transfer in the Cavity
Transfer field.

6. If costing is used in Advanced MES, enter the standard cost associated with downtime for this
machine in the Down Cost $ field. This value can only be viewed or modified by users that
have the required security permissions.

7. The MIU Type field displays Advanced MES MIU and is a display only field.

8. In the MIU Level field, select the type of MIU/AIU that is used to record data from this machine.

9. In the Machine Speed field, select the measurement standard that is used to record
production speed on this machine.

10. If the machine speed is Meters/Hour or Feet/Hour, enter the linear rate multiplier used to
convert machine cycles into the length of the part produced per hour in the Linear Rate
Multiplier field.

11. In the Department field, select the department to which the machine belongs.

12. Select the channel that is used to communicate production data from the MIU/AIU.

13. Enter the physical address where the MIU/AIU is configured. This typically ranges from 0-15
for MIU/AIU's communicating via RS-485.

152 October, 2024

 Each MIU/AIU must have a unique channel/address setting.

14. In the Shift Configuration field, select the shift configuration that is used on the machine to
identify shifts. To use the shift configuration assigned to the department that owns the
machine, select Department Default.

15. Check the Process Exception Logging option if every cycle that is out of specification for this
machine should be logged.

The Process Exception Log has the potential to grow very rapidly and should only
be turned on for short term debugging.

16. Select the Remote Scrap (Pushbutton) check box if a scrap should be recorded for the
running job any time that digital contact #2 fires in the MIU/AIU. The first scrap reason in the
scrap map is used. This feature requires a supported MIU.

If a family job is running, one machine cycle is scrapped.

17. If the machine is using an Ethernet communication channel, enter the device's MAC address
in the MAC Address field.

If the MIU/AIU for the machine is communicating through Ethernet, the port
number is displayed in the Port Number field and cannot be updated.

If the MIU/AIU communicates through Ethernet, the time frequency between

heartbeats is displayed in the Heartbeat field. A heartbeat signal used to
communicate that the MIU/AIU is successfully connected is emitted based on the
value in this field. It cannot be updated. The unit of measure is in seconds.

Machine Configuration Miscellaneous Card

Use the Miscellaneous card to configure miscellaneous information for the machine, including
machine groups, the barcode printer and print server, reject configuration information and the URL
for the web-based setup card, and to set up the machine export to Kinetic.

Miscellaneous Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Barcode Printer

153 October, 2024

When using the On-Demand Printing option, this specifies the barcode printer that is used, by
default, when a barcode label is printed for a job that is running on this machine.

Machine E10 Export

Click this button to set up the machine export to Kinetic. For more information on this process, refer
to the Machine E10 Export help articles of this guide.

Machine Groups 1-4

These are four different customizable groups to which a machine can be assigned. These groups
can be used as filters in the Real Time Display or in custom reports.

Group categories (field name) can be customized in Advanced MES > System Configuration >
Miscellaneous > Group Categories. Groups (option in the drop-down list) can be customized in
Advanced MES > System Configuration > Miscellaneous > Groups.

Print Server

When using the On-Demand Printing option, this specifiies the print server that is used, by default,
when a barcode label is printed for a job that is running on this machine.

Reject Delay

This field contains the time in milliseconds the MIU waits before issuing the Reject signal, after the
cycle complete signal has been sensed and when the reject part reaches the eject station.

Reject Enable

If this option is checked, this enables the ability to physically reject parts on this machine at various
stages of the production cycle. The reject position may be a distance away from the point where the
part goes out of spec and is rejected. Using the information in the rejection configuration fields, the
MIU, while maintaining details on the point of failure, uses the information in this card to determine
the delay to use before issuing the rejection signal. This ensures the rejected parts reach the
rejection point.

Reject Position

For rejection configuration, this field contains the point in the carousel or line where the reject
position is located.

Scoreboard URL

A URL for the Scoreboard used to display data for this machine. Scoreboards are an optional
Advanced MES feature.

Setup Document

A URL for the web-based setup card for this machine that you can view in the PCMIU or the
Document Control Center.

154 October, 2024

Station Count

If using reject configuration, this field contains the number of stations in the carousel or production
line.

Setting Miscellaneous Information

1. In the 4 machine group fields, select the groups to which you want the machine to belong.

The group category titles are customized in System Configuration >

Miscellaneous > Group Categories.. The options that appear in the group
categories fields can be customized in System Configuration > Miscellaneous >
Groups.

These groups are used as filters in the Real Time Display and can also be used in custom
reports.

The rejection configuration section is where specific rejection points in a line or carousel are
defined.

2. In the Station Count field, enter the number of stations in the line or carousel.

3. In the Reject Position field, enter the position in the carousel or line where the rejection point
is located.

4. In the Reject Delay field, enter the time in milliseconds that the MIU should wait before issuing
the Reject signal, when the reject part reaches the reject station and after the cycle complete
cycle has been sensed.

5. Select the Reject Enabled check box if rejection points and time delays should be defined in
your production line or carousel. If this option is not checked, the part is rejected at the point
that it goes outside specification tolerances.

6. If you are using the On-Demand Barcode Printing feature, select the printer that is used by
default when printing barcode labels from this machine in the Barcode Printer field.

7. If you are using the On-Demand Barcode Printing feature, select the print server that is used
by default when printing barcode labels from this machine in the Print Server field.

8. If you are using web-based setup cards, enter the URL that points to the web-based setup
card that you are using for this machine in the Setup Document field. Click the View button to
view the set up card and test that the URL is correct.

9. If you are using scoreboards to display manufacturing data, enter the URL that points to the
scoreboard for this machine in the Scoreboard URL field.

Machine E10 Export

155 October, 2024

Use the Machine E10 Export button on the Miscellaneous card to set up the machine export to
Kinetic.

After you add some data to a machine in Kinetic and then import it to Advanced MES, where you also
make some changes to it, you can use the Machine E10 Export feature to export the machine back
to Kinetic.

Verify that the jobs on the machines that you mark for exporting to Kinetic were also
created on Kinetic as Resources type Machine.

Miscellaneous Fields > Machine E10 Export

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Awaken Mode

Specifies the awaken mode. If the value is other that 0, the settings you defined in the Pause when
send queue empty and Minimum time between production data collections fields will be ignored.
Thus the next time when Advanced MES can send the data to Kinetic, it will do it regardless of the
settings.

Disable Kinetic Export

Select this radio button if you want to disable the export process to Kinetic for this machine.

Enable Production Export

Indicates whether you want to export the Advanced MES machine production to Kinetic.

Enable Schedule Export

Indicates whether you want to export the Advanced MES machine changes to schedules to Kinetic.

Export via CSV file

Select this radio button if you want to export the machine to Kinetic using a CSV file.

Export via REST endpoint

Select this radio button if you want to export the machine via REST endpoint.

Log Conversation (Very Verbose)

Select this check box to create a log of everything sent to REST from this machine.

Minimum time between production data collections

156 October, 2024

Specifies the number of seconds between production data collections. You can use this field to
control how fast Advanced MES collects data to make it available to send it to Kinetic.

The preferable option is 0.

Pause when send queue empty

Specifies for how long the export process pauses when the send queue is empty.

Advanced MES sends data into Kinetic in import groups. You can use this field to enter a number of
seconds for which you want the machine to stop and not send data to Kinetic after all available
import groups are sent. This help to limit the process in order not to overload Kinetic with data.

Permanent Awaken

Select this check box if you want to leave the process of sending data to Kinetic permanent.

Repeat Minutes

Specifies the number of repeat minutes for the machine export via a CSV file.

Transmitter MCP instance name

Specifies the name of the transmitter MCP instance (channel) used for the machine export to Kinetic.

Verify the channel type is set up to Epicor Web Service API on the Site > Channel
card.

Export a Machine to Kinetic via REST Endpoint

1. Navigate to Machine Configuration. : Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site >
Machine Configuration

2. In the Machines pane, select the machine you want to export and click the Machine E10
Export button on the Miscellaneous card. Kinetic Export window displays.

3. Select the Export via REST endpoint radio button.

4. Select the Enable Production Export and Enable Schedule Export check boxes to export
both production and schedule data of the machine to Kinetic.

5. In the Pause when send queue empty field, enter for how long you want the export process to
pause when the send queue is empty. For example, enter 45.

6. Verify Minimum time between production data collections is set to 0.

157 October, 2024

 7. From the Transmitter MCP instance name drop-down list, select the transmitter MCP
instance (channel) you want to use for the export.

8. Click OK. If you want to see the status of the export process via REST, you can use Kinetic
Export Info display in Real-Time Display.

Machine Configuration Code Maps Card

Use the Code Maps card to assign various code maps to the machine. Code maps are collections of
codes used in various parts of the production process, such as recording down time, scrap or
preventative maintenance activities, requesting help and voice and email and alarming. These
codes are fully customized based on your needs.

Code Map Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Down Code Map

Specifies the down code map that determines which down reason codes can be selected when
reporting down time on this machine.

Down Code Maps are defined in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Codes > Down
Map.

Help Code Map

Specifies the help code map that determines which help codes can be selected when requesting
help from this machine.

Help Code Maps are defined in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Codes > Help Map.

PM Map

Specifies the preventative maintenance map that determines which PM codes can be selected when
performing preventative maintenance activities on this machine.

PM Code Maps are defined in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Codes > Machine PM
Code Map.

Scrap Code Map

Specifies the scrap code map that determines which scrap reasons can be selected when reporting
scrap on this machine.

Scrap Code Maps are defined in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Codes > Scrap
Map.

158 October, 2024

Sound File

Specifies the sound file that plays when a voice alarm is initiated.

All sound files must be placed in the \ProHelp\Voice\names\mach directory on your Advanced MES
Server.

Voice/Email Alarm Map

Specifies the voice/email alarm that determines the voice and/or email alarm settings used when
reporting down time, out of specification process parameters or when requesting help.

Voice/Email Alarm Maps are defined in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Miscellaneous >
Voice and Email Code Map.

Setting Code Maps

1. In the Help Code Map field, select the help code map containing the help codes to use on this
machine.

2. In the Scrap Code Map field, select the scrap map containing the scrap codes to use when
reporting scrap on this machine.

3. In the Down Code Map field, select the down map containing the down codes to use when
reporting down time on this machine.

4. In the PM Map field, select the preventative maintenance map containing the codes to use
when performing PM activities on this machine.

5. In the Voice/Email Alarm Map field, select the Voice/Email Alarm map you want to use when
alarming down time, out of specification process parameters or requesting help on this
machine.

6. In the Sound File field, enter the name of sound file that you want to use when alarms occur on
this machine.

All sound files must be placed in the \ProHelp\Voice\names\mach directory on

your Advanced MES server.

Machine Configuration AIUs Card

Use the AIUs card to configure the AIU hardware that comprises the physical MIU is. An AIU is a
collection of analog and digital inputs that are part of the MIU. Modern MIUs, including the TSMIU,
have two built-in AIUs. Older MIUs, including the black box MIU, have one built-in AIU.

If the MIU has an optional PLC interface, the PLC interface is also specified in this card. If you are
using TSMIUs, you must also select the PLC interface at the MIU's Service Display screen.

AIUs Fields

159 October, 2024

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

AIU

AIU number automatically specified by Advanced MES. Each AIU number must be unique.

PLC Configure

Some PLCs require additional configuration information for the overall PLC (in addition to
configuration information for each individual PLC parameter). If the selected PLC requires this
additional information, you entered it in this field.

Stage Auto Insert

If stage detection is enabled, checking this check box causes the derived times for each of the three
stages to be inserted into the Pulse 2, Pulse 3, and Pulse 4 parameters. When disabled, these fields
revert to their normal operation.

Stage Detect

Specified is Stage Detection is enabled. The stage detection feature is a software algorithm that
allows a supported MIU to derive up to three discrete stages of operation (injection pressure, hold
pressure, and back pressure) from a single analog input (Analog 6). The derived pressures for the
three stages are inserted into the Analog 6, Analog 7, and Analog 8 parameters.

In order for the stage detection algorithm to be able to derive the three stages of injection, the Analog
6 pressure transducer should be calibrated to use at least half of its dynamic range.

Stage Detection is an optional feature and requires a supported MIU.

Stage Tolerance

When stage detection is enabled, this field is used by the stage detection algorithm to determine
when a change between two stages has occurred. The stage tolerance level must be greater than
any noise that may be present in the analog signal, but must be less than the actual difference
between any two stages.

Defining AIUs

Use the AIUs grid to maintain AIUs for the machine.

160 October, 2024

 1. To add an AIU, press Add.

2. 1. In the Add AIU window, select the AIU number from the drop-down list and press OK. Each
AIU number must be unique. The window closes and the AIU appears in the grid.

3. For each AIU in the grid, perform the following:

a. If the Stage Detect option is enabled, three discrete stages of operation can be derived
from a single analog input (Analog 6). The three stages are injection pressure, hold
pressure and back pressure.

Note: Stage Detection is only enabled if the optional Stage Detection feature has been
acquired by your company.
b. If the Stage Detect option is enabled, check the Stage Auto Insert option if you wish for
the derived times for each of the three stages to be inserted into the Pulse 2, 3 and 4
parameters.

c. If the Stage Detect option is enabled, enter the stage tolerance in the Stage Tolerance
field. This field is used by the stage detection algorithm to determine when there has
been a change from one stage to another. The stage tolerance level must be greater
than any noise that may be present in the analog signal, but must be less than the actual
difference between any two stages.

d. In the PLC field, select the PLC interface used to collect process parameter information.
If this value is changed, you must make a corresponding change (or EPROM change) at
the MIU. Failure to do so can cause the MIU to stop communicating.

e. If the selected PLC requires additional information, a Configure option appears beside
the PLC. Press Configure to open a pop-up window where you can define the additional
information. (This data required is different based on the PLC.) Press OK to save the
data and close the window.

4. To delete an AIU from the grid, select it in the list and press Delete. In the System
Configuration confirmation window, press OK to confirm the deletion and close the window.

When you delete an AIU, you delete the inputs, parameters and historical
information associated with the AIU.

Machine Configuration Process Parameter Card

Use the Process Parameter card to configure the process parameters and analog and digital inputs
associated with the MIU/AIU.

This is the actual data that is collected from this machine (analog inputs, digital inputs, and/or PLC
inputs) and that is stored for jobs.

161 October, 2024

In the Parameters card, you define the reduction method that is used to convert the physical input
into useful information. Each process parameter is associated with one input. However, multiple
process parameters can be associated with the same input.

If you specified that the MIU has an optional PLC interface defined on the AIU tab, then the inputs on
this tab can optionally be configured as PLC Source. When this is done, additional information is
required to configure the PLC input and that configuration is entered on this display. Inputs are
automatically added or deleted as you add or delete AIUs.

On Kinetic, you can define machine parameter data for existing Advanced MES parameters
assigned to machine configurations. When data synchronizes between Kinetic and Advanced MES,
machine parameter data synchronizes between Kinetic operation and the Advanced MES process
card. The parameter number on Kinetic and Advanced MES must match.

The first process parameter in the grid is CYC Time. This is fixed within Advanced MES.

Process Parameter Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Cross-Coupling

The Cross-Coupling field allows the input to derive its data from a different input. For example, a
digital input could be configured to gather data from an analog input. This is useful if you want to
measure multiple values such as using multiple reduction methods on one analog signal. This does
not apply if the input type is PLC source.

Current Value

Displays the last value for this parameter that was sent from the MIU/AIU to the host computer.
Clicking on the Current Value column header refreshes this data.

Decimal Places

Specifies the number of decimal places for the parameter.

End Contact

Specifies the digital input to determine the stopping point to end the reading of the analog.

End Edge

Specifies whether the leading or the trailing edge of the end contact should be used to stop
measuring the analog.

Gain

162 October, 2024

Specifies the gain multiplier to the raw data value that is read by the MIU. This is used in conjunction
with Machine Calibration. When this is used, an adjusted raw value is created when calibrating the
machine.

Input

Specifies the input associated with the physical hardware in the MIU. Inputs are automatically added
or deleted from the machine when the AIUs are added or deleted.

Offset

Specifies the offset for the parameter raw data value that is read by the MIU. This value is used in
conjunction with Machine Calibration. When this is used, an adjusted raw value is created when
calibrating the machine.

PLC

If the parameter input type is set to PLC source, this field specifies additional information to define
which field should be read from the PLC.

Parameter

Specifies the process parameter name to be associated with the input. If a parameter is not
specified, data is not collected for this input.

Reduction Method

This field allows you to take the raw analog data that is read from the input (including inputs that are
cross-coupled) and convert that data into the desired parameter value.

For example, Analog 6 may have an Injection Pressure sensor wired into the analog and the
Reduction Method may be configured to capture the maximum value that was read during the course
of a machine cycle. If the Type value has been set to PLC Source, then the Reduction Method does
not apply.

Start Contact

Specifies the digital input to use to determine the starting point to read an analog.

Start Edge

Specifies whether the leading or the trailing edge of the start contact should be used to start
measuring the analog.

Station Index

If there is a set scrap output point in the manufacturing process that is different than the process
parameter read point, this field contains the distance in cycles between the parameter read point and
the ejection point.

163 October, 2024

Type

Specifies the input type.

l For digital inputs that can be modified, the type can be Digital where raw data is read from the
MIU hardware or PLC Source where processed data is read from the machine's PLC.

Digital 1 is reserved and cannot be used for PLC Source

l For analog inputs, the type can be one of several sensor types where raw data is read from the
MIU hardware using the specified sensor type or PLC Source where processed data is read
from the machine's PLC.

Units

This field contains descriptive text for the parameter and can be seen in several places in Advanced
MES.

Defining Process Parameters

The Process Parameters grid is where you define process parameter information for each AIU/MIU
input.

The AIU inputs that appear in the grid are based on the AIUs defined in the Machine Configuration
AIUs card.

For each process parameter, perform the following steps:

1. The Input field displays the input physically associated with the hardware in the MIU. Inputs
are automatically added or deleted from the machine when AIUs are added or deleted.

2. In the Parameter field, select the process parameter that you wish to associate with the input.
If a parameter is not selected, data is not collected for the input.

The available process parameters are based on the process parameters defined
in.

3. The Current Value field displays the last value sent from the MIU for this parameter. Press the
Current Value column header and Advanced MES attempts to reread this data.

4. In the Units field, enter descriptive text for the parameter. This value can be seen in several
places in Advanced MES.

5. In the Type field, select the input type that should be used for this parameter.

164 October, 2024

 For some types of digital inputs, this field is disabled.

l For digital inputs that can be modified, the available types are Digital or PLC Source.

l For analog inputs, the type can be one of several sensor types or PLC Source.

6. If the parameter input is analog, select the reduction method you wish to use to take the raw
analog data read from the input and convert the data into the desired parameter value. The
reduction method does not apply if the Type is set to PLC source.

7. If the parameter input is analog, the input can use a different input from which to collect its
data. This is useful when measuring multiple values. If you wish to use this feature, select the
input to use from the Cross-Coupling field.

In the input type is PLC Source, the Cross-Coupling field is not used.

8. If the process parameter requires measurement of a hold pressure state, the start contact and
edge and the end contact and edge values can be used to determine the starting and ending
points for the hold state. The start contact is used along with the start edge to determine when
to start reading the hold pressure when the previous signal ends. In the Start Contact field,
enter the digital input used to determine the starting point to collect the analog reading.

9. In the Start Edge field, enter whether to start measuring on the leading edge or the trailing
edge of the start contact digital input.

10. The end contact and the end edge are used to determine when to stop reading hold pressure
and start reading the next signal. In the End Contact field, enter the digital input used to
determine the ending point to collecting the analog reading.

11. In the End Edge field, enter whether to stop measuring on the leading edge or the trailing edge
of the start contact digital input.

12. In the Decimal Places field, enter the number of decimal places to use for the parameter.

13. In the Gain field, enter the number that is used as the gain multiplier to be multiplied with the
raw data recorded through the MIU. When using machine calibration, this value is used to
create an adjusted raw value when calibrating the machine.

14. In the Offset field, enter the value that is used as an offset for the parameter raw data value
read by the MIU. The offset is used when performing machine calibration to create an adjusted
raw value.

15. If the parameter input type is PLC source, you can enter additional information In the PLC field
to determine which field should be read by the PLC.

165 October, 2024

 16. If the process parameter has a set ejection point that is different than the parameter read point
in the production process, enter the distance in cycles between the parameter read point and
the ejection point in the Station Index field.

This is typically used when there are multiple stations in the production process where there is
one or more set stations where parts are ejected. This ejection station may be several stations
after the testing and rejection point.

Calibration of Analog inputs can be made directly on the MIU or in Machine

Configuration.

Machine Configuration Tool Compatibility Card

Use the Tool Compatibility card to define tool or machine compatibility information for the machine
configuration.

This card does not affect the MIU's data collection.

The parameters that appear in this card are configured in System Configuration > Site > System
Configuration > Tool Compatibility card.

Tool Compatibility Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Description of process parameter

The values that appear in this tab are defined in System Configuration > Site > System Configuration
> Tool Compatibility card.

Minimum Value

The minimum required value for the tool parameter

Required Options

Select all tool parameter options that are required when using a tool with the machine configuration.

Units

Unit of measure to quality the minimum required tool parameter value.

Setting Tool Compatibility Information

166 October, 2024

The Tool Compatibility card displays all tool parameters that you can select as compatible with the
machine configuration.

1. Select a minimum required value and unit of measure for each tool parameter that is
compatible for use with the machine configuration.

2. In the Required Options section, select the check box beside each of tool parameter that is
required for tools used with this machine configuration.

Machine Configuration PM History Card

Use the PM History card to display the preventative maintenance history that has been performed for
the machine.

PM History Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Cycles

The number of production cycles performed during the preventative maintenance activity.

Date Performed

The date the preventative maintenance task was performed

Description

A description of the PM activity performed.

Duration

The duration of the PM activity.

Employee ID

The employee ID of the employee who performed the PM activity.

PM Code

The code that represents the type of preventative maintenance that was performed

PM Maps containing PM Codes to be used on the machine are assigned in System Configuration >
Site > Machine Configuration > Code Maps card.

Run Time

The machine run time of the production maintenance activity.

167 October, 2024

Using PM History Card

Press PM Due Report to launch the PM Due report and view what machines are due for
preventative maintenance.

Advanced MES Scrap Maps

In Advanced MES, use Scrap Maps to provide the link between scrap codes and machines.

Scrap codes are selected for a scrap map. When you assign a scrap map to a machine, the machine
can then use any of the scrap codes in the map as a scrap reason for the machine.

Before defining scrap maps, there must be existing scrap codes.

Assign scrap maps to machines in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Machine
Configuration.

Menu Path

Launch this application using the Main Menu from System Configuration > Site > Codes > Scrap
Maps.

Add a Scrap Map

Use the Add a Scrap Map card to add a scrap map to group scrap codes.

1. Press New.

2. In the Map Name field, enter the name of the new scrap map.

3. On the top level, there are 20 scrap reasons that you can select. You can extend those scrap
reasons by adding advanced sub-categories for each reason. For each scrap code you wish to
add to the map, select the scrap code from the Reason drop-down list.

4. Press Save.

Scrap Map Subcategories

Use Scrap Map Subcategories to assign one or more scrap codes as sub categories to one of the
scrap reasons. This allows you to extend the number of selectable scrap reasons past the 20
allowed on the top level.

When you create a sub-category, you are allowed to specify a category name and 10
additional scrap codes. Each sub-category must contain at least one scrap reason and
may contain as many as 10 scrap reasons.

Scrap Map-Subcategory Fields

168 October, 2024

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Category Name

The name of the scrap map subcategory

Category Description

A more detailed description of the scrap map subcategory

Sub-Reasons

The scrap code that belongs to the scrap map subcategory. When a scrap map is assigned to a
machine, this code will be available to be selected during scrap instances.

Add Advance Scrap Map Details

Use the Advanced Scrap Map card to create advanced categories and assign lower level scrap
codes to scrap codes on the top level.

1. Press Advanced to launch the Select Primary Category window.

2. In the Select Category to Modify field, select the scrap reason to which you want to assign
additional sub-reasons.

3. Press OK to open the Advanced Scrap Map card.

4. In the Category Name field, enter the name of the new category.

5. In the Category Description field, enter a more detailed description of the category.

6. For each scrap code that you wish to add as a sub-reason, select it from one of the sub-reason
fields. You can select up to 9 additional sub-reasons. Sub-reason 1 is reserved for the top-
level scrap code.

7. Press Save to save the category and return to the main scrap code map card.

8. On the main scrap card, press Save to save your new scrap map.

Advanced MES Down Maps

In Advanced MES, use Down Maps to provide the link between down codes and machines.

Once you have imported down codes into Advanced MES, you must assign them to down maps. You
select all down codes that should be included in that map. When you assign a down map to a

169 October, 2024

machine, the machine can then use any of the down codes in the map as a downtime reason for the
machine. Before defining down maps, there must be existing down codes. If any of the down codes
require parts to be automatically scrapped, existing scrap codes are required.

You assign down maps to machines in Machine Configuration.

In Advanced MES, some down codes are defined by default. You must review those
down codes in Advanced MES > System Configuration > Site > Codes > Down. If a
down code is not valid for integration, either remove the code or do not include it in a
down map. If you include invalid down codes in a down map, errors will occur when you
import labor data into Kinetic and the labor import will fail.

In Down Codes, the first down code (number 1) must be set to None. This is the down
code that is used by default when down time occurs on the MIU or PCMIU before down
time reasons are assigned.

Menu Path

Launch this application using the Main Menu from System Configuration > Site > Codes > Down
Maps.

Add a Down Map

Use Add a Down Map to add a down map to group down codes.

1. Press New.

2. In the Map Name field, type in the name of the new down map.

3. On the top level, there are 19 down reasons that you can select. You can extend those down
reasons by adding advanced sub-categories for each reason. The Reason 1 field is reserved
for Advanced MES use. For each down code you wish to add to the map, perform the
following:

a. Select the down code from the Reason drop-down list.

b. If you wish for the Force Down NPC option to be enabled, check the Force Down
checkbox beside the down code. When a machine operator selects a force down
reason, the machine is treated as if it is down, regardless of whether or not it is cycling.
To restart the machine, the machine operator must select the down reason In Prod. The
Force Down and Automatic Scrap options are mutually exclusive and should not both be
selected for the same down reason.

c. If you would like the down code to use an automatic scrap reason, select the scrap
reason from the Automatic Scrap drop-down list beside the down code. When the
machine operator selects an automatic scrap reason, the machine will count parts

170 October, 2024

 made, runtime, and downtime if appropriate. However, all parts made are automatically
scrapped.

The Force Down and Automatic Scrap options are mutually exclusive and
should not both be selected for the same down reason.

4. Press Save to save the new down map.

Down Map Subcategories

Use Down Map Subcategories to assign one of more down codes as sub categories to one of the
down reasons. This allows you to extend the number of selectable down reasons past the 20 allowed
on the top level.

When you create a sub-category, you are allowed to specify a category name and 10
additional downtime codes. Each sub-category must contain at least 1 down reason
and may contain as many as 10 down reasons. Each down reason uses the Force
Down and Automatic Scrap settings from the main category.

Down Map-Subcategory Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Category Name

Specifies the name of the down map subcategory.

Category Description

Specifies a more detailed description of the down map subcategory.

Sub-Reasons

Specifies the down code that belongs to the down map subcategory. When a down map is assigned
to a machine, you can select this code to categorize down time.

Add a Down Map Subcategory

Use Add a Down Map Subcategory to add additional sub-reasons to an existing downtime reason.
Sub-reason 1 is reserved for the top-level down code.

171 October, 2024

 1. Press Advanced.

2. In the Select Category to Modify field, select the down reason to which you want to assign
additional sub-reasons.

3. Press OK to open the Advanced Down Map card.

4. In the Category Name field, enter the name of the new category.

5. In the Category Description field, enter a more detailed description of the category.

6. For each down-code that you wish to add as a sub-reason, select it from one of the sub-reason
field. You can select up to 9 additional sub-reasons.

7. Press Save to save the category and return to the main down code map card.

8. On the main down code card, press Save to save your new down map.

Assign Advanced MES Scrap and Down Code Maps

Before scrap or downtime can be reported on machines in Advanced MES, you must assign Scrap
Maps and Down Code Maps to machine configurations.

Menu Path

Launch this application using the Main Menu from System Configuration > Site > Machine
Configuration.

Assigning Scrap Maps and Down Code Maps

Use the Machine Configuration application to assign scrap maps and down code maps to machine
for use when reporting downtime and scrap. For more detailed instructions on the Machine
Configuration application, refer to the Defining Advanced MES Machine Configurations section of
this document .

Perform these procedures for each machine configuration to which you want to assign scrap and
down code maps.

1. In the Machine Configuration card, the Machines list displays all defined machine
configurations. Select a machine to display configuration details for the machine.

2. Press the Code Maps card.

3. In the Scrap Code Map field, select the scrap map to assign to the machine. All scrap codes
defined for the selected scrap map are available for selection when reporting scrap.

172 October, 2024

4. In the Down Code Map field, select the down code map to assign to the machine. All down
codes defined for the selected down code map are available for selection when assigning a
reason for downtime.

5. Press Save.

173 October, 2024

Export Data from Kinetic
Kinetic Data Export process exports data such as manufactured parts and part revisions, materials,
machine and tool resources, process cards (including machine , job operations, preventative
maintenance job operations and operators from the Epicor Database to formatted Unicode ASCII
text files that can be imported into Kinetic.

When the export process runs, data exports to the Output folder defined in Site Configuration
Control.

To distinguish between imported rows in a table, the CSV files include the following record types
used by the Import process in the Epicor Advanced MES application:

l TI800 - Resources records

l PI800 - Parts in master table with valid revision

l MP800 - Materials for main part exported

l MI710 - Material ID action request

l DC813 - Indirect codes (also called Down Codes)

l DF813 - Scrap type reason codes (also called Scrap Codes)

l PP800 - Process card line, containing the Part Operations data.

l PE630 - Process card Machine Parameters (containing Engineering Workbench machine

parameters)

l PE800 - Process specific action request

l JB630 - Job description action request (Job Operations)

l JF630 - Father Job description action request

l OI860 - Shop Employee records

l SD360 - Clear Job Schedule

You can export data based on job date, operation date or the status of the prior operation.

You can select to export only data that has changed since the last export process. Kinetic uses the
Sync Required check box to track changes to the following types of data to synchronize with
Advanced MES:

174 October, 2024

 l Parts and Part Revisions

l Resources, resource group and capabilities

l Scrap type reason codes

l Indirect codes with Downtime

l Jobs and job operations

l Shop employees

If the Sync Required check box is selected for a data record, the data record is included in the
synchronization process.

You can also clear the existing job schedule on Advanced MES for selected resource groups on
resources before the new exported job schedule is loaded. You can launch the Clear External MES
Schedule process through the Resource Scheduling Board and the Multi Resource Scheduling
Board.

If you export a job containing a Co Part to Advanced MES, and there is an operation
marked as the final operation, the JF630 Co Part record is connected to that JB813
operation record marked as the final operation. If there is no operation marked as the
final operation, the JF630 record is connected to the last physical operation of the job
being sent.

If there is no selected final operation and the start date for the last physical operation is after the
selected cutoff date for the export process, the last physical operation is not included in the export
process. If there are Co Parts associated with the last physical operation, there are no JF630 Co Part
records and Co Parts do not get exported.

As an option, you can use OData Calls to export data from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES. This
export process executes API calls that write data directly to Advanced MES instead of creating CSV
files.

When the export process runs, the calls will be made to the OData URL defined in Site Configuration
Control.

In this case, the following types of data flow from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES:

l Scrap Codes

l Indirect Labor Codes marked as Downtime (Down Codes)

l Operators

l Molds

175 October, 2024

 l Parts

l Materials

l Part Materials

l Jobs

l Machines

l Machine Parameters

l Process Sets

l Schedules

Export to Advanced MES

In Kinetic, use the Export to Advanced MES Process to export Kinetic data from Kinetic to Epicor
Advanced MES.

You can either export data in CSV files to the Output folder defined in Site Configuration Control and
then import it into Advanced MES, or use OData Calls to directly write Kinetic export data to
Advanced MES.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Engineering > General Operations > Export to Advanced MES

Export to Advanced MES - Selection

Use the Selection card to select options for the Export to Advanced MES process.

Selection Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Export Option

Determines the method to use to export operations from Kinetic to Advanced MES.

l Job Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete and
have the Machine MES check box selected.

l Operation Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete,
that have the Machine MES check box selected and whose operation start date falls within the

176 October, 2024

 selection parameters.

l Operation Start Date with Prior Operation Status - Evaluates the prior operation status
before creating a Advanced MES job for an operation that has the Machine MES check box
selected. The export process differs based on the scheduling relationship between the prior
operation and the current operation.

l Finish to Start Relationship - The operation export does not create a Advanced MES
job until the prior operation is complete and the start date of the operation with the
selected Machine MES check box is within the selection range.

l Start to Start Relationship - The operation is sent when the prior operation is started.
This operation also considers the scheduling offset value on the secondary operation.

l Finish to Finish Relationship - The secondary operation creates a Advanced MES job
as soon as the primary operation job is created.

Cutoff Horizon Date

Specifies the cutoff horizon date to control which job data is sent during the export process. The
cutoff horizon date is the first operation start date for any jobs that have the Machine MES option
selected. When a job is selected, all operations that have machine MES are sent to Advanced MES
as jobs.

Once an operation has been exported and has a Advanced MES Job, further updates from Kinetic
are blocked as Advanced MES has full control of the job. Kinetic is used for planning and costing and
Advanced MES is used for production execution.

The export process sends all static data each time the process runs.

Clear Schedule

Specifies how you want to clear the existing job schedule on Advanced MES before the new
exported job schedule is loaded. To make a change to the Advanced MES job schedule from Kinetic,
you must first clear the existing schedule.

To clear job schedule information, you must select the resource groups and/or resources for which
you want to clear the job schedule in the Filter > Resource Groups and Filter > Resources cards. If
a resource group or resource is not selected, the schedule for that resource or resource group is not
cleared.

Select one of the available options:

l None - the job schedule is not cleared and standard processing occurs.

l Clear Now - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected resource
groups and resources. No other information is exported from Kinetic.

177 October, 2024

 l Clear Now and Resend - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected
resource groups and resources. Exports the job descriptors for the selected resource groups
and resources. The exported production job schedule is based on the job descriptors, the
selected Export Option and whether the Net Change check box is selected.

Execute OData Calls

Select this check box if you want to use OData calls to directly export data from Kinetic to Advanced
MES instead of generating CSV files and importing them to Advanced MES.

Export Folder

Specifies the directory path for the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced MES
application.

Export Folder...

Click this button to search for and select the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced
MES application.

Log Filename

This field specifies the file name for the log file that Kinetic creates if an error occurs during the export
process.

When an error occurs, the error log file will be created in the Export folder directory under the UserID
of the employee who starts the export process.

Log Filename...

Click this button to search for and select an existing file where the log data is being stored.

Net Change

If selected, the export process only includes part, part revision, resource, scrap reason code, indirect
labor code, shop employee, job and job operation records that have the Sync Required check box
enabled. When the Sync Required check box for a record is selected, it indicates that the record is
new or that there have been changes since the last synchronization that should be included in the
next export process. The new or changed data for the selected records is exported.

If the Sync Required check box for a record is clear, any changes to that record since
the last synchronization are not included in the export process.

OData URL

Displays the OData URL specified in Site Configuration Control that will be used to make the calls .

Recurring

178 October, 2024

Select this check box to indicate that the process should be run on a repeating basis.

Do not set the export recurrence pattern too recur too frequently or it may impact the
efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. It is recommended to have a frequency
pattern of at least 30 minutes between exports. For more information, please refer to
Data Integration Best Practices.

Schedule

Select the schedule option during which you would like the export process to run.

If Now is selected, the export process will start once you save the export process.

Site

Specifies the site for which the export process runs.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter

Use the cards under the Filter card to select the resource groups and resources should have their
existing production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group and Resource filters are
disabled.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter - Resource Groups

Use the Resource Groups card to select the resource groups that should have their existing
production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resource groups to the list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group filters are disabled.

Resource Groups Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource group. The description appears on reports or windows throughout
the system. For example:

179 October, 2024

 l Lathe Group 120

l CNC Milling Center

l Assembly Bench North

Input Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse from which the resource group pulls its material. Both warehouses
contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on this list.

If you use the Advanced Material module, you should assign input warehouses as soon
as possible. If a resource group for a job operation does not have an input warehouse,
inspection applications DMR Processing and Inspection Processing could
misintKineticret the absence of an input warehouse as a reason to assign a blank
destination warehouse. If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse,
a corresponding move queue is not created on the Material Queue.

When the Input Warehouse and In Bin are the same as the Output Warehouse and
Out Bin, and if Auto Move is checked, no automatic move request is generated, and
the Request Move check box is not selected in Data Collection Report Quantity or
End Activity. This arrangement works well for a production line, cell, or other resource
group that is in close proximity to other resource groups that also need this material.

Output Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse where material is to go once the work from this resource group needs to be
moved. Both warehouses contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on
this list.

If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse, a corresponding move
queue is not created on the Material Queue.

ProdBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

180 October, 2024

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

QProdBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

QSetupBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Resource Groups...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Resource Type

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource group to classify it for custom reporting
purposes.

If the Machine MES check box is selected and the resource group is integrated with Advanced MES,
this field indicates how the resource group integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource group contains Advanced MES machine resources. These
resources are manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resources in the group are Advanced MES tool resources. This resource is
exported to Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

If the Resource Type is M (machine) and the Machine MES check box is selected, all
resources in the resource group must have a resource type of M (machine).

181 October, 2024

ResourceGrpID

The code that uniquely identifies each resource group. For example:

l LATHES

l C-MILLS

l ASSY BENCH

SetupBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Export to Advanced MES Process - Filter - Resources

Use the Resources card to select the machine resources that should have their existing production
schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resources to the filter list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, the Resource filters are disabled.

Only resources with a resource type of Machine are available for selection.

Resources Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource. The description appears on reports or windows throughout the
application.

Location

182 October, 2024

If selected, indicate that this resource is a physical location on the shop floor. This means that an
employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource will be posted to the labor
transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

A resource cannot be flagged as a Location if the resource group is not flagged as a

Location.

ResourceID

Specifies the code that uniquely identifies each resource. For example:

l 3VM1

l ARC2

l AUX1

For machine resources, if you integrate your Kinetic with Advanced MES, Kinetic
resource ID must match the Advanced MES machine configuration ID.

ResourceType

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource to classify it for custom reporting purposes.

If the resource is integrated with Advanced MES, this field indicates how the resource
integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES machine resource. This resource is

manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES tool resource. This resource is exported to
Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

Resources...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Export Data from Kinetic

1. In the Cutoff Horizon Date field, enter the cutoff horizon start date for job data you are sending
during the export process.

183 October, 2024

 The export process sends all static data each time the process runs.

2. Select the Dynamic check box if the scheduled process should add a variable to the current
day, such as a day or a week to create a planning horizon.

3. Select the Net Change check box if only Kinetic data records with the Sync Required check
box selected should be included in the export process. The Sync Required check box
indicates the record is new or there have been changes to the record since the last
synchronization.

4. In the Export Option field, select the method to use to export job operations from Kinetic to
Advanced MES.

l Job Start Date - Includes all Machine MES enabled operations that are not complete.

l Operation Date - Includes all Machine MES enabled operations that are not complete
and whose operation start date is within the selection parameters.

l Operation Start Date with Prior Operation Status - Evaluates prior operation status
before creating a Advanced MES job for a Machine MES enabled operation. The export
process is based on the scheduling relationship between the prior and current
operation.

For more information on this field, refer to the Export to Advanced MES Process-Selection
Fields section of this document.

5. In the Clear Schedule field, select how to clear the existing job schedule on Advanced MES
before the new exported job schedule is loaded. To make a change to the Advanced MES job
schedule from Kinetic, you must first clear the existing schedule.

To clear a job schedule you must select resource groups and/or resources whose
schedules you want to clear in the Filter cards.

For more information on this field, refer to the Export to Advanced MES Process-Selection
Fields section of this document.

6. Select the Execute OData Calls check box if you want to export data to Advanced MES via
REST using OData calls instead of generating CSV files.

7. In the OData URL field, view the OData URL specified in Site Configuration that the system
will use to make the calls .

8. In the Log Filename field, enter the file name for the error log. The log file is automatically
created if an error occurs during the export process. The log is created in the Export Folder
under the user ID of the employee that started the export process.

184 October, 2024

 9. In the Schedule field, select whether you want to run the export process now or set the export
process on a schedule. If the option is Now, the export process starts when you save the
export process.

10. If the Schedule value is a future date and time, select the Recurring check box if the export
process should recur based on a schedule.

Do not set the export recurrence pattern too recur too frequently or it may impact
the efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. We recommend a frequency
pattern of at least 30 minutes between exports. For more information, please
refer to Data Integration Best Practices.

11. If you are clearing a job schedule, navigate to the Filter > Resource Groups card and select
the resource groups that should have their existing production schedules cleared in Advanced
MES. You can also click New while in this card to add new resource groups to the list.

12. If you are clearing a job schedule, navigate to the Filter > Resources card and select the
resources that should have their existing production schedules cleared in Advanced MES. You
can also click New while in this card to add new resources to the list.

The Filter cards are disabled if the Clear Schedule field has a value of None.

13. Press Save.

185 October, 2024

Import Data into Advanced MES from Kinetic
Output
Use the Data Import card to import data into Advanced MES from Kinetic.

You can import data such as Tool IDs, Part IDs, Down Codes, Scrap Codes, Process cards, Job
Descriptors, preventative maintenance jobs and operators into Advanced MES. The application
reads an appropriately formatted Unicode ASCII text file and uses the information it contains to
create or modify data.

Currently, machine resources are not part of the import process and you enter them
manually in Epicor Advanced MES. This must be done before you integrate the data.

The following data is exported from Kinetic and imported into Advanced MES:

Imported Data in Epicor

Data Exported from Kinetic
Advanced MES
Indirect Labor Codes marked as Downtime Downtime Codes
Defect Codes Scrap Codes
Resources Marked as Tools Tool IDs
Manufactured Items marked as Machine MES Part IDs
Items related to operations marked as Machine MES with a Material IDs
method of manufacture
Operations marked as Machine MES with a resource marked as Process cards
Tool and a resource marked as Machine. Part is marked at Revi-
sion level
Production Job created with operations marked as Machine Job IDs
MES.
Maintenance Job created with operations marked as Machine Job IDs marked as Non-
MES Production Job.
Kinetic job where multiple job parts are present Family Job ID. Each sep-
arate part is a com-
ponent job.
Active Shop Employees marked as Machine MES Operator IDs
Kinetic data is exported in bulk files within CSV folders.

186 October, 2024

You must export data from Kinetic before importing it into Advanced MES. Use the Export to
Advanced MES process in Kinetic to export CSV files from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced MES. Kinetic
exports in bulk (folder) rather than individual CSV files. You can schedule the export process to run
automatically or you can run it manually. To manually export Machine MES batch data in Kinetic,
click the Export Folder button to search for and select the name and directory of the file you want to
export.

For detailed information on manually exporting Machine MES data in Kinetic, please
refer to Kinetic Help and Support Panel.

You can schedule data imports run them manually. If errors occur during processing, Advanced MES
generates an error report to notify you of the errors.

Importing Data into Advanced MES via CSV Files

In Advanced MES, use Data Import/Export to import Kinetic data from the Output folder defined in
Kinetic Site Configuration Control.

You can import CSV data into Advanced MES manually or automatically based on a defined
schedule.

Data Import Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Data Import (Download)

If selected, data will be imported into the database from a Unicode formatted text file.

Source File Location

This field contains the full path to the location of the text file that is imported and the name of the
imported file.

Manually Import Data from a Text File

Use the Import Data process to import data to the database from an external ASCII text file.

1. Press the Data Import/Export icon on the main window to launch the Data Import / Export
wizard.

2. On the Welcome card of the Data Import/Export wizard, press Next.

187 October, 2024

 3. Select the Data Import option to import data into Advanced MES.

4. Press Next.

5. In the Source File Location field, enter the file path to where the import file is located and
enter the file name. Press the folder button to navigate to the input location through Windows
Explorer.

6. Press Next. A summary of your selections display. Verify that all of the information is correct.

7. Press Finish to start the Data Import process. A Results Window displays a log of the records
processed, errors and processing time. When the import is complete, a Processing
COMPLETE message appears.

8. To save the import log results, press Save Results. The log file is saved to the source
directory. It has the same file name as the import file with a .log extension.

9. Press OK to close the wizard. The data will now be imported successfully into the Advanced
MES database.

Automatically Execute Data Import

Use the Data Import/Export command line to schedule automatic data imports.

The Data Import/Export application may be executed from the command line without user
interaction. This allows you to automatically execute the Data Import/Export application and instruct
the application to perform an import to update the database with data from Kinetic.

The Data Import/Export application is typically located in the installation "bin" directory, for example
"C:\application Files\Advanced MES\ProHelp\Bin" and is named "[Link]". The Data
Import/Export application may be executed using command line parameters. This permits you to
schedule the application to run automatically via the Scheduled Tasks Wizard (Accessories ->
System Tools -> Scheduled Tasks) that is included with Microsoft Windows®.

Schedule Automatic Import

Use the Data Import command line to schedule the automatic import of data into the Advanced MES
database from Unicode ASCII text files.

1. On your Advanced MES server, go to the command line. In your Windows menu, type cmd in
the Search applications and Files field and press Enter to launch the command line window.

2. Type the import command, using this syntax: [Link] -auto -import -file:FILE_
TO_BE_IMPORTED [options], where "[Link]" is the name of the Data
Import/Export application, "-auto", "-import" and "-file:" are required and must be entered
exactly as shown, and "FILE_TO_BE_IMPORTED" should be replaced with the full path name
of the data file to be imported.

Schedule Automatic Import Command Line Syntax

188 October, 2024

Use this Automatic Import Syntax table to reference the command line syntax when scheduling
automatic execution of the Data Import/Export application.

Description Default Allowable Values

System xxx
Number
The system number (as defined by the System Names Edit
application). xxx is a number that may not be preceded by a "-" and
must be the first command line option that is specified.

This field is optional unless more than one system is defined in System
Names Edit.

Automatic -auto
execution
Indicates that the Data Import/Export application will be run using
command line arguments. Failure to specify this option will cause the
application to be run interactively.

Data Import -import -import

Indicates that the Data Import/Export application will be importing

data.

-export

Indicates that the Data Import/Export application will be exporting data.

File to be -file:"FILE_TO_BE_IMPORTED"
imported
The name of the data file to be imported. You must replace FILE_TO_
BE_IMPORTED with the full path name of the data file to be imported.

Import file -nodelete -delete

disposition
Always delete the data file.

-nodelete

Never delete the data file.

-delnoerr

Delete the data file only if no errors were encountered during

processing.

189 October, 2024

 Description Default Allowable Values
Error log- -error:ERROR_FILE_NAME
ging
The name of the error file. This value is optional. If you do not specify
an error file, the value "C:\[Link]" will be used.

Data Import Records

This section contains the record format information for the available import file.

For each data type, different information may be required or available for import. Import record
details are displayed for each data type.

Data Import File and Record Format

This section contains the suggested order of Kinetic data to be imported into the Advanced MES
database.

Each record in the ASCII file is essentially an action request and causes specific functions to occur
during processing of that record.

Import Order Default Request Code

1 Import Materials MI710
2 Create or Modify a Part ID PI800
3 Assign Materials to Part MP800
4 Create or Modify a Tool ID TI813
5 Create or Modify a Process card PP800
6 Create or Modify a Job Descriptor JB813
7 Create or Modify a Family Job Descriptor JF630
8 Create or Append to a Machine Schedule SA630
9 Create or Modify a Down Code DC813
10 Create or Modify a Scrap Code DF813
11 Import Operator IDs OI770
Import Materials

Data integration allows Kinetic items related to operations marked as Machine MES with a method of
manufacture to be integrated with Advanced MES Material IDs.

190 October, 2024

The Material ID action request record consists of the five-character request code MI1710, the name
of the Material and additional fields as defined below:

Descriptio Advanced
# Field Type Req Kinetic Source
n MES DB
1 MI710 The String Yes MI710 MI710
request
code
MI710. - 5
char
2 MatlID The mater- String Yes [Link]- [Link]
ial iden- terialID trimmed to x(22)
tifier. - 22
char
3 Type Material Intege-Yes [Link]- Empty
type. (0 = r terialID
Standard, 1
= Auxiliary)
4 MatlCost Material Float No [Link]- Depends on costing meth-
Cost terialID ods. The source is one of
the following:
l [Link]
st
l [Link]
ost
l [Link]
ost
5 TypeAux- Auxiliary String No [Link]- [Link]
iliaryUnits Units - 10 terialID
char
6 MiscInfo1 Description String No [Link]- Empty
(Com- terialID
ment) 1 -
30 char
7 MiscInfo2 Description String No [Link]- Empty
(Comment) terialID
2 - 30 char
8 MatlDesc Material String No [Link]- [Link]
Description terialID trimmed to x(20)
- 20 char

191 October, 2024

You can omit optional fields from an import Material ID request record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A material does not require miscellaneous information and the MiscInfo field is blank. The
import record's format would be M1710, MatlID, Type, MatlCost, TypeAuxiliaryUnits,,,MatlDesc. The
MiscInfo1 value is left blank and the comma remains in place in the record as a placeholder for the
field.

If an optional field is omitted and the Material ID record already exists, the field is not modified. If an
optional field is omitted and the Part ID record does not already exist, the field is set to blanks for
String type fields or 0 for Integer or Float type fields.

The Last Update field for the Material ID is automatically updated with the current date and time.
Other fields in the Material ID record are not modified.

Examples of Material ID action request records are the following:

l MI710,Mat1,0,4.5

l MI710,Mat2,1,1.3,each,red,box

l MI710,Mat3,0,7.25,,dark,green,soft

Import Part ID

Data integration allows you to integrate Kinetic manufactured items with Advanced MES Part IDs.

In Advanced MES, a manufactured item is called a part. The items used to create a part are called
materials.

The Part ID action request record consists of the five-character request code PI800, the name of the
Part Number, and additional fields.

You can omit optional fields from an import Part ID request record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A part does not require a material cost value and the MatlCost field is blank. The import
record's format would be P1800, PartID, PctReg, PartCost,, PartDesc, TearDownTime,
PcsPerCtn,,,Active,,,,. The MatlCost value is left blank and the comma remains in place in the record
as a placeholder for the field.

If an optional field is omitted and the Part ID record already exists, the field is not modified. If an
optional field is omitted and the Part ID record does not already exist, the field is set to blanks for
String type fields or 0 for Integer or Float type fields.

192 October, 2024

 During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only part data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is
included in the exported data.

Advanced MES Advanced

# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
1 PI800 The request String Yes N/A N/A
code PI800.
- 5 char
2 PartID The name of String Yes [Link] [Link]
the Part
Number - 25
char
3 PctReg Percent reg- Float No [Link] Empty
rind
4 PartCost Part cost Float No [Link] From related
PartCost
5 MatlCost Material Float No [Link] From related
Cost PartCost
6 PartDesc Part Descrip- String No [Link] [Link]
tion trun-
cated to 20
char
7 PcsPerCtn Parts per Intege-No [Link] [Link]-
case r Container
8 SetupMaterial Setup mater- Float No [Link] Empty
ial weight in
Material
Weight Units
as defined in
System Con-
figuration.
9 Mater- Material Intege-No [Link] Empty
ialColorRating color rating r

10 Active Active Flag Intege-No [Link] [Link]

(0 = inactive, r
1 = active)

193 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
11 MiscInfo1 Mis- String No [Link] Empty
cellaneous
Info1
12 MiscInfo2 Mis- String No [Link] Empty
cellaneous
Info 2
13 PartInfo Part Info String No [Link] Empty
14 PartSetupUrl Setup URL String No [Link]- Empty
Url
The Last Update field for the Part ID is automatically updated with the current date and time. Other
fields in the Part ID record are not modified.

Examples of Part ID import records:

l PI800,Part1,10.1,2,3,FOUR,1000

l PI800,Part2,4,5.6,7.8,Round,12,9.1,30,~Mat1,2.3,Mat2,4.5~

Assign Materials

Use the Assign a Material ID request to assign materials to a Part ID. This request can be used
instead of P1630 Part ID import. It allows you to import one record per material instead of multiple
materials per one part record.

The Material ID Assignment action request record consists of the five-character request code
MP800, the name of the Material, the name of the Part and additional fields as defined below:

Advanced MES
# Field Description Type Req Kinetic Source
DB
1 MP800 The request String Yes [Link] MP800
MP800. - 5
char
2 PartNo Part ID - 25 String Yes [Link] [Link]
char
3 MatlNo Material ID - Integer Yes [Link] [Link]
22 char
4 WeightPerPart Weight Per Float No [Link] [Link]
Part

194 October, 2024

If an optional field is omitted and the Material ID record already exists, the field is not modified. If an
optional field is omitted and the Material ID record does not already exist, the field is set to blanks for
String type fields or 0 for Integer or Float type fields..

Each time a Material ID is imported, it is appended to the existing material list. This can
be problematic. It is recommended that the MC770 Clear Part ID is run prior to
importing the material list.

Import Tool ID

Data integration allows you to integrate Kinetic resources with a resource type of Tool with Advanced
MES Tool IDs.

The Tool ID action request record consists of five-character request code TI813, the name of the
Tool Number, and additional fields.

You can omit optional fields from an import tool ID request record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A tool does not require setup and the SetupTime field is blank. The import record's format
would be T1813, MoldID, NumCavs,RunnerWt, MoldDesc,, TearDownTime, Active, MiscInfo1,
MiscInfo2,Maker, MoldLocationNo, PmMapNo, Url. The SetupTime value is left blank and the
comma remains in place in the record as a placeholder for the field.

If an optional field is omitted and the Tool ID record already exists, the field is not modified. If an
optional field is omitted and the Tool ID record does not already exist, the field is set to blanks if the
field is a String type or 0 is an integer or float type.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only tool resource data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized
date is included in the exported data.

Advanced MES Advanced MES

# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field DB
1 TI813 The request String Yes N/A N/A
code
(TI813)- 5
char.
2 MoldID The name of String Yes [Link] [Link]
the Tool
Number - 20
char.

195 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced MES
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field DB
3 NumCavs Total cav- Intege-No [Link] [Link]
ities for the r
tool
4 RunnerWt Runner Float No [Link] [Link]
weight spe-
cified in
grams
5 MoldDesc Tool Descrip-String No [Link] [Link]
tion - 50
char.
6 SetupTime The setup Intege-No [Link] [Link]
time for the r
tool spe-
cified in
minutes.
7 TearDownTime The tear- Intege-No [Link] [Link]-
down time r me
for the tool
specified in
minutes.
8 Active Active Flag Intege-No [Link] [Link]
(0 = inactive, r
1 = active)
9 MiscInfo1 Mis- String No [Link] Resource.MiscInfo1
cellaneous
Info 1 - 30
char.
10 MiscInfo2 Mis- String No [Link] Resource.MiscInfo2
cellaneous
Info 2 - 30
char.
11 Maker Maker - 20 String No [Link] [Link]
char.
12 MoldLoca- Location - 20 String No [Link]- [Link]
tionNo char. tions

196 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced MES
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field DB
13 PmMapNo The tool pre- Intege-No [Link] [Link]
ventative r
maintenance
map to
assign to the
tool
14 Url Setup URL - String No [Link]- [Link]
250 char. rl
The Last Update field for the Tool ID is automatically updated with the current date and time. Other
fields in the Tool ID record are not modified.

Examples of Tool ID import records:

l T1813,Tool1,3,4,My Tool,60,20,1,Info1,Info2,Company,Room1,3

l T1813,Tool2,2,3,Another Tool,15,1,Misc1,,,,2

Integration Import Process Card

Data integration allows you to integrate Kinetic operations marked as Machine MES with a resource
marked as Tool and a resource marked as Machine with Advanced MES process cards.

On Advanced MES, a process card must exist for each machine, tool and part combination used to
perform a job.

Before a process card is imported, you must manually add machine configurations to Advanced
MES through System Configuration > Site > Machine Configuration.

When you export a process card (machine/tool/part), from Kinetic the machine resource element of
the process card is located on Kinetic using the following logic:

l If a machine part operation detail with a part operation detail resource ID is located, the
resource is used.

l If a machine cannot be found through the resource, the part operation detail resource group is
used to determine if a machine resource group exists.

l If the machine cannot be found through the resource or resource group, the part operation
detail capability Machine MES setting is used to locate the machine.

When a machine is located during the export process, it creates one export line for each
tool/machine combination for the part.

197 October, 2024

 l If the machine is a resource, an export line is created for the one part/machine/tool
combination.

l If the machine is a resource group, an export line is created for each resource in the resource
group to create all available machine/tool combinations for the part.

l If the machine is a capability, an export line is created for each of the following to create all
available machine/tool combinations for the part:

l Each resource within the capability

l Each resource within a resource group in the capability

l Each resource in a defined additional capability

l Each resource within a resource group in a defined additional capability

The Process card action request record consists of the five-character request code PP800, the name
of the Machine Number, the name of the Tool Number, the name of the Part Number, and additional
fields.

You can omit optional fields from an import process card request record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A process card does not require miscellaneous information and the MiscInfo1 field is
blank. The import record's format would be PP800, MachNo, MoldNo, PartNo, ExpPctUp,
ExpCycTm, ExpGood, LaborFactor, LaborCost,,, NonProductionLimit, SetupLaborFactor,
AutoSpcEnable, AutoSpcPeriod, PartQualEnable, AutoSpcSubgroup,,,,,Url,,,. The MiscInfo1 value
is left blank and the comma remains in place in the record as a placeholder for the field.

If an optional field is omitted and the Process card record already exists, the field is not modified. If
an optional field is omitted and the Process card record does not already exist, the field is set to
blanks for String type fields or 0 for Integer or Float type fields.

Typ Re Advanced
# Advanced MES Field Description Kinetic Source
e q MES DB
1 PP800 The request Strin- Yes
code PP800 - g
5 char
2 MachNo The name of Strin- Yes [Link] [Link]-
the machine g where sourceID where
number - 6 MachNo = resource type = "M"
char MachID in
[Link]-
n

198 October, 2024

 Typ Re Advanced
# Advanced MES Field Description Kinetic Source
e q MES DB
3 MoldNo The name of Strin- Yes [Link] [Link]-
the tool num- g where sourceID where
ber - 20 char MoldNo = resource type = "T"
MoldID in
[Link]
4 PartNo The name of Strin- Yes [Link] PartRev_
the part num- g where PartNo [Link]
ber - 25 char = PartID in
[Link]
5 ExpPctUp Expected per- Float No [Link] [Link]
cent up
6 ExpCycTm Expected Float No [Link] [Link]
cycle time.
This must be
specified in
the appro-
priate native
units for the
machine
(e.g.,
seconds,
cycles,
meters).
7 ExpGood Expected per- Float No [Link] [Link]
cent good.
8 LaborFactor Labor hour Float No [Link] PartO-
factor. [Link]
9 LaborCost Labor cost Float No [Link]
10 MiscInfo1 Description 1 Strin- No [Link] [Link] +
- 30 char g "-" + PartO-
[Link]
11 MiscInfo2 Description 2 Strin- No [Link] PartOpr.MiscInfo2
- 30 char g
12 NonProductionLimit Non-pro- Float No [Link] PartO-
duction limit [Link]
specified in
seconds

199 October, 2024

 Typ Re Advanced
# Advanced MES Field Description Kinetic Source
e q MES DB
13 SetupLaborFactor Number of Float No [Link] PartO-
Setup Oper- [Link]
ators
Required
14 AutoSpcEnable Automatic Integ- No [Link] PartO-
SPC Enable er [Link]
(0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled)
15 AutoSpcPeriod Automatic Integ- No [Link] PartO-
SPC Period er [Link]
in minutes
16 PartQualEnable Part Qual- Integ- No [Link] PartO-
ification er [Link]
Enable (0 =
Disabled, 1 =
Enabled)
17 AutoSpcSubgroup Automatic Integ- No [Link] PartO-
SPC Sub- er [Link]
Group Size
18 Active Active Flag (0 Integ- No [Link] Empty
= inactive, 1 = er
active)
19 SampID Sample card. Strin- No [Link]- Empty
This value g pID.
must match
the
[Link]-
pID. - 18 char
20 IndirectLaborFactor Number of Float No [Link] Empty
indirect labor
operators
required
21 Flags Flags (0-127) Integ- No [Link] Empty
er

200 October, 2024

 Typ Re Advanced
# Advanced MES Field Description Kinetic Source
e q MES DB
22 CavityPsiTransfer The Cavity Float No [Link] Empty
PSI Transfer
value. When
the monitored
cavity pres-
sure reaches
this value, the
MIU will ignite
a digital con-
tact. This
digital contact
can be con-
nected to the
machine to
cause the
machine to
transfer from
injection pres-
sure to hold
pressure.
23 Url Setup URL - Strin- No [Link]- [Link]
250 char g Url
24 Para- Parameter Integ- No [Link] Empty
meterRe- Recording er
cordingFrequency Frequency.
Value must
be greater
than zero.

201 October, 2024

 Typ Re Advanced
# Advanced MES Field Description Kinetic Source
e q MES DB
25 CyclesToDiver- Cycles to Integ- No [Link] Empty
tAfterDowntime divert after er
downtime.
When the
machine is
coming up
out of down-
time, this
many cycles
will auto-
matically be
rejected.
Value must be
greater than
zero.
26 RejectDelayEnable Enable reject Integ- No [Link] Empty
delay feature. er
(0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled)
27 PulsesPerCycle Pulses per Integ- No [Link] Empty
Cycle. The er
number of
input pulses
to detect a
cycle. The
default is 1.
28 Special1 Special1 Float No [Link] Empty
29 Special2 Special2 Float No [Link] Empty
30 AutoScrapActiveCavities Auto scrap Integ- No [Link] Empty
active cav- er
ities. Enables
the use of act-
ive cavities
for auto
scrap. The
default is 1.
(0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled)

202 October, 2024

The Last Update field for the Process card is automatically updated with the current date and time.
Other fields in the Process card record are not modified.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Import Machine Parameters

Data integration allows you to integrate operation machine parameters with Advanced MES machine
configuration machine parameters. When you run an export to Advanced MES process, all machine
parameters defined for a unique part / machine type resource / tool type resource export to
Advanced MES.

The Machine Parameter action request record consists of five-character request code PE630, the
machine ID, tool ID and part ID and additional fields.

The Machine Parameter action request must follow a PP800 Import Process card action request. To
export PE630 Machine Parameters records for a process card, you must first export a PP800
process card record for that process card. You can then export up to 64 PE630 machine parameter
entries for the process card.

When a PP800 process card gets generated for a unique part / operation record, PE630 machine
parameters are then generated for the machine parameter records defined for that part / operation
record.

If the export process has a selected Net Change check box, only machine parameters
that have the ExternalMESSyncRequired value = true are sent.

Example: Two machine parameter records for the mach01 / Mold22 / Fastener22 process card are
exported.

PP800,"mach01","Mold22","Fastener22",100,0,0,0.00,,"CH-
2.00000000","",0,0.00,0,0,0,0,,,,,,,,,,,,0,
PE630,mach01,Tool01,MES
Part,10,120.000,100.000,10.000,0,0,,0,1,1,0,0,0
PE630,mach01,Tool01,MES Part,12,0,0,0,0,0,,1,0,0,0,0,0

You can omit optional fields from an import machine parameters request record. However, field
separators (commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of
the record.

If an optional field is omitted and the machine parameter ID record already exists, the field is not
modified. If an optional field is omitted and the Machine Parameter ID record does not already exist,
the field is set to blanks if the field is a String type or 0 is an integer or float type.

203 October, 2024

 Advanc
Advanced MES Descripti Re
# Type ed MES Kinetic Source
Field on q
DB
1 PE630 The String Yes PE630 1
request
code
PE630 - 5
char
2 MachNo Machine String Yes [Link]- PartOper-
Number - ng [Link]
6 char
3 MoldNo Tool Num- String Yes [Link]- [Link]
ber - 20 ng
char.
4 PartNo Part Num- String Yes [Link]- [Link]
ber - 25 ng
char
5 ParmNo Parameter Intege-Yes [Link]- [Link]
Number. r ng
Valid val-
ues are 0 -
63.
6 UpperLim Upper Decim-No [Link]- PartO-
Limit - the al ng [Link]
upper spe-
cification
limit for
the para-
meter
7 NomVal Nominal Decim-No [Link]- PartO-
Value - al ng prMachPara-
the target [Link]
value for
the mon-
itored pro-
cess
parameter

204 October, 2024

 Advanc
Advanced MES Descripti Re
# Type ed MES Kinetic Source
Field on q
DB
8 LowerLim Lower Decim-No [Link]- PartO-
Limit - the al ng [Link]
lower spe-
cification
limit for
the para-
meter
9 DelayVal Delay Decim-No [Link]-
Value in al ng
seconds -
the
amount of
time the
MIU
should
delay prior
to meas-
uring the
process
parameter
10 SpcEnable Spe- Intege-No [Link]- [Link]
cification r ng
Enable (0
= off, 1 =
on) - If
enabled,
statistical
process
control
sample
data is
auto-
matically
collected

205 October, 2024

 Advanc
Advanced MES Descripti Re
# Type ed MES Kinetic Source
Field on q
DB
11 SpcControlAlarm Spe- Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
cification r ng [Link]
Control
Alarm (0 =
off, 1 = on)
- If
enabled,
the spe-
cification
control
alarm is
enabled
for the
para-
meter.
12 SpcRunAlarm Spe- Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
cification r ng [Link]
Run Alarm
(0 = off, 1
= on) - If
enabled,
the SPC
alarm flag
should be
turned on
when a
run con-
dition
occurs on
this para-
meter.

206 October, 2024

 Advanc
Advanced MES Descripti Re
# Type ed MES Kinetic Source
Field on q
DB
13 Pro- Process Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
cessSpecAlarm Spe- r ng [Link]
cification
Alarm (0 =
off, 1 = on)
- If
enabled,
the pro-
cess spe-
cification
alarm is
enabled
for the
para-
meter.
14 Pro- Process Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
cessControlAlarm Control r ng [Link]
Alarm (0 =
off, 1 = on)
- If
enabled,
the pro-
cess con-
trol alarm
is enabled
for the
para-
meter.

207 October, 2024

 Advanc
Advanced MES Descripti Re
# Type ed MES Kinetic Source
Field on q
DB
15 PartQu- Part Qual- Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
alSpecEnable ification r ng prMachPara-
Spe- [Link]
cification
Enable (0
= off, 1 =
on) - If
enabled,
the part
qual-
ification
spe-
cification
feature is
enabled
for this
para-
meter.
16 PartQu- Part Qual- Intege-No [Link]- PartO-
alControlEnable ification r ng prMachPara-
Control [Link]
Enable (0
= off, 1 =
on) - If
enabled,
the part
qual-
ification
feature is
enabled
for this
parameter
The Last Update field for the Machien Parameter ID is automatically updated with the current date
and time. Other fields in the Tool ID record are not modified.

Clear a Machine Schedule

The Clear Machine Schedule action request is used to clear jobs from the machine schedule,
except for the currently running job.

208 October, 2024

The Clear Machine Schedule action request record consists of the five character request code
SD630 and the name of the Machine Number.

There are two ways that job schedules can be cleared

If the Clear Machine Schedule export to Advanced MES process is set to Clear Now
and Resend, the SD630 - Clear Job Schedule request is followed by a request to
import the job descriptors for the selected resource groups and resources. The
imported production job schedule is based on the job descriptors, the selected Export
Option and whether the Net Change check box is selected.

Advanced Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
MES Field MES DB
1 SA630 The request String Yes Advanced SD630
code SD630. MES DB
- 5 char
2 Field02 The name of String Yes Advanced [Link]
the Machine MES DB where Resource Type
Number. - 6 = "M"
char

Examples of lear machine schedule action records are the following:

l SD630,Mach1

l SD630,Mach2

Integration Import Job Descriptor

Data integration allows you to integrate Kinetic production and preventative maintenance jobs with
operations marked as Machine MES, a resource marked as Tool and a resource marked as Machine
with Advanced MES Job Descriptors.

For preventative maintenance jobs, the job must be marked as Machine MES on the job header in
Kinetic. Any job operations that should be integrated with Advanced MES should be marked as
Machine MES on the job operation in Kinetic.

The Job Descriptor action request record consists of the five-character request code JB813, the
name of the Job Number, the name of the Machine Number, the name of the Tool Number, the name
of the Part Number, and additional fields.

The Job Number that is specified must be a unique identifier for this job. Although
Advanced MES supports non-unique Job Numbers, the Data Import function requires

209 October, 2024

 unique Job Numbers.

The Job Descriptor action request may be used to create Single or Component jobs. Family jobs
should be created using the Family Job Descriptor action request JF813.

When a job containing a Co Part is exported to Advanced MES, and there is an

operation marked as the final operation, the JF630 Co Part record is connected to that
JB813 operation record marked as the final operation. If there is no operation marked
as the final operation, the JF630 record is connected to the last physical operation of
the job being sent. If there is no selected final operation and the start date for the last
physical operation is after the selected cutoff date for the export process, the last
physical operation is not included in the export process. If there are Co Parts
associated with the last physical operation, there are no JF630 Co Part records and Co
Parts do not get exported.

You can omit optional fields from an import job descriptor record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A job descriptor does not require job category information and the JobCategoryInfo field is
blank. The import record's format would be JB813, JobID, MachineID, JobCategory,, MoldNo,
PartNo, SchedStart, StartTime, SchedStop, StopTime, SchedQty,,,,,,. The JobCategoryInfo value is
left blank and the comma remains in place in the record as a placeholder for the field.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Optional fields may be omitted though the field separators (commas) are required unless they are at
the end of the record.

Advanced MES Advanced

# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
1 JB813 The request String Yes JB813
code JB813 - 5
char
2 JobID The name of the String Yes [Link]- [Link] +
production job e JobCoPartSeq +
number - 18 char JobOper-
.AssemblySeq +
[Link]

210 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
3 MachineID The name of the String Yes [Link]- [Link]-
machine number e where sourceID where
- 6 char MachNo = Resource Type = "M"
MachID in
[Link]
4 JobCategory The job category Intege- No [Link]- [Link],
l 0 =
r e "MFG" then 0 if "MNT"
Standard then 2
l 1 = Non
Production
l 2=
Preventativ
e
Maintenanc
e
l 3=
Preventativ
e
Maintenanc
e Required
5 JobCategoryInfo Additional data Intege- No [Link]- Empty
associated with r e
the job category.
For PM jobs, this
is the PM code.
6 MoldNo The name of the String For [Link]- [Link]-
tool number. non e where sourceID where
This field is PM MoldNo = Resource Type = "T"
ignored for PM jobs MoldID in
jobs. - 20 char [Link]
7 PartNo The name of the String For [Link]- [Link]
part number. non e where
This field is PM PartNo =
ignored for PM jobs PartID in
jobs. - 25 char [Link]

211 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
8 SchedStart The job's desired Date Yes [Link]- [Link]
start date. Must e
match system
date format. - 10
char
9 StartTime The job's desired Time No [Link]-
start time - 5 e
char
10 SchedStop The job's desired Date Yes [Link]- [Link]
stop date. Must e
match system
date format. - 10
char
11 StopTime The job's desired Time No [Link]- [Link] in
stop time - 5 char e hours and hundredths
12 SchedQty The lot size Intege- Yes [Link]- [Link]
r e
13 CustomerID The name of the String No [Link]- Empty
customer - 18 e
char
14 MiscInfo1 Comment 1 - 30 String No [Link]- Empty
char e
15 MiscInfo2 Comment 2 - 30 String No [Link]- Empty
char e
16 SequenceNum- Sequence num- String No [Link]- Empty
ber ber of this job e
within a work
order - 6 char
17 JobDesc Job Description - String No [Link]- None
50 char e
18 Special1 Special1 Float No [Link]- None
e
19 Special2 Special 2 Float No [Link]- None
e
20 TaktTime Takt Time Float No [Link]- None
e
Create or Modify a Family Job Descriptor

212 October, 2024

Data integration allows Kinetic production jobs that produce more than one part to be integrated with
Advanced MES Family Job Descriptors.

For Kinetic jobs to be exported, the job operations must be marked as Machine MES, a resource
must be marked as a Tool and a resource must be marked as a Machine.

The Family Job Descriptor action request record consists of the request code JF630, the name of the
Family Job Number, the name of the Tool Number (optional), and additional fields.

You can omit optional fields from an import family job descriptor record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.

Example: A family job descriptor does not require a family mold and the MoldNo field is blank. The
import record's format would be JF630, JobID,, MaxSimultaneousSonJobs, JF630_05, JF630_06,
JF630_07, JF630_08, JF630_09. The MoldNo value is left blank and the comma remains in place in
the record as a placeholder for the field.

The Family Job Number and all component Job Numbers that are specified must be
unique identifiers for these jobs. Although Advanced MES supports non-unique Job
Numbers (that is, multiple Job Descriptors with the same Job Number), the Data Import
function requires unique Job Numbers.

Descriptio Typ Re Advanced MES

# Advanced MES Field Kinetic Source
n e q DB
1 JF630 The String Yes JF630
request
code
JF630 - 5
char
2 JobID The name String Yes [Link]- [Link] +
of the Fam- JobQueue 0 + JobOper-
ily Job .AssemblySeq +
Number. - [Link]
20 char
3 MoldNo The name String No [Link]- [Link]-
of the Fam- JobQueue where sourceID where
ily Tool PartNo = PartID in Resource Type =
Number. - [Link] "T"
20 char

213 October, 2024

 Descriptio Typ Re Advanced MES
# Advanced MES Field Kinetic Source
n e q DB
4 MaxSim- The num- Integ- Yes [Link]- Count of JobPart
ultaneousSonJobs ber of act- er JobQueue Records
ive
com-
ponents to
start when
the job
runs. A
value
between 1
and 100 is
required.
5 JF630_05 The first String No First job of related
name of an JobPart
existing
"single" job
that will be
"adopted"
into this
family job. -
20 char
6 JF630_06 Next Job of String No Next job of related
related JobPart
JobPart
7 JF630_07 Next Job of String No Next job of related
related JobPart
JobPart.
The num-
bers con-
tinue to
increment
for each
part.

214 October, 2024

 Descriptio Typ Re Advanced MES
# Advanced MES Field Kinetic Source
n e q DB
8 JF630_08 Next Job of String No Next job of related
related JobPart
JobPart.
The num-
bers con-
tinue to
increment
for each
part.
et- JF630_XX Next Job of String No Next job of related
c. related JobPart
JobPart.
The num-
bers con-
tinue to
increment
for each
part.
The following describe the action that is taken for the JF630 action request:

l If the specified Family Job Descriptor doesn't exist, the job is created. If the specified Family
Job Descriptor exists, all fields are updated.

l Each existing single Job Descriptor will is adopted into the family job. At this point, the jobs
stop being single jobs and become component Jobs.

l You may then schedule the individual component jobs using an Append to Machine Schedule
SA630 request.

When a job containing a Co Part is exported to Advanced MES, and there is an

operation marked as the final operation, the JF630 Co Part record is connected to that
JB813 operation record marked as the final operation. If there is no operation marked
as the final operation, the JF630 record is connected to the last physical operation of
the job being sent. If there is no selected final operation and the start date for the last
physical operation is after the selected cutoff date for the export process, the last
physical operation is not included in the export process. If there are Co Parts
associated with the last physical operation, there are no JF630 Co Part records and Co
Parts do not get exported.

The following are examples of Family job import records:

215 October, 2024

 l JF630,FamilyJob1,Tool1,2,Component1,Component2,Component3

l JF630,FamilyJob2,,2,ComponentA,ComponentB,ComponentC

Create or Append to a Machine Schedule

The Machine Schedule action request is used to schedule a job. This record is created at the same
time as the JB813 Import Job Record.

The Machine Schedule action request record consists of the five character request code SA630, the
name of the Machine Number, and the name of the Job Number to be scheduled.

The Job Number in the action request record is appended to the end of the current
schedule. If the Job Number is already scheduled or if the job is currently running, the
action request is aborted and an error is reported.

Machine Schedule action requests may only contain jobs for which Job Descriptors already exist.
The Job Descriptor may have just been created using a previous JB630 Job Descriptor action
request.

Advanced Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
MES Field MES DB
1 SA630 The request String Yes Advanced SA630
code SA630. MES DB
- 5 char
2 Field02 The name of String Yes Advanced [Link]
the Machine MES DB where Resource Type
Number. - 6 = "M"
char
3 Field03 The name of String Yes Advanced Advanced MES Con-
the pro- MES DB cantinated JobNum
duction Job
Number. - 20
char
The Job Number that is specified must be a unique identifier for this job. Although Advanced MES
supports multiple Job Numbers with the same job number name, the Data Import function requires
unique Job Numbers.

The Job Number that is specified must be an existing single job or an existing component job. Family
jobs may not be scheduled using this action request. Rather, each component job that is a member
of the family job should be scheduled, in order, using Machine Schedule action requests.

216 October, 2024

 Examples of machine schedule action records are the following:

l SA630,Mach1,Job1

l SA630,Mach1,Job2

Import Downtime Codes

Indirect Code integration allows you to integrate Kinetic indirect codes with Downtime enabled with
Advanced MES downtime codes. All downtime reported Advanced MES using those codes will flow
back to Kinetic time and attendance.

All Kinetic indirect codes that are set as downtime codes through a Down Time checkbox are
imported into Advanced MES.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected, only
downtime codes that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included in the
exported data.

Once you import the indirect codes as Advanced MES downtime codes, you must associate them
with a down map. The down map is then assigned to a machine and you can start entering down
time information against the imported down codes.

Indirect and downtime data reported in Advanced MES is exported on a regular schedule to Kinetic
time and attendance.

The Down Code action request record consists of the five-character request code DC813, the name
of the down code and additional fields as defined below:

Advanced MES Advanced MES

# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field DB
1 ID The request String Yes N/A DC813
code DC813
- 5 char.
2 DownCode Down Code - String Yes [Link] [Link]
20 char.
3 DownDesc Description - String Yes [Link] [Link]
50 char.
4 DownColor Down Color Integer No [Link] None
5 GroupNo1 Group No 1 Integer No [Link] None
6 GroupNo2 Group No 2 Integer No [Link] None

217 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced MES
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field DB
7 VoiceEnabled Voice Integer No [Link] None
Enabled (0 =
inactive, 1 =
active)
8 VoiceFile Voice File - String No [Link] None
20 char.
9 EmailEnabled Email Integer No [Link] None
Enabled (0 =
inactive, 1 =
active)
Optional fields may be omitted though the field separators (commas) are required unless they are at
the end of the record. If an optional field is omitted and the Material ID record already exists, the field
is not modified. If an optional field is omitted and the Material ID record does not already exist, the
field is set to blanks (Alphanumeric type) or 0 (Integer or Float types).

Once down codes are imported, the code cannot change.

Import Scrap Codes

Scrap Code integration allows Kinetic defect codes to be integrated with Advanced MES scrap
codes. All scrap reported in Advanced MES using those codes will flow back to Kinetic.

All Kinetic defect codes are imported into Advanced MES. Once the defect codes are imported as
Advanced MES scrap codes, they must be associated with a scrap map. The scrap map is then
assigned to a machine and scrap information can start being entered against the imported scrap
codes.

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Scrap data reported in Advanced MES is exported on a regular schedule to Kinetic.

The Down Code action request record consists of the five-character request code DF813, the name
of the scrap code and additional fields as defined below:

218 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Advanced
# Description Type Req Kinetic Source
Field MES DB
1 DF813 The request String Yes DF813 DF813
code DF813
- 5 char
2 DefCode Defect Code String Yes [Link] [Link]
- 20 char
3 DefDesc Description - String Yes [Link] [Link]
50 char
4 GroupNo1 Group No 1 Integer No [Link] Empty
5 GroupNo2 Group No 2 Integer No [Link] Empty
6 ExcludeFromOEE Exclude from Integer No [Link] Empty
OEE
Optional fields may be omitted, however the field separators (commas) are required as placeholders
unless they are at the end of the record. If an optional field is omitted and the scrap code record
already exists, the field is not modified. If an optional field is omitted and the scrap record does not
already exist, the field is set to blanks (String type) or 0 (Integer or Float types).

The Last Update field for the scrap code is automatically updated with the current date and time.
Other fields in the scrap code record are not modified.

Once scrap codes are imported, the code cannot change.

Create or Modify an Operator ID

Use the Create or Modify and Operator ID request to add operators to the database or modify
existing operators. Data integration allows Kinetic active shop employees marked as Machine MES
to be integrated with Advanced MES Operator IDs.

All Create or Modify an Operator ID request records contain an OI770 request code, the operator
identifier plus additional fields.

Advanced MES Descriptio Typ Re Advanced

# Kinetic Source
Field n e q MES DB
1 ID The String Yes OI770 OI770
request
code
OI770. - 5
char

219 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Descriptio Typ Re Advanced
# Kinetic Source
Field n e q MES DB
2 OperNo The oper- String Yes [Link]- [Link]
ator iden- atorID
tifier. - 18
char
3 Password Password - String No [Link]- Empty
18 char atorID
4 Description Employee String No [Link]- [Link]
Name - 35 atorID
char
5 WorkLocation Work Loca- String No [Link]- Empty
tion - 35 atorID
char
6 Active Active Flag Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
(0 = inact- er atorID
ive, 1 = act-
ive)
7 PermitScrap Scrap Per- Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
mission (0 er atorID
= off, 1 =
on)
8 PermitDown Down Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
Reason er atorID
Permission
(0 = off, 1 =
on)
9 PermitHelp Help Per- Integ- No [Link]-
mission (0 er atorID
= off, 1 =
on)
10 PermitJobControl Job Con- Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
trol Per- er atorID
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
11 Per- Next Job Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
mitJobNextControl Control Per-er atorID mitNextJobControl
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)

220 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Descriptio Typ Re Advanced
# Kinetic Source
Field n e q MES DB
12 PermitManualSQC Manual Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
SQC Per- er atorID
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
13 Per- Variable Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
mitVariableSQC SQC Per- er atorID mitVariableSqc
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
14 Per- Attribute Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
mitAttributeSQC SQC Per- er atorID mitAttributeSqc
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
15 PermitMaterialLot Material Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
Lot Per- er atorID
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
16 Per- Setup Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
mitSetupMaterial Material er atorID mitSetupMaterial
Permission
(0 = off, 1 =
on)
17 PermitCavities Active Cav- Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
ities Per- er atorID
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
18 Per- Percent Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
mitPercentRegrind Regrind er atorID mitPercentRegrind
Permission
(0 = off, 1 =
on)

221 October, 2024

 Advanced MES Descriptio Typ Re Advanced
# Kinetic Source
Field n e q MES DB
19 PermitSaveProfile Save Pro- Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
file Per- er atorID mitSaveProfile
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
20 PermitCalibration Analog Cal-Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
ibration er atorID
Permission
(0 = off, 1 =
on)
21 PermitMachinePM Machine Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
PM Per- er atorID mitMachinePm
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
22 PermitToolPM Tool PM Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
Permission er atorID
(0 = off, 1 =
on)
23 PermitLanguage Language Integ- No [Link]- [Link]
Select Per- er atorID
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)
24 PermitPreferences Prefer- Integ- No [Link]- [Link]-
ences Per- er atorID mitPreferences
mission (0
= off, 1 =
on)

During the Export to Advanced MES process, if the Net Change check box is selected,
only data that has been added or changed since the last synchronized date is included
in the exported data.

Optional fields may be omitted though the field separators (commas) are required unless they are at
the end of the record. If an optional field is omitted and the Operator ID record already exists, the
field is not modified. If an optional field is omitted and the Operator ID record does not already exist,
the field is set to blanks (String type) or 0 (Integer or Float types). The password is an exception. If
omitted and the Operator ID record does not exist, it is set to an unusable value. If the MIU Security

222 October, 2024

option is present, a password must then be established through System Configuration before the
operator can log in.

The "Last Update" field for the Operator ID will be automatically updated with the current date and
time. Other fields in the Operator ID record will not be modified.

An example of a Create or Modify Operator ID action request record is the following:

l OI770,Opey,123abc,short,basement,1,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0,1,0

Importing Data into Advanced MES via REST

To import Kinetic data to Advanced MES via REST, you need to configure a plant to correspond to
Kinetic site you are integrating with the system and then configure Advanced MES to receive data
from Kinetic through a web API channel.

Set Up System Configuration String

Use these steps to define the values for the system configuration string to use for REST integration.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > SysConString.

2. In the left pane, select Data integration server (needed for some features Kinetic Rest
Export) and click Edit.

223 October, 2024

 3. Select Value and enter the OData URL you specified for connecting to Advanced MES in
Kinetic Site Configuration. Click Save.

4. In the left pane, select Kinetic Company Name (part 1) and click Edit.

5. Select the Value option and click Save.

6. In the left pane, select Kinetic Company Name (part 2) and click Edit.

7. Select the Value option and click Save.

8. In the left pane, select Kinetic partner server (needed for some features, i.e. Kinetic/HMI
Single Sign On) and click Edit.

9. Select Value and enter your Epicor Kinetic server URL. You can find it in Kinetic
Administration Console > Server Management > [server] > [application server] > URL field. It
may look similar to the following: https:\\<server name>\<application name>. Click Save.

10. In the left pane, select Username Credential to access Kinetic Partner and click Edit.

11. Select Value and enter the login of you Kinetic System Agent User to access the application
data from Advanced MES. Click Save.

12. In the left pane, select Password Credential to access Kinetic Partner and click Edit.

13. Select Encrypted Password and click Set Password.

14. Enter confirm the password of you Kinetic System Agent User and click OK. Then click Save.

15. On the server where Advanced MES is installed, search for Services and open the
application. Locate the Advanced MES MCP Service.

224 October, 2024

16. Stop the Advanced MES MCP Service and then start it again.

17. If you connect to Kinetic through the https protocol, you also need to define how https
certificates should be handled in Advanced MES. Select Launch System Configuration and
go to Site > SysCon.

18. In the left pane, select HTTPS site certificate handling and click Edit.

19. Click the Select Value option and choose one of the following values: Click Save.

l certificates are validated - use this value if your Kinetic application server is deployed
with an SSL certificate provided by a trusted issuer.

l untrusted certificate are accepted - use this value if you Kinetic application server is
deployed with a self-signed SSL certificate.

Epicor does NOT recommend to use self-signed certificates on appservers with

the production database as they don't assure high security.

225 October, 2024

 Click Save.

Configure Epicor Web API Channel

Use these steps to create an API Channel for integration with Kinetic.

226 October, 2024

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > Channel.

2. Select New.

3. Enter a unique Number to identify the channel.

4. Provide a Description for the channel.

5. From the Type drop-down, select Epicor Web Services API.

6. In the Computer field, enter your Epicor Server Name.

7. In the Setup String field, enter 9090.

8. Select Save.

227 October, 2024

Using the Advanced MES Job Scheduler
Use the Advanced MES Job schedule to view and update the production schedule for production
and maintenance jobs imported into Advanced MES. Changes made to jobs in the Job Schedule are
communicated back to Kinetic.

Once you have successfully imported Kinetic jobs into Advanced MES and assigned them to a
machine schedule, you can display the job schedule for those jobs in the Job scheduler. The Job
Scheduler is an interactive graphical representation that allows you to view and schedule jobs
performed on the shop floor.

In the Advanced MES Job Schedule module, you can move jobs to a different date and time, move
them to a different machine or delete them as needed. When you export the job labor data, the job
changes are communicated back to Kinetic.

Changes in actual cycle times, downtime, scrap, etc. can extend the amount of time it will take for a
job to run and are reflected in real-time. Jobs are color coded based on whether they will finish on
time or will be late.

The Job Schedule represents a real-time snapshot of your plant. When you start the Job Scheduler,
data for running jobs is collected and is not updated in real-time.

Copying and creating new jobs directly on Advanced MES is not supported by Kinetic.

For full documentation on all the features and functions in the Advanced MES Job Scheduler
module, please refer to the Advanced MES Job Scheduler module documentation.

Menu Path

Launch this application from the Main Menu by pressing the Job Scheduler icon.

Select Machines to Include in Job Schedule

Use the Select Machines card to select the machines to include in the job schedule. This can be
done by machine or by department. The Select Machines card includes all available machines and
departments. By moving machines from the Available list to the Selected list, you are including them
in the Job Scheduler. When you move a department from the Available list to the Selected list, all
machines that belong to that department are included in the Job Scheduler.

1. In the Available list, select the machine or machines you wish to include in the schedule and
press the right arrow to move them to the Selected list. You can also select to include all
machines by pressing All >>.

228 October, 2024

 2. If you wish to include all machines in a selected department, select the department in the
Departments list and press the right arrow to move the department to the Departments list.
The machines that belong to the department will appear in the Selected list.

3. To remove machines or departments from the Selected lists, select them and press the left
arrow. To remove all entries from the list, press << All.

4. Press OK. The Select Machines card closes and the Job Schedule with the selected machines
is displayed.

Job Scheduler
The Job Scheduler application displays the current production schedule for all included machines.
Each machine displays all running and queued jobs, up to years in advance.

All included machines appear in a column on the left side of the Job Schedule. A timescale
displaying dates and times appears at the top of the card. For each machine, all running and pending
jobs assigned to that machine appear to the right of the machine, each represented as a color coded
bar. The start and end position of each bar in the time scale corresponds to the start and end dates
and times for the job.

Different types of jobs appear in the Job Schedule:

l A single job is any job that produces one distinct part and that is not related to any other job.
Single jobs can have multiple cavities. A single job can be adopted into a family job. When this
is done, the single job becomes a component job within a family.

l A family job is a collection of one or more related jobs that are scheduled as a single unit. A
family job can produce multiple distinct parts simultaneously. The family job is the bar that is
displayed in the job schedule.

l A component job is one of the individual jobs within the family. Each component job represents
one distinct part that is created when a you run a family job Most data that is collected for a
family job is stored to the component job, not the overarching family job. A component job can
be orphaned from a family job. When this is done, the component job becomes a single job.

l A non-production job is a job that is scheduled on the machine and requires time to perform
but that does not produce parts. An example of a non-production job is a preventative
maintenance job on a machine.

Each job is color coded in the following way:

l Green - Jobs that will finish by the planned end time.

l Red - Jobs that will be completed after the planned end date.

l Blue - Non-production jobs

229 October, 2024

Both single and family jobs can appear in the Job Scheduler.

After you save your changes in Job Scheduler, if a machine is set up for export to Kinetic, the Queue
ERP Export window opens and you can select whether to put this machine in queue for export or
not. For more information on the machine export to Kinetic, refer to the Machine E10 Export help
articles of this guide.

Do not create, copy or delete jobs within Advanced MES. All jobs should be created,
copied or deleted in Kinetic.

About Family Production

Family Production is a powerful optional feature in Advanced MES that allows you to monitor
production and process information for distinctly different jobs (parts) that are running on the same
machine at the same time.

The following offers a brief description of Family production features:

l Each family job is made up of one or more component jobs. Each family job can have up to
1,000 total component jobs. Of those, up to 100 component jobs can be running
simultaneously on a single machine.

l The family is scheduled as a unit but production and process history is stored to each
component job individually.

l The family has a forecasted end date in the Job Schedule and the system will also forecast the
end date for each individual component job.

l Most MIUs allow you to enter scrap parts and packed parts for each individual component job
and/or for the entire family.

l You can have different process limits (specification and control limits) depending on which
combination of component jobs is currently running.

l Advanced MES's unique Gantt-in-Gantt Job Schedule allows you to double-click on the family
job to see a Gantt chart for the individual component jobs in that family job. You can then drag
and drop the individual component jobs in order to schedule them in a manner that will allow
each component job to finish on-time.

Family Production Applications

Family production can be used in a variety of ways, including the following:

l Left/Right and Front/Rear Parts - For example, you may be making one front bumper and one
rear bumper every machine cycle. Although the parts are related, you can make different
quantities of each or need to track statistical process control, scrap, and other data
individually. With Family Production, each part is its own component job with its own SPC

230 October, 2024

 history, scrap parts, lot size and forecasted end date.

l Color Changes for the Same Part - For example, you may plan to make 50,000 black pen
casings, 30,000 grey pen casings, and 20,000 red pen casings. All are made with the same
tool and on the same machine. With Family production, each color can be its own component
job. The jobs are scheduled as a unit (that is, as a family), but each component job has its own
lot size, forecasted end date, production history, and process history. The Job Scheduler
accurately forecasts when each component job will end and when the next component job will
start.

l Multiple Releases of a Part - For example, your customer has ordered 200,000 parts, but
wants 50,000 parts delivered May 1st, 50,000 parts delivered June 1st and 100,00 parts
delivered August 1st. With Family Production, each delivery can be considered its own
component job. As such, each component job has its own lot size and desired end date. The
jobs are scheduled as one unit (that is, as a family), but each component job has its own lot
size and forecasted end date. If desired, you can also give each component job the same Job
Number and still track the component jobs individually.

l Unrelated Parts made with the Same Base Mold - For example, you have 10 different part-
specific insert molds that can be placed into the same base mold in different combinations.
Each part's mold can have a different number of cavities, and you have the need to track
Preventive Maintenance for the base mold and/or the individual molds that can be inserted
into the base mold. As an example, today you might be making 3 key chains and 5 luggage
tags with each machine cycle, but this evening you will be making 3 key chains and 2 plastic
toys with each machine cycle. With family production, each part (insert mold) is its own unique
component job. You can control the number of component jobs that are running
simultaneously (up to 100 per machine) and the total number of component jobs in the family
(up to 1,000 per family). Advanced MES individually forecasts when each component job
starts/ends and you can easily rearrange the order in which component jobs will run using
Advanced MES's unique Gantt-In-Gantt Schedule. Production and process history for each
component job is maintained separately for easy retrieval.

Job Scheduler Functions

In the Job Scheduler window, you can perform different functions to change or move job data.

The following functions can be performed:

l Zooming in and out on the schedule calendar.

l Finding a job in the schedule

l Displaying details for a job.

l Viewing scheduled jobs.

l Viewing unscheduled jobs

231 October, 2024

 l Displaying and scheduling component jobs in a family job.

l Moving a job to a different place in the job queue or to a different machine.

l Changing the identifying text that appears in each job bar.

l Viewing job schedule tool conflicts

l View resources for a job

l Locate machines on which a job can be run

l Override accidentally suspended or ended jobs

Using the Timescale Bar

The timescale bar at the top of the schedule window displays the date and time scale for the
schedule calendar.

There are two elements to the timescale bar:

l The major timescale - the major unit of time being measured. This element appears at the top
of the Timescale bar.

l The minor timescale - the minor unit of time being measured. There are a set number of minor
timescale units per major timescale unit i.e. 24 hours in a day, 7 days in a week. This element
appears at the bottom of the Timescale bar.

You can set defaults for the timescale in the options for the Job schedule but you can use the
Timescale bar to temporarily change timescales to view the jobs in a different way. For example, you
may typically view the different days in a week but may want to display job timing for the hours in a
specific day or view the days for a month. Using the timescale bar, you can view job timing in several
different ways.

There are two ways to temporarily change the timescale:

l You can quickly zoom in on the timescale bar to get a closer look at jobs in the scheduler.

l You can set a custom view for the timescale.

Temporarily Changing the Timescale

1. To zoom in and out on the timescale for job scheduler jobs, perform the following steps:

a. Press the Zoom In icon on the quick launch bar to zoom in on the Timescale. You can
repeat this as many times as required.

232 October, 2024

 b. Press the Zoom Out icon on the quick launch bar to zoom out on the Timescale. You can
repeat this as many times as required.

2. To perform a temporary custom change to the timescale, perform the following steps:

a. Right-click anywhere on the schedule's timescale to open a Timescale context menu.

b. For changes to the major timescale, press Major Units and select one of the available
time units of measure.

c. For changes to the minor timescale, press Minor Units and selected one of the available
time units of measure.

Job Scheduler-Finding a Job

Use the Find a Job tool to quickly locate jobs using different types of search criteria.

The Find a Job tool allows you to locate a job based on several different types of criteria, such as the
job number, part number or tool number.

For example, you can search for all jobs that produce a selected part or that are produced using a
selected tool.

The Job Schedule search function searches the Job Schedule one job at a time.

Menu Path

From the Job Scheduler application, press Tools > Find.

You also can launch the Find a Job tool by pressing the Find icon on the toolbar.

Finding a Job Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Direction

Specifies whether to search up or down the schedule.

Resource ID

Specifies the data used to search for all jobs that contain that data. The available options in this field
are based on the selected Resource Type.

Resource Type

233 October, 2024

Specifies the type of data that is used to populate the Resource ID field. Data of the selected type is
available for selection in the Resource ID field.

How to Find a Job

1. In the Resource Type field, select the type of data for which you want to search. This
populates the Resource ID list with all data that has the selected type.

2. In the Resource ID field, select the data for which you want to search.

3. In the Direction field, select whether to search up or down the job schedule list.

4. Press Find Next to start the search. The Job Schedule search function searches the Job
Schedule one job at a time. All jobs appear in gray and the first job that meets the search
criteria appears highlighted in yellow.

5. Click the Find Next button again to find the next job that meets the search criteria. You can
repeat this for all jobs in the list.

6. When you have finished using the Find a Job tool, press Cancel to close the tool.

Job Scheduler-Job Details

Use the Job Details card to display details for a job by double-clicking on a job in the schedule. The
Job Descriptor opens where you can view additional information for the job such as the materials
used and to go, the forecasted start and end dates, parts and hours to go and the current status of
the job.

You can update data such as the part, tool, lot size and desired end date.

Job Details Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Actual End

Displays the actual end date and time for the job, based on its position in the job schedule, the
calculated cycle time and the remaining part quantity.

Actual Start

Displays the actual start date and time for the job, based on its position in the job schedule.

Comments 1-2

Specify additional notes about the job in these fields.

234 October, 2024

Customer

Specifies the customer associated with the production job.

Desired End

Displays the desired date and time for the next job to end.

Desired Start

Displays the desired date and time for the next job to start.

Forecasted End

Displays the anticipated end date of the job. This value is calculated based on machine availability,
the cycle time for the job and the lot size of the part.

Forecasted Start

Displays the anticipated start date of the job. This value is calculated based on machine availability,
the cycle time for the job and the lot size of the part.

Hours to Go

Displays the number hours required for the machine to perform the remaining production required to
complete the job. This value is calculated using Total Production to Go and the job's average cycle
time (taking the Cycle Time Predictor Limit into account).

Job Number

Specifies the unique identifier for the job.

Lot Size (Cases)

Displays the standard lot size for the part in cases.

Lot Size (Parts)

Displays the standard lot size for the part.

Machine Number

Displays the unique identification number for the machine running the job. This field is display only.

Non-Production Job

Specifies if the job is a job activity being performed on the machine that does not directly result in
production. An example of a non-production job would be a preventative maintenance activity.

Part Number

235 October, 2024

Specifies the part produced by the production job.

Parts Per Cases

Displays the standard number of parts per case for the part.

Parts to Go

Displays the remaining quantity of parts that must be produced to complete the job. This value is
calculated by subtracting the good quantity from the quantity in the Lot Size (Parts) field.

Setup Time

Displays the setup time defined for the tool.

Status

Displays the current production status of the job.

Tear-Down Time

Displays the tear-down time required for the tool after the job is complete.

Tool Number

Specifies the tool used in the job to produce the part.

Using the Job Details Window

Use the Job Details window to display detailed information for the selected job. You can also update
the date and time you want the job to end and the lot size for parts or cases.

1. Double-click a job in the schedule to open the Job Details card.

2. In the Desired End field, you can update the date and time that you wish for the job to be
completed.

3. In the Lot Size (Parts) field, you can update the number of parts per lot. Updating this field
automatically updates the Lot Size (Cases) field based on the Lot Size (Parts) value and the
Parts per Cases quantity defined for the part.

4. In the Lot Size (Cases) field, you can update the number of cases per lot. Updating this field
automatically updates the Lot Size (Parts) field based on the Lot Size (Cases) value and the
Parts per Cases quantity defined for the part.

5. If the job should be a non-production job, select the Non-Production Job check box.

6. If the job is not currently running, you can press Where to Run? to launch the Where to Run

236 October, 2024

 utility to locate and select a machine to run the job. For more information, refer to the Where to
Run Tool documentation. The tool is not available if the job is currently running.

Job Scheduler-Scheduled Jobs Tool

Use the Scheduled Jobs list to view all of the jobs scheduled for one specific machine or for all
machines.

Menu Path

Launch Scheduled Jobs from the Job Scheduler application, by pressing Tools > Scheduled Jobs.

You also can launch the Scheduled Jobs tool by pressing the Scheduled Jobs icon on the toolbar.

Scheduled Jobs Tool Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Customer

Displays the customer associated with the job.

Desired End

Displays the desired date and time for the job to end.

Desired Start

Displays the desired date and time for the job to start.

Forecasted End

Displays the job's forecasted end date, based on the machine's current job schedule and the job's
production cycle settings and lot size.

Forecasted Start

Displays the job's forecasted start date, based on the machine's current job schedule.

Hours To Go

Displays the number of hours required for the machine to perform the production required to
complete the job. This value is calculated using Total Production to Go and the job's average cycle
time (taking the "Cycle Time Predictor Limit" into account)

Hours to Go

237 October, 2024

Displays the number of hours required for the machine to perform the remaining production required
to complete the job.

This value is calculated using Total Production to Go and the job's average cycle time (taking the
Cycle Time Predictor Limit into account).

Job Number

Displays the job number for the job scheduled on the machine.

Part Number

Displays the part number for the job scheduled on the machine.

Parts to Go

Displays the number of parts that must be produced to complete the job.

Primary Material (Color Rating)

Displays the color rating of the primary material specified for the job, with 0 as the lightest value.

Prod To Go

Displays the quantity of good parts that must be produced to complete the production job

Seq

Displays the job's sequence in the machine schedule.

Status

Displays the current status of the job. The job will have one of the following statuses:

l PEND - The job is currently pending and in the queue to be run on the machine

l RUN - The job is currently running on the machine

l SUSP - The job has been suspended and is not currently running on the machine

Tool Description

Displays the description of the tool for the job scheduled on the machine.

Tool Number

Displays the tool number for the job scheduled on the machine.

Using the Scheduled Jobs Tool

238 October, 2024

The Scheduled Jobs list displays detailed information about all of the jobs currently on the job
schedule.

1. By default, the list displays scheduled jobs for all machines but you can filter the list to display
only jobs for a specific machine by selecting the machine from the Machine Number drop-
down list.

2. Component jobs appear in the Schedule Jobs list, but family jobs do not. If you highlight a
component job in the Scheduled Jobs list, all related component jobs are highlighted
automatically.

3. To move a job up or down in a machine's schedule, select it in the list and press the one of the
following buttons on the top-right side of the window to move the job:

a. Press the Up arrow with the line above it to move the job to the first place in the machine
schedule.

b. Press the Up arrow to move the job up one position in the machine schedule.

c. Press the Down arrow to move the job down one position in the machine schedule.

d. Press the Down arrow with the line under it to move the job to the last place in the
machine schedule.

4. You can change the default columns in the Scheduled Jobs list to display different types of job
data . You can also insert or hide a column in the list.

a. To change a column that appears in the list, right-click the column header and select the
type of data from the menu. The current column is replaced with the selected column.

b. To insert a column before an existing column, right-click a column header and select
Insert Column Before. The list will display the selected column before the selected
column in the list

c. To insert a column after an existing column, right-click a column header and select
Insert Column After. The list will display the selected column after the selected column
in the list.

d. To hide a column, right-click a column header and select Hide Column.

5. To move a scheduled job from one machine to another, perform the following:

a. Right-click the job in the list. A context menu will appear listing all of your machines,
grouped in your machine categories.

b. Machines included in process cards for the machine/part/tool combination will have a
checkmark beside them. Select the machine to which you want to move the job. The job
moves to the selected machine's schedule.

239 October, 2024

 6. To remove a job from the schedule and place it in the Unscheduled Jobs list, simply highlight
the job and press Unschedule. You can select multiple jobs by holding down the CTRL key
while you use the mouse to click on each job.

7. Click OK to close the card.

Scheduled Jobs Functions

On the Scheduled Jobs list, you can view or edit details for a job, find a job or permanently delete it.

l To view or edit details for a job, double-click the job in the list. This opens the Job Descriptor
card for the job.

l To locate a specific job in the Scheduled Jobs list, press Find. In the Find window, enter the
search data in the Find What: field and select the list column where you want to search for the
data. You can also select to match the whole word only or match the case. Press Find Next.
Repeat these steps for each additional instance of the data you wish to find.

If you have changed a machine's schedule, the dates for the machine appear light in
color until the changes are saved.

Do not delete jobs in Advanced MES. Jobs must be deleted in Kinetic.

Job Scheduler-Unscheduled Jobs Tool

Use the Unscheduled Jobs list to display all active jobs that are currently unscheduled and are
available to be placed in the job schedule.

Jobs with a status of Pending or Suspended that are not currently scheduled are displayed in the
Unscheduled Jobs list. Jobs with a status of Complete are not displayed.

Family jobs appear in the Unscheduled Jobs list but component jobs do not. If you schedule a family
job via the Unscheduled Jobs list, all related component jobs that are available are automatically
scheduled by the system.

Jobs in the Unscheduled Jobs list are not scheduled, but they do have a machine
number that is associated with the job. All jobs must have a machine number, part
number and tool number.

Menu Path

Launch Unscheduled Jobs from the Job Scheduler application by pressing Tools > Unscheduled
Jobs.

You also can launch the Unscheduled Jobs tool by pressing the Unscheduled Jobs icon on the
toolbar.

240 October, 2024

Unscheduled Jobs Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Customer

Displays the customer associated with the job.

Date Column

Displays different date information for the job. Right-clicking the column header launches a selector
where you can display the desired start and end dates for the job run or the start and end dates as
forecasted by the system based on the available data.

You can either display desired start and end dates or forecasted start and end dates.

Desired End

Displays the desired date and time for the job to end.

Desired Start

Displays the desired date and time for the job to start.

Forecasted End

Displays the job's forecasted end date, based on the machine's current job schedule and the job's
production cycle settings and lot size.

Forecasted Start

Displays the job's forecasted start date, based on the machine's current job schedule.

Hours To Go

Displays the number of hours required for the machine to perform the production required to
complete the job. This value is calculated using Total Production to Go and the job's average cycle
time (taking the "Cycle Time Predictor Limit" into account)

Hours to Go

Displays the number of hours required for the machine to perform the remaining production required
to complete the job.

This value is calculated using Total Production to Go and the job's average cycle time (taking the
Cycle Time Predictor Limit into account).

Job Number

241 October, 2024

Displays the job number for the unscheduled job.

Lot Size

The quantity of parts being produced in the part

Machine

Displays the machine that the job is configured to run on based on the defined process card for the
part.

Part Number

Displays the part that the job produces.

Parts to Go

Displays the number of parts that must be produced to complete the job.

Primary Material (Color Rating)

Displays the color rating of the primary material specified for the job, with 0 as the lightest value.

Prod To Go

Displays the quantity of good parts that must be produced to complete the production job

Seq

Displays the job's sequence in the machine schedule.

Status

Displays the current status of the job. The job will have one of the following statuses:

l PEND - The job is currently pending and in the queue to be run on the machine

l RUN - The job is currently running on the machine

l SUSP - The job has been suspended and is not currently running on the machine

Tool Description

Displays the description of the tool for the job.

Tool Number

Displays the tool number for the job.

Using the Unscheduled Jobs Tool

242 October, 2024

The Unscheduled Jobs list will display detailed information about all of the active jobs that exist but
that are not scheduled. Pending or suspended jobs that are not currently scheduled will be displayed
in the list.

1. By default, the list displays unscheduled jobs for all machines but you can filter the list to
display only jobs for a specific machine by selecting the machine from the Machine Number
drop-down list.

2. Family jobs appear in the Unscheduled Jobs list but component jobs do not. If you schedule a
family job via the Unscheduled Jobs list, all related component jobs that are available will be
automatically scheduled by the system.

3. You can change the default columns in the Unscheduled Jobs list to display different types of
job data . You can also insert or hide a column in the list.

a. To change a column that appears in the list, right-click the column header and select the
type of data from the menu. The current column is replaced with the selected column.

b. To insert a column before an existing column, right-click a column header and select
Insert Column Before. The list will display the selected column before the selected
column in the list

c. To insert a column after an existing column, right-click a column header and select
Insert Column After. The list will display the selected column after the selected column
in the list.

d. To hide a column, right-click a column header and select Hide Column.

4. To schedule a job from the Unscheduled Jobs list, select the job and press Schedule. You can
select multiple jobs by holding down the CTRL key while you select each job. You can only re-
schedule and re-run a suspended job can on the same machine on which the job initially ran.

5. Press OK.

Unscheduled Jobs Functions

On the Unscheduled Jobs list, you can view or edit details for a job, find a job, search for a resource
to produce it or permanently delete it.

l To view or edit details for a job, double-click the job in the list. This will open the Job Descriptor
window for the job.

l To locate the best machine to run the job, press Where to Run? to access the Where to Run
utility. Select the machine where you wish to run the job and press OK.

l To locate a specific job in the Unscheduled Jobs list, press Find.

243 October, 2024

 l In the Find window, enter the search data in the Find What: field and select the list
column where you want to search for the data. You can also select to match the whole
word only or match the case.

l Press Find Next.

l Repeat these steps for each additional instance of the data you wish to find.

Do not delete jobs in Advanced MES. Jobs must be deleted in Kinetic.

Gantt-In-Gantt Family Job Scheduling

Use Gantt-In-Gantt Family Job Scheduling to display a chart for individual jobs within the family job.
You can then drag and drop the individual component jobs in order to schedule them in a way that
allows each component job to finish on time.

When you schedule a family job, the component jobs are automatically scheduled based on the data
in the Job Descriptor for the family job. Scheduling changes for the component jobs can be made
within the Gantt-In-Gantt schedule.

Regardless of the Schedule Method you use (Gaps, No Gaps, or Smart Gaps), the
component jobs in a family job are scheduled using the No Gaps method. This is due to
the nature of a family job where it is expected that when one component job ends, the
next component job starts.

Family jobs are an optional Advanced MES feature.

Using Gantt-In-Gantt Family Job Scheduling

The Gantt-In-Gantt list displays all component jobs that belong to a family, with the appropriate color
coding. If any component job in a family job is colored red, the family job's bar is colored red. Any
changes to the schedule appear as faded until the changes are applied.

1. To view the Gantt-In-Gantt Job Schedule for a family job, double-click the family job in the
schedule.

2. In the Job Descriptor window for the family job, press the Schedule card.

3. All component jobs are displayed in the Gantt-In-Gantt Job Schedule with their appropriate
color-coding. You can drag and drop the individual component jobs in order to re-arrange their
order within the family job.

4. You can also adjust the order in which the component jobs will be run on the Family card by
moving the component jobs up or down in the list.

244 October, 2024

 5. To zoom in closer on the schedule for the component jobs, press Zoom In. To zoom out on the
schedule, press Zoom Out.

6. Press Apply to apply any changes made to the component jobs.

7. When you have finished using the Gantt-In-Gantt chart, click OK.

Moving Jobs
In the Job Scheduling card, you can move a job to a different place in the machine queue or to a
different machine.

When you select a job in the schedule, all machines that have a valid process card for that job are
highlighted in white. This allows you to quickly determine which machines are capable of running the
job and which ones are not. This highlighting can be disabled in the Job Schedule options.

There are two ways to move jobs. You can either drag and drop the job or you can select a new
machine through a context menu.

Moving a Job in the Job Schedule

1. Select the job you wish to move.

2. Move your mouse over the job you want to move until a four directional arrow appears.

3. When the arrow appears, click and hold the left button on your mouse and drag the job to
where you want to place it. When the job is being moved, it appears as a rectangle. The
estimated start and end dates appear beside the job being moved based on the new position
of the job.

4. When the job is in place, release your mouse button and the job will move successfully. If a
particular machine does not have a Process card defined that would permit that job to run on
the machine, an error is displayed and you will be prevented from moving the job to that
machine.

Change Bar Label Text

Use the Bar Labels option to change the text that appears in the bar for each job. The options are
Job Number or Description, Part Number or Description, Tool Number or Description, Customer,
Primary Materials, Desired Start or End Date, Forecasted Start or End Date, Status or Duration.

1. Right-click your mouse in a white space on the Job Schedule card to launch a context menu.

2. Press Bar Labels.

3. Select the text type that you would like to display on each job bar on the Job Schedule.

Job Scheduler-Tool Conflicts

245 October, 2024

Use the View Tool Conflicts tool to identify potential problems with the schedule as a result of
assigning a tool to run on more than one machine simultaneously. You can automatically highlight
and resolve tool scheduling conflicts from within the Job Schedule. In the View Tool Conflicts tool,
you can easily see which tools conflict and the length of the conflict.

When the Tool Conflicts tool is run, all conflicts appear highlighted in yellow. The Tool Conflicts tool
displays details for each conflict one at a time.

Menu Path

Launch the Tool Conflicts tool from the Job Scheduler application by pressing Tools > Tool Conflicts.

You also can launch the Tool Conflicts Locator by pressing the Tool Conflicts icon on the toolbar.

Tool Conflict Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Duration

Displays the length of the conflict in days, hour and or minutes.

End Date

Displays the date and time that the tool conflict ends.

Jobs

Displays the jobs involved in the conflict. An asterisk appears beside a job if it is part of a family.

Machines

Displays the machines involved in the conflict.

Start Date

Displays the date and time that the tool conflict starts.

Tool Number

Displays the tool for which the conflict exists.

Using the Tool Conflict Tool

The Tool Conflict tool displays all jobs with tool conflicts in yellow. A Tool Conflict details card
displays details about the conflict and you can scroll down the job scheduler list to view details about
any subsequent tool conflicts.

246 October, 2024

 1. Press Find Next to display conflict details for the next highlighted job in the Job Scheduler list.
Repeat this step until all conflicts have been reviewed.

2. When you have viewed all conflicts, press Cancel to close the Tool Conflict tool.

Job Scheduler-Show Resources Tool

Use the Show Resources tool to display the distribution of a resource in the schedule. All
occurrences of the resource are highlighted according to the status of the job (on-time, late or non-
production)

For example, you could see all jobs that require a selected material or have been created for a
certain customer.

While jobs are highlighted, they are editable and can be moved to better distribute resources.

Menu Path

Launch Show Resources from the Job Scheduler application by pressing Tools > Show Resources.

You also can launch the Show Resources tool by pressing the Show Resources icon on the toolbar.

Show Resources Tool Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Resource Name

Contains the name of the resource to highlight. The list contains all resources that are the selected
resource type and that currently exist in the schedule.

Resource Type

The Resource type drop-down list contains the available types of data that can be highlighted.

The options are the following:

l Part Number - populates the resource name list with all part IDs

l Tool Number - populates the resource name list with all tool IDs

l Customer - populates the resource name list with all customers

l Material ID - populates the resource name list with all materials

247 October, 2024

 Only Resources that are currently in the job schedule appear in Resource Name the
list.

Using the Show Resources Tool

1. In the Resource Type field, select the type of data to highlight. The resource type selection
populates the Resource Name field with the available data for that resource type.

2. In the Resource Name field, select the name of the resource to highlight. The list contains all
resources that are the selected resource type and that currently exist in the schedule. When
the resource name is selected, all jobs in the schedule that contain the selected resource
name appear the same but any jobs that don't contain the resource name turn gray.

3. To better manage resources, you can drag one of the jobs on the Job Schedule to a different
machine or time slot. You can do this while the Show Resource tool is still on the display.

4. Press Cancel to close the window when you have finished displaying resources.

Job Scheduler-Where to Run Tool

Use the Where to Run? utility to locate a machine on which to run a job.

The utility cannot be used for a job if the job is currently running.

Menu Path

Launch the Where to Run tool from the Job Details card by pressing Where to Run?.

You can also launch the Where to Run? tool by right-clicking a job and pressing Where to Run?.

Where to Run Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Average Cycle

Displays the average time required to complete one production cycle on the machine.

This field is color coded. It is red if the cycle time exceeds the upper control limit set in the process
card. If it falls under the upper control level, it is green.

Cycle Efficiency

Displays the accumulated cycle efficiency for machine. Cycle efficiency is the ratio of the expected
cycle time to the average cycle time.

248 October, 2024

CE = (Standard Cycle Time) / (Average Cycle Time)

This field is color coded based on the system configuration minimum and maximum cycle efficiency
percentage settings. The field is color coded in the following ways:

l Green - Cycle efficiency falls within efficiency thresholds.

l Red - Cycle efficiency falls below minimum cycle efficiency percentage threshold.

l White - Cycle efficiency exceeds maximum cycle efficiency percentage threshold.

Down Time Percent

Displays the percentage of time the machine has experienced downtime

This field is color coded. It is red if the downtime percentage exceeds the maximum down time
percentage set in System Configuration. If it falls under the maximum percentage, it is green.

Machine

Displays the machine on which job can be run. For a job to run on a machine there must be an
existing process card to define the production standards and link the machine, part and tool.

OEE

Displays the Overall Equipment Effectiveness of the machine utilization while performing past jobs

Depending on the setting defined in System configuration, the OEE calculation can either be OEE =
(Percent Uptime) * (Percent Good Parts) * (Cycle Efficiency) or OEE = (Percent Uptime) * (Percent
Good Parts) * (Yield Efficiency). The first one is the standard calculation.

This field is color coded based on the system configuration minimum and maximum OEE percentage
settings. The field is color coded in the following ways:

l Green - Operator equipment effectiveness falls within thresholds.

l Red - Operator equipment effectiveness falls below the minimum OEE percentage threshold.

l White - Operator equipment effectiveness exceeds the maximum OEE percentage threshold.

Scrap Percent

Displays the percentage of the machine's production that has resulted in scrap

This field is color coded. It is red if the percent scrap exceeds the maximum scrap percentage set in
system configuration. If it falls under the percentage, it is green.

Tool

249 October, 2024

Displays the tool that can be used to run the job on the machine. This is the defined tool for the
process card.

Yield Efficiency

Displays the accumulated yield efficiency for the machine. Yield efficiency is the ratio of the good
parts made compared to the standard parts that should have been made.

YE = (Good Parts) / (Expected Parts)

This field is color coded based on the system configuration minimum and maximum yield efficiency
percentage settings. The field is color coded in the following ways:

l Green - Yield efficiency falls within efficiency thresholds.

l Red - Yield efficiency falls below minimum yield efficiency percentage threshold.

l White - Yield efficiency exceeds maximum yield efficiency percentage threshold.

Using the Where to Run Tool

1. The Where to Run card displays all machines where the job can be run. Select the check box
beside the machine where you want to run the job.

2. Press OK to close the Where to Run tool. The job moves to the schedule of the machine you
selected. The placement in the scheduled is determined based on the Insert Jobs rule defined
in the Job Schedule Options window.

Job Scheduler- Status Override Utility

Use the Status Override Utility to override a job's status in the event that a job is suspended or
ended by mistake and needs to be corrected.

It is recommended that the Status Override utility only be used to correct mistakes and
that Job Control be used for the normal starting and stopping of jobs.

Menu Path

Launch the Status Override Utility from the Job Details card by pressing Tools > Status Override.

Using the Status Override Utility

1. By default, all ended and suspended jobs appear in the Job Number list. To filter the list to
display only jobs run on a specific machine, select the machine from the Machine Number
drop-down list.

2. In the Job Number field, select the job number for which to override the status.

250 October, 2024

3. If the job has a status of Suspended, press End to end the job.

4. If the job has a status of Complete, press Suspend to suspend the job. The job is placed in the
Unscheduled Jobs list for the appropriate machine. You must then manually reschedule the
job before you can re-run the job.

5. Repeat these steps as necessary for additional jobs.

6. To close the utility, press OK.

251 October, 2024

Exporting Data from Advanced MES to Import into
Kinetic
After you import Kinetic data into Advanced MES, you need to configure Advanced MES to export
labor production records either via CSV files or via REST.

Configuring Advanced MES to Export Data in CSV Files

The Advanced MES Data Export process schedules the export of labor based production data from
the Advanced MES database to Unicode text files that can be imported into Kinetic.

You need to complete the following steps to configure Mattes for exporting files with production data:

l Assign your MES machines with a plant and the default operator ID;

l Set up the schedule for moving production data from cache to the database and generating
CSV files with production data;

l Configure the system to export the files to Kinetic Input Location folder.

In Advanced MES, production labor data is exported in regularly timed intervals, based on a
schedule you define in the Advanced MES database. Data is exported into a Unicode text file that
contains the labor data records. The first field of each labor record includes the type of data being
exported.

You can perform five types of labor exports:

l L - Labor Details export

l P - Labor CoParts and the quantity completed

l E - Equipment counter associated with reported quantities

l SCH - Scheduling parameters, including company and job data, operation data and production
start and end dates.

P, S and E export line types must follow an L export line type as they do not have the labor detail key
fields. They cannot be the starting line of an export file. The SCH scheduling export line types does
not require a labor type line to be processed and can be placed anywhere in the export file.

You can omit optional fields from an import Part ID request record. However, field separators
(commas) are required as placeholders for a field unless the omitted field is at the end of the record.
If an optional field is omitted and the labor record already exists, the field is not modified. If an
optional field is omitted and the labor record does not already exist, the field is set to blanks
(Alphanumeric type) or 0 (Integer or Float types).

252 October, 2024

All Advanced MES exported files are placed in an export directory. It must be the same directory as
the Input Location directory defined in Kinetic. Once a data file is successfully exported, it is
imported into Kinetic based on the scheduled Kinetic import process.

Configure Machine Plant and Default Operator ID

Each machine whose production data is exported to Kinetic must have a plant and a default Operator
ID. The system will assign machine labor transactions to the default operator if no physical operator
is logged onto a machine in Advanced MES. The plant identifies Kinetic site configured for
integration with Advanced MES.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > Machine
Configuration.

2. In the left pane, select the machine you are integrating with Kinetic and click Edit.

3. In the Plant field, select the plant you created for integration with Kinetic.

4. Navigate to the Miscellaneous card.

5. From the Default Operator drop-down, select the Operator ID to which the system will assign
the labor transactions when no physical operator is logged in to the machine.

253 October, 2024

 Operator IDs are imported to Advanced MES from Kinetic Employee IDs. You
can also manually create Operator IDs from System Configuration >
Miscellaneous > Operator ID.

6. Select Save to apply the changes.

Set Up Chronology
Chronology is the schedule for Machine Harvest and Report Out. Machine Harvest defines when
data collected specifically for Kinetic is moved from cache to the database. Report Out is when the
data written to the database is exported to a CSV file. Usually the Machine Harvest happens twice
for each Report Out.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Miscellaneous >

Chronology.

2. Click New.

3. In the ID field, enter MachHarv.

4. In the Repeat Mode drop down, select repeat minute.

254 October, 2024

 5. In the Minute and Hour fields, enter desired repeat minute and hour values

6. The Start field is fine to keep the default. The time on the Start field would be changed if the
Machine Harvest is desired to run at a different interval than from the top of the hour.

7. Click Save.

8. Click New button.

9. In the ID field, enter RptOut.

10. From the Repeat Mode drop-down, select repeat minute.

11. In the Minute and Hour fields, enter the repeat minute and hour values.

255 October, 2024

 12. Enter the Start and the End date and time for the Report Out chronology.

13. Click Save.

Configure Machine Agenda

Machine Agenda tells the machine to collect data for Kinetic, and which Machine Harvest schedule
to use.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > Machine
Configuration.

2. In the left pane, select the machine you are integrating with Kinetic and click Edit.

3. Navigate to the Miscellaneous card and select the Machine Agenda button.

256 October, 2024

4. Click New.

5. From the Chronology ID drop-down, select MachHarv.

6. From the Chore drop-down, select Export machine data to Command Queue.

257 October, 2024

 7. In the Parameter Integer field, enter 4.

8. Click Save.

9. Click the Machine E10 Export button.

10. Select the Export via CSV file option and adjust the Repeat Minutes value if needed.

11. Click OK.

12. Select the Save button in Machine Configuration to save the changes to this machine.

Configure Server Agenda

Server Agenda processes the Report Out function on a per channel basis, for all machines assigned
to the same channel. Here you specify the path to the Labor Record file.

258 October, 2024

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > Channel.

2. In the left pane, select the channel that is associated with your Kinetic-integrated machines
and click Edit.

3. Select the Server Agenda button.

4. Click New.

5. From the Chronology ID drop-down, select RptOut.

6. From the Chore drop-down, select Process CommandQueue.

7. In the Parameter String field, enter the full path to the output file. For example,
C:\Kineticreport\MES%Y%m%d%H%M%[Link]. Variables are used for the date/time. Put them
in any order you prefer:

259 October, 2024

 l %Y = Year

l %m = month

l %d = day

l %H = hour

l %M = minute

l % S = second

The path must be local, even if Kinetic is running from the Cloud. Processing of
the Report Out file is handled by the Advanced MES moller, which is part of the
MIU communication process. If this process takes too long, the MIU
communication could go down, causing all of the MIUs to go purple. If Kinetic is in
the cloud, an FTP tool will be used to move the file from the local Advanced MES
server to the cloud location.

8. In the Parameter Integer field, enter 0.

9. Select Save.

10. Click Save to apply the changes to the channel.

260 October, 2024

Data Export Records
This section contains the record format information for the available export file.

Export Labor Details

The Labor Detail export type contains labor detail information such as the company name,
employee, clock in and clock out times, labor and burden hours and type of labor performed.

Below is the CSV layout for a labor detail export record. In the actual layout, there is no space after
each comma.

L, Company, EmployeeNum, ClockInDate, ClockInTime, ClockOutTime, LaborHrs,BurdenHrs,

LaborTypePseudo, ProjectID, PhaseID, JobNum, AssemblySeq, OprSeq, IndirectCode,
ResourceGrpID, ResourceID, JCDept, OpCode, ExpenseCode, LaborQty, ScrapQty,
ScrapReasonCode, DiscrepQty, DiscrpRsnCode, Rework, ReworkReasonCode, RoleCd,
TimeTypeCd, OpComplete, Complete, SetupPctComplete, FSComplete, OverRidePayRate,
LaborNote, LaborCollection, Downtime

Example: L,EPIC06,105,20141112,09:00,11:00,1.00,1.00,P,,,2418,0,10,,SHR4,SH-
1,,,,3,,,,,,,,,FALSE,,,,,My Base Notes,TRUE,FALSE

The following fields are used for the labor detail export process:

# Field Description Type

1 L Labor Export Type String
2 Company Company String
3 EmployeeNum Employee Number String
4 ClockInDate Clock In Date Date
5 ClockInTime Clock In Time Time
6 ClockOutTime Clock Out Time Time
7 LaborHrs Labor Hours Float
8 BurdenHrs Burden Hours Float
9 LaborTypePseudo Labor Data Type String
l P - Production Data
l I - Indirect or Down Time Data
10 ProjectID Not Used
11 PhaseID Not Used
12 JobNum Job Number String
13 AssemblySeq Assembly Sequence Integer
14 OprSeq Operator Sequence Integer
15 IndirectCode Indirect Code. Not used for production String
labor.

261 October, 2024

 # Field Description Type
16 ResourceGrpID Not Used
17 ResourceID Machine String
18 JCDept JC Department String
19 OpCode Operator Code String
20 ExpenseCode Expense Code String
21 LaborQty Labor Quantity Float
22 ScrapQty Scrap Quantity Float
23 ScrapReasonCode Scrap Reason Code String
24 DiscrepQty Not Used
25 DiscrpRsnCode Not Used
26 Rework Not Used
27 ReworkReasonCode Not Used
28 RoleCd Not Used
29 TimeTypeCd Not Used
30 OpComplete True if operation is complete Integer
31 Complete Not Used
32 SetupPctComplete Not Used
33 FSComplete Not Used
34 OverRidePayRate Not Used
35 LaborNote Optional Labor Comment String
36 LaborCollection Indicates if data is from MES Integer
37 Downtime Indicates if Downtime Labor Integer
38 QuickEntryCode Not used String
39 LaborRate Not used Decimal (always
-1)
40 ExternalEmployeeSignedOut Indicate employee signed out Bool
Export Labor Serial

The Labor Serial export type contains labor serial information such as the part number, serial
number and serial status.

Below is the CSV layout for a labor serial export record.

S, PartNum, SerialNumber, SNStatus

Example: S,LDS-D,LDS-D001,COMPLETE

262 October, 2024

 S - Serial export line types must follow an L - Labor Detail export line type as the serial
line type does not have the labor detail key fields.

The following labor serial fields are exported:

# Field Description Type

1 S Labor Serial Export Type Indicator String
2 PartNum Part Number String
3 SerialNum Serial Number String
4 SNStatus Serial Number Status String
l Complete

l Inspection

l Rejected

Export Labor CoPart

The Labor CoPart export type contains labor company part information such as the part number and
quantity.

Below is the CSV layout for a labor copart export record.

P, PartNum, PartQty

Example: P,LDS-A,3

P - CoPart export line types must follow an L - Labor Detail export line type as CoPart
do not have the labor detail key fields.

The following labor CoParts fields are exported:

# Field Description Type

1 P CoPart Labor Export Type Indicator String
2 PartNum Part Number String
3 PartQty Part Quantity Float
Export Labor Equipment Counter

The Labor Equipment Counter export type contains labor equipment counter information such as the
equipment identifier, current meter, number of hours and quantity.

Below is the CSV layout for a labor equipment counter export record.

263 October, 2024

E, EquipID, CurrentMeter, Hours, Qty

Example: E,Machine-3,123,,

Equipment Counter export line types must follow an L - Labor Detail export line type as
the equipment counter line type does not have the labor detail key fields.

The following labor equipment counter fields are exported:

# Field Description Type

1 E Labor Serial Export Type Indicator String
2 EquipID Equipment Identifier String
3 CurrentMeter Current labor meter Integer
4 Hours Spent time in Labor in hours Float
5 Qty Quantity of parts produced during labor Float
Export Labor Schedule Parameter

The Labor Schedule Parameter export type contains labor schedule parameter information such as
the job number, production sequences and start and end dates.

The labor schedule parameter export type does need to follow a labor detail export line type. It can
run independently.

Below is the CSV layout for a labor schedule parameter export record.

SCH, Company, JobNum, AssemblySeq, OprSeq, OpDtlSeq, StartDate, StartTime, EndDate,

EndTime, WhatIf, Finite, SchedTypeCode, OverrideMtlCon, OverrideHistDateSetting, ScheduleDir,
SuppressExceptions, AllocNum, ResourceID

Example:
SCH,EPIC06,2418,0,10,0,20141205,10:00,20141206,15:00,FALSE,FALSE,OO,TRUE,2,TRUE,TR
UE,0,

The following labor schedule parameter fields are exported:

# Field Description Type

1 SCH Labor Scheduling Parameter Export Type Indicator String
2 Company Company Name String
3 JobNum Job Segment of Advanced MES Job Number String
4 AssemblySeq Assembly Segment of Advanced MES Job Number Integer
5 OprSeq Operation segment of Advanced MES Job Number Integer
6 OpDtlSeq Operation Detail Segment. The value is always 0. Integer
7 StartDate Start Date Date
8 StartTime Start Time Time

264 October, 2024

 # Field Description Type
9 EndDate End Date Date
10 EndTime End Time Time
11 WhatIf What If Logical Statement. This value is always False. String
12 Finite Finite Logical Statement. This value is always False. String
13 SchedTypeCode Schedule Type Code. The value is always OO. String
14 OverrideMtlCon Override Material Integer
15 OverrideHistDateSetting Override Integer
16 ScheduleDir The file directory where the exported Labor schedule String
file should be placed.
17 SuppressExceptions Suppress Exceptions Integer
18 AllocNum Allocation Number String
19 ResourceID Resource ID String

Configuring Advanced MES to Export Data via REST

Use these steps to configure a Advanced MES machine to export labor production data to Kinetic
using REST.

1. In Advanced MES, select Launch System Configuration and go to Site > Machine
Configuration.

2. In the left pane, select the machine you are integrating with Kinetic and click Edit.

3. In the Plant field, select the plant you created for integration with Kinetic.

265 October, 2024

4. Navigate to the Miscellaneous card.

5. Select the Labor is burden check box.

266 October, 2024

6. From the Default Operator drop-down, select the Operator ID to which the system will assign
the labor transactions when no physical operator is logged in to the machine.

Operator IDs are imported to Advanced MES from Kinetic Employee IDs. You
can also manually create Operator IDs from System Configuration >
Miscellaneous > Operator ID.

7. Click Machine E10 Export and in the dialog that displays, select the Export via REST
endpoint option.

267 October, 2024

 8. Activate the Enable Production Export and the Enable Schedule Export check boxes.

9. In the Pause when send queue empty field, specify the time after which the service should
pause when there is no data to send.

10. Specify the Minimum time between production data collections. The recommended value is
0.

11. From the Select Transmitter MCP instance name drop-down, select the Web API channel
you created for integration with Kinetic.

12. Select the Select Log Conversation (Very Verbose) check box. You can clear this check box
later after you test the integration.

13. Click OK.

268 October, 2024

Importing Advanced MES Data into Kinetic
In Kinetic, use Import Labor/Scheduling Parameters Process to import Advanced MES labor and
scheduling data from the Import folder defined for the site in Site Configuration Control.

Once you import Advanced MES data into Kinetic, you can view the imported time and expense data
in Time and Expense Entry and the imported schedule data in the Resource Scheduling Board.

If there are errors in the imported data, check the Sub folder under the Input folder.

When setting an import recurrence patter, we recommend a frequency pattern of at

least 30 minutes between imports. More frequent imports may impact the efficient
running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. For more information, please refer to Data
Integration Best Practices.

In Advanced MES, it does not display how many operators are currently running a job.
When labor data is imported into Kinetic, it is split by operator.

Menu Path

Launch this application from Kinetic > Production Management > Job Management > General
Operations > Import Labor / Scheduling Parameters Process.

Selection Fields
Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Backup Processed File

Specifies if the files being processed should first be backed up.

Select this check box to create a backup folder to store all the processed files. Clear this check box
to skip the backup for the processed files.

Selecting this option is highly recommended as it enables you fix data problems and re-
submit files that have errors in processing.

Continuous Processing

Select this check box if the transfer of information should always run.

Continuous Processing Delay

269 October, 2024

Specifies the number of minutes between which transfers should occur.

For integration with Advanced MES, the delay value in this field should be roughly in
sync with the scheduled Advanced MES Export process. It is important to provide
enough time in the interval for the process to complete. The time to complete will
depend on the number of records to import. It takes longer to reschedule a job than to
process a labor record.

Default Time Status - Entered

Specifies the current default process status. If data is imported as Entered, this assumes the labor
record needs to be reviewed by the employee who entered the data. You must then submit the data
for approval.

Payroll processes any records that have payroll indicated, regardless of the
Entered/Submitted status.

Default Time Status - Submitted

Specifies the current default process status. Imported data has a status of Submitted.

Payroll processes any records that have payroll indicated, regardless of the
Entered/Submitted status.

Import Folder

Specifies a path where the imported files are stored.

If you use Advanced MES integration, this field displays the folder where the file
exported from Advanced MES is placed. Kinetic imports the data placed in this folder.

Import Folder...

Click this button to search for and select the folder that you want to import from.

Log Filename

The name of the file that lists the activity of transferred data. Enter the filename and path here, or
click the Log Filename button to select a file.

When an error occurs, the error log file is created in the Import folder directory under the UserID of
the employee who starts the import process.

Log Filename...

Click this button to search for and select an existing file where the log data is being stored.

270 October, 2024

Recurring

Select the Recurring check box to indicate that the process should be run on a repeating basis. This
check box is available only if a schedule other than Now is selected.

For integration with Advanced MES, do not set the import recurrence pattern too recur
too frequently or it may impact the efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. We
recommend a frequency pattern of at least 30 minutes between exports. For more
information, please refer to Data Integration Best Practices section in the Data
Integration with Kinetic and Advanced MES guide.

Schedule

From this list, select the schedule option during which you would like the process to run. Options
include Now, Startup Task Schedule, and any other user-defined schedules created for your
company.

Site

Specifies the Site ID.

Summarize Labor

Select this check box if you want to summarize the imports into one active labor record for an
operator/job/shift. Once the shift is done, the last record is flagged and the labor records are marked
as inactive for regular processing.

Import Data into Kinetic

The Site field displays the current field and the Import Folder field displays the folder selected for the
site in Site Configuration Control. The fields are display only.

1. Select the Backup Processed File check box if the import process should create a backup of
the processed file in the Import directory in a Backup folder.

2. In the Default Time Status field, select the status that imported labor data records should
have when imported into Kinetic.

Payroll processes any records that have payroll indicated, regardless of the
Entered/Submitted status.

3. Select the Summarize Labor check box if you want to summarize the imports into one active
labor record for an operator/job/shift.

271 October, 2024

 Once the shift is done, the last record is flagged and the labor records are marked
as inactive for regular processing.

4. Select the Continuous Processing option if the import task should stay active after the data is
successfully imported.

5. If the Continuos Processing check box is selected, enter the number of minutes between
instances of the import process in the Continuing Process Delay field.

The delay value in this field should be roughly in sync with the scheduled
Advanced MES Export process. It is important to provide enough time in the
interval for the process to complete.

6. In the Log Filename field, enter the file name for the error log. The log file is automatically
created if an error occurs during the import process. The log is created in the Import Folder
under the user ID of the employee that started the import process.

7. In the Schedule field, select whether you want to run the import process now or set the import
process on a schedule. If the option is Now, the import process starts when you save the
import process.

8. If the Schedule value is a future date and time, select the Recurring check box if the import
process should recur based on a schedule.

Do not set the import recurrence pattern too recur too frequently or it may impact
the efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. We recommend a frequency
pattern of at least 30 minutes between imports. For more information, please
refer to Data Integration Best Practices.

9. Press Save.

272 October, 2024

Viewing Imported Time and Expense Data
Use Kinetic Time Entry and Expense Entry to view employee labor data that has been imported into
Kinetic from Advanced MES. After time transactions and expense transactions are entered, you can
view, modify, recall, and copy them. You can also monitor the status of transactions and enter
comments for approvers.

Based on the default time status defined for the import labor and scheduling, the imported data has a
status of Entered or Submitted. If the imported data has a status of Imported, it must be submitted for
approval.

In Advanced MES, it does not display how many operators are currently running a job.
When labor data is imported into Kinetic, it is split by operator. If there is no operator
logged into the machine, the labor can be viewed under the default Advanced MES
User ID.

If you cannot locate imported data, there may have been an import issue. Check the
import error log located in the input folder defined in Site Configuration Control.

Menu Path

Launch this application from the Main Menu by pressing Service Management > Time Management
> General Operations > Time and Expense Entry.

Time Entry and Expense Entry - Employee

Use the Employee landing page to find and select the employee for whom you want to enter time and
expenses.

If an employee was not logged into a machine in Advanced MES, imported Advanced
MES data entered by the employee appears under the default Advanced MES operator
ID.

Employee Fields
Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Employee ID...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application pulls in the record type
displayed on the button label.

273 October, 2024

ID

Displays a unique user-assigned code for the shopfloor employee master record.

Name

Displays the employee's full name.

View Time
1. In the Employee ID field, search for and select an employee for whom you are entering time.
The employee ID and name display in the card.

2. Navigate to the other cards in Time Entry as needed to display and edit time and expenses for
the selected employee.

Time Entry - Calendar

Use the cards under the Calendar tab to view time and expenses in daily, weekly, or monthly
calendars

Select a day or dates in the Calendar pane, to the left of the Calendar cards, to determine the dates
that display when you select a Calendar card.

You can use the Shift key to select a range of dates in the Calendar view. The
transactions included within the range will display in the Calendar view as well as in the
tree view. To see all transactions in a range spanning more than a week, you must be
sure that Month is selected in the Retrieve Records By actions item.

Transactions entered previously display in the calendars as read-only information. Move your mouse
over a transaction to display specific details. Double-click a transaction to open it in the Details card
for editing.

The status of a transaction is indicated by the color as follows:

l Entered transactions display with a white background

l Submitted transactions display with a blue background

l Approved transactions display with a grey background

l Rejected transactions display with a red background

Expense transactions display at the top of the calendar date, and time transactions display below
expense transactions according to the start time.

274 October, 2024

 To enter a new transaction in a calendar, right-click on the date of the time or expense.
Select New Time Detail to enter a time transaction in the Daily > Time Detail card, or
select New Expense to enter an expense in the Expense Detail card.

These fields are unavailable if the Time Management license is not installed and active.

Time Entry - Daily

Use the Daily card to view time in a daily calendar.

Time Entry - Weekly

Use the Weekly card to view and update time in a weekly calendar.

Time Entry - Calendar

Use the Month card to view and enter time and expenses in a monthly calendar.

Time Entry - Time Details

Select either the Daily or Weekly buttons and then use the Nav Tree to view and update employee
hours for indirect labor, production labor, or project labor and submit those hours for approval.

You can view time on a daily or weekly basis. After time transactions are entered, you can view,
modify, recall, and copy them. You can also monitor the status of entered transactions and enter
comments for approvers.

Time Entry - Time - Daily Time

Select the Daily button and go to the Nav Tree to enter and manage time transactions on a daily
basis.

Summary/Summary Detail

Use the Summary/Summary Detail card to display an employee's total labor hours for a shift for one
day as a single time entry.

Use the Summary/Summary Detail card to view the header record for the time entry.

Use the Capture COS/WIP process to post any time detail that has been approved. A status of
Posted displays at the top of the Summary card. If there are remaining time detail records that are
not approved, the status at the top of the card will also display Partial Posted. This indicates that
there are details that have yet to post for this calendar day and header.

275 October, 2024

Example: An employee enters two time details for today; one is approved and the other has a status
of Entered. When Capture COS/WIP runs, the status in Time and Expense will be Partial Posted.
Once the second time detail is approved and Capture COS/WIP runs again, the status in Time and
Expense will be Posted.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Shift

Indicates the shift in which the employee clocked in.

Actual

Displays the actual date and time of the clock in.

Actual Clock In

Displays the actual clock in time for the employee.

Actual Clock In

Displays the actual clock in time for the employee.

Actual Clock Out

Displays the actual clock out time for the employee.

Actual Clock Out

Displays the actual clock out time for the employee.

Actual Lunch In

Displays the actual clock in time for lunch.

Actual Lunch In

Displays the actual clock in time for lunch.

Actual Lunch Out

Displays the actual Clock out time for Lunch.

Actual Lunch Out

Displays the actual clock out time for lunch.

276 October, 2024

Adjusted

Displays the clock in date for this transaction. This is the actual date adjusted when the forward or
backward to adjust the clock in time across midnight. For example, when an employee clocks in prior
to midnight, but shift starts at midnight or later, the system adjusts for the appropriate clock in date.

Change Date...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application pulls in the record type
displayed on the button label.

Clock In

Displays the clock in time the employee starts work for payroll and costing purposes.

Clock In

Displays the clock in time the employee starts work for payroll and costing purposes.

Clock Out

Displays the clock out time the employee starts work for payroll and costing purposes.

Clock Out

Displays the clock out time the employee starts work for payroll and costing purposes.

Integrated with HCM

This field is visible if the HCM integration is performed on the summary level. It is used by the HCM
integration to communicate the state of the pay hours integration to HCM.

Lunch

Indicates the lunch break is included in the shift.

Lunch

Displays the lunch break used for payroll and costing purposes.

Lunch In

Displays the clock in time for lunch used for costing and payroll determination.

Lunch Out

Displays the clock out time for Lunch used for costing and payroll determination

Lunch Out

Displays the clock out time for lunch used for costing and payroll determination.

277 October, 2024

Pay Hours

Displays the payroll hours.

Payroll

Indicates a labor transaction eligible for use with the payroll application.

Payroll Date

Displays the payroll date associated with the labor detail.

Total Burden

Displays the total burden hours for the transaction.

Total Labor

Displays the total labor hours for the transaction.

Transaction Set

Displays a user defined transaction set used to associated multiple transactions.

Time and Expense Entry - Time - Daily Time - Detail

Use the Detail card to display labor hours for a single time entry on a specific day. The labor type you
select when entering time determines the fields available in this card.

You can enter multiple time entries on the same day for different projects, jobs, or indirect labor.
Each entry is one time transaction.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Labor Type

Indicates the labor type for the transaction. For example:

l I - Indirect

l P - Production

l S - Setup

278 October, 2024

 l J - Project

l V - Service

Asm

Identifies the assembly sequence of the job to which the labor transaction applies.

Assembly...

Click this button to search for and select an assembly.

Attribute Set (Labor Quantity)

Displays a short description for the selected attribute set.

Example: Your attribute set includes the following labels and field values:

Label Field Value

Length 100
Width 50
Dimension 4x8
Thickness 1/2
In this case, the Attribute Set field would display the following:

100,50,4x8,Half

Attribute Set (Non-Conformance Quantity)

Displays a short description for the selected attribute set.

Example: Your attribute set includes the following labels and field values:

Label Field Value

Length 100
Width 50
Dimension 4x8
Thickness 1/2
In this case, the Attribute Set field would display the following:

100,50,4x8,Half

279 October, 2024

Attribute Set (Scrap Quantity)

Displays a short description for the selected attribute set.

Example: Your attribute set includes the following labels and field values:

Label Field Value

Length 100
Width 50
Dimension 4x8
Thickness 1/2
In this case, the Attribute Set field would display the following:

100,50,4x8,Half

Attribute Set... (Labor Quantity)

Select this button to search for and select an attribute set for the inventory attribute tracked part.

Attribute sets allow you to you to use different dimensions (attribute sets) for the same part and then
reuse those attribute sets depending on the dimension you want to quote, order, purchase,
manufacture, ship, receive, transfer, quantity adjust, and so on.

In the system, each attribute set is tied to an attribute class and each attribute class is
associated with a part. You define your attribute values in Dynamic Attribute Class
Maintenance and each part that you want to select attribute sets for needs to be marked
as Track Inventory Attributes in Part Maintenance.

Example: Let us assume that you have a part called Metal card. You manufacture this part in
different dimensions, depending on your need. The part comes in different Height, Width, Density,
and Volume specifications.

You manufacture the part using the dimensions below. Each dimension is a single attribute set.

Attribute Set 01

Height Width Density Volume

0.7 0.7 0.5 2

Attribute Set 02

280 October, 2024

 Height Width Density Volume
1.4 1.4 1.5 4

Attribute Set 03

Height Width Density Volume

2.1 2.1 2.5 6

Let's say that you need to report labor against job 2012, used to manufacture 100 units of the Metal
card part in the 'Height - 0.7, Width - 0.7, Density - 0.5, Volume - 2' dimension. Based on this
example, this is Attribute Set 01.

Attribute Set... (Non-Conformance Quantity)

Select this button to search for and select an attribute set for the inventory attribute tracked part.

Attribute sets allow you to you to use different dimensions (attribute sets) for the same part and then
reuse those attribute sets depending on the dimension you want to quote, order, purchase,
manufacture, ship, receive, transfer, quantity adjust, and so on.

In the system, each attribute set is tied to an attribute class and each attribute class is
associated with a part. You define your attribute values in Dynamic Attribute Class
Maintenance and each part that you want to select attribute sets for needs to be marked
as Track Inventory Attributes in Part Maintenance.

Example: Let us assume that you have a part called Metal card. You manufacture this part in
different dimensions, depending on your need. The part comes in different Height, Width, Density,
and Volume specifications.

You manufacture the part using the dimensions below. Each dimension is a single attribute set.

Attribute Set 01

Height Width Density Volume

0.7 0.7 0.5 2

Attribute Set 02

Height Width Density Volume

1.4 1.4 1.5 4

Attribute Set 03

281 October, 2024

 Height Width Density Volume
2.1 2.1 2.5 6

The Metal card part is also required as material to manufacture different sizes of Angle Grinder
(small, medium, large). Depending on the Angle Grinder size, you need different Metal card
dimensions (attribute sets). Let's say that you need to make a single unit of a medium size Angle
Grinder, but to make it you need Metal card of the Height 1.4, Width 1.4, Density 1.5, and Volume 4
dimension (Attribute Set 02). You can define the required attribute set on the Job Entry > Job
Details > Materials > Detail card.

During production of Angle Grinder you discover cracks and bends on the Metal card part. When you
enter time against the job, you use the Attribute Set... button to select the attribute set that holds the
card specification for the discrepant quantity. In this case, Attribute Set 02. As a result, the system
creates a new Non-Conformance record.

Attribute Set... (Scrap Quantity)

Select this button to search for and select an attribute set for the inventory attribute tracked part.

Attribute sets allow you to you to use different dimensions (attribute sets) for the same part and then
reuse those attribute sets depending on the dimension you want to quote, order, purchase,
manufacture, ship, receive, transfer, quantity adjust, and so on.

In the system, each attribute set is tied to an attribute class and each attribute class is
associated with a part. You define your attribute values in Dynamic Attribute Class
Maintenance and each part that you want to select attribute sets for needs to be marked
as Track Inventory Attributes in Part Maintenance.

Example: Let us assume that you have a part called Metal card. You manufacture this part in
different dimensions, depending on your need. The part comes in different Height, Width, Density,
and Volume specifications.

You manufacture the part using the dimensions below. Each dimension is a single attribute set.

Attribute Set 01

Height Width Density Volume

0.7 0.7 0.5 2

Attribute Set 02

Height Width Density Volume

1.4 1.4 1.5 4

282 October, 2024

Attribute Set 03

Height Width Density Volume

2.1 2.1 2.5 6

The Metal card part is also required as material to manufacture different sizes of Angle Grinder
(small, medium, large). Depending on the Angle Grinder size, you need different Metal card
dimensions (attribute sets). Let's say that you need to make a single unit of a medium size Angle
Grinder, but to make it you need Metal card of the Height 1.4, Width 1.4, Density 1.5, and Volume 4
dimension (Attribute Set 02). You can define the required attribute set on the Job Entry > Job
Details > Materials > Detail card.

During production of Angle Grinder you discover dents and missing rivets on the Metal card part so
you scrap some of the material. When you enter time against the job, you use the Attribute Set...
button to select the attribute set that holds the card specification for the scrap quantity. In this case,
Attribute Set 02.

Billable Service Rate

Specifies the billable service rate associated with the employee selected in the Employee ID field.
The value that defaults in this fields come from the Fixed Rate defined on the Employee
Maintenance > Mobile card for the selected Expense Code.

This field displays only when you select the Advanced Labor Rate check box in the Labor pane on
the Company Configuration > Production > Job card.

This value is then used in Service Call Center on the Line > Line Pricing card to determine pricing
for the labor entered for a service job.

Burden Hrs

Displays the job cost burden hours. This is calculated whenever the start/stop times are changed
and can be overridden.

Call

Displays the service call associated with the service record.

Capability

Displays the capability identifier from the job operation detail.

Capability

Displays a description for the capability identifier.

Clock In

Displays the clock in time for the transaction.

283 October, 2024

Clock In

Displays the clock in time for the transaction.

Clock Out

Displays the adjusted clock out time from the labor detail record. This information is used during job
costing.

Clock Out

Displays the clock out time for the transaction. This is the adjusted Clock Out time used during job
costing.

Complete

Indicates a competed transaction.

Copy

Select this option to copy a selected time entry. A new transaction displays in the card. You can
modify the values as needed.

Department

Displays the department in which the work was performed.

Discrepant Reason

Displays the reason code used to describe the discrepant quantity reason. This code indicates the
reason for the non-conformance.

Downtime

Click the Downtime button to report downtime against a job, with a reason why production stopped,
for example: electricity outage, waiting for materials, and so on.

Downtime is used when the resource is in production and something interrupts that production and
the resource is down requiring immediate attention. This is different from indirect codes which are
used to track non-production time for a variety of reasons.

Example: You start production activity on job '1111' but the machine runs out of material and you are
waiting for material to continue. Instead of clocking out of the job, you report downtime by selecting
an appropriate indirect code. When the downtime button is selected in MES the application
suspends time to any job(s) the employee is currently clocked into and starts accruing time to the
selected downtime code. When whatever condition that caused the downtime is resolved the
employee ends downtime and time again will start to accrue to the job(s).

284 October, 2024

 Downtime is a variant of indirect time and is never costed to a job. The downtime record
holds the job number for analytical purposes as identification of root cause can lead to
downtime reduction and increased productivity.

Only Indirect codes defined as downtime are sent to Advanced MES if the Machine
MES is configured in Site Configuration.

Downtime is also reported through the Manufacturing Execution System (MES).

Expense Code

Specifies the expense code for the labor transaction.

Indirect Code

Displays the indirect code for this transaction.

Inspection Data...

Click this button to search for and select an inspection record.

Job

Displays the job identifier for the labor transaction.

You cannot modify a time transaction for a job that is tied to a closed project.

Job...

Click this button to search for and select a job record.

You cannot modify a time transaction for a job that is tied to a closed project.

Labor

Indicates the clock in date for the transaction.

Labor

Specifies the expense code for the labor transaction.

Labor Hrs

Specifies the labor hours for the selected employee. This information is used for Job labor cost
calculations.

285 October, 2024

Labor Notes

Displays a user defined note about the labor transaction.

Labor Qty

Displays the total reported production quantity. Users can enter quantity in this field except for the
last operation of a job with co-parts.

Example: You are entering labor quantities for a batch job (a job that combines two or more jobs that
either partially or completely use the same routing). You select the last operation and save. Then you
navigate to the Co-Parts card and enter production quantity for each part. Once you navigate to the
Time > Daily Time > Detail > Detail card, you will see that the Labor Qty field will display the
quantities entered in the Co-Parts card.

Line

Indicates the line number of the service call for the labor transaction.

Non-Conform Qty

Displays the non-conformance or discrepant quantity. If the Enhanced Quality Assurance (EQA)
module is enabled, the non-conformance quantity for the timecard comes from the failed quantity
generated from the associated inspection.

Non-Conform Reason...

Click this button to search for and select a non-conformance record.

Operation

Displays the operation code for the labor transaction.

Operation...

Click this button to search for and select a job operation.

Operation...

Click this button to search for and select an operation.

Opr

Displays the Operation associated with the Work Breakdown Structure Phase identifier.

Opr

Identifies the sequence of the operation record within the specific Job/Assembly to which this labor
transaction applies. For setup and production entries, this must be valid and must not be a
subcontract operation.

286 October, 2024

Opr Complete

Indicates a completed operation.

Pay Hours

Displays if Kinetic application is integrated with Human Capital Management (HCM). It indicates the
value of the labor hours entered against the job operation, and initially defaults to the value entered
in the Labor field. Once the Labor Detail is saved you have to modify the Pay Hours manually, and
once the record is processed by HCM, you cannot modify the Pay Hours. This information is passed
to HCM once the hours are approved.

Pay Hours - Summary

Displays if Kinetic application is integrated with Human Capital Management (HCM) and the HCM
Integration Enabled check box is selected in Company Configuration. It indicates the sum of the Pay
Hours registered in the HCM pane.

Payroll

Displays the payroll date from the labor detail record. Note that this field does not display if the HCM
Integration Enabled check box is selected in Company Configuration, in which case the Pay Hours
field displays instead.

Payroll

Displays the payroll hours for the selected resource.

Project ID

Displays a user assigned project identifier that uniquely identifies the Jobs, Orders, Purchase
Orders, and Tasks in a project.

You cannot modify a time transaction that is tied to a closed project.

Project Phase

Displays the Project Phase associated with the transaction.

Project...

Click this button to search for and select a project record.

You cannot modify a time transaction that is tied to a closed project.

Quick Code

Displays the quick entry code for the transaction.

287 October, 2024

Recall

Recalls a selected time entry.

Resource

Displays the resource identifier for the individual performing the work.

Resource Group

Displays the Resource Group in which the labor was performed. This must be a valid resource group
defined in the system.

Rework

Indicates a transaction requiring rework.

Rework Reason

Displays the reason code used to describe the rework reason. This code links the transaction to the
reason master record.

Rework Reason...

Click this button to search for and select a rework reason.

Role

Displays the project role code from the labor detail record.

Scrap Qty

Displays a scrap quantity.

Scrap Reason

Displays the reason code used to describe the scrap quantity reason. This code indicates why the
scrap occurred for analysis purposes .

Scrap Reason...

Click this button to search for and select a scrap reason.

Serial Numbers...

Click this button to search for and select a serial number record.

Service Call Labor Complete

Indicates a service call is labor complete.

288 October, 2024

Setup % Complete

Indicates the setup percent considered complete for this labor transaction.

State

Displays if Kinetic application is integrated with Human Capital Management (HCM). Indicates the
status of the pay hour data. The following settings are possible:

l S (Sent) - Records that have been imported into HCM

l R (Received) - Records that have been created in Kinetic Labor Detail from the HCM PTO
integration

l E (Error) - Records HCM attempted to import, but for which the import process failed

l IP (In Progress) - Records HCM is in the process of importing

Status

Indicates the status of the time entry. For example:

l E - Entered

l S - Submitted

l P - Partially Approved

l A - Approved

l R - Rejected

Submit

Submits a selected time transaction for approval.

Submit on Save

Select this check box to automatically submit new time entries when you click Save. The Submit on
Save check box is also available in site Configuration Control. Selecting this check box in Time and
Expense Entry overrides the site setting.

This functionality is available only on new records.

Submitted By

Identifies the user ID of the submitter.

Time Type

289 October, 2024

The time type code from the labor detail record.

Note that a Time Type is not required for a T&M project if a charge rate has been defined for the role
code used in the time detail record.

Type

Displays the job type.

UOM

Displays the unit of measure associated with a discrepant material quantity.

UOM

Displays the unit of measure associated with a scrap material quantity.

UOM

Displays the unit of measure associated with a labor quantity.

User Rate

Displays an optional user defined labor rate. This rate overrides the system defined labor rate.

WBS Phase...

Click this button to search for and select a WBS record.

Displays only those WBS Phase records that have associated job numbers. If a WBS Phase is
manually entered, it must have a job associated with it or the time cannot be submitted.

Time Entry - Daily - Detail - Serial Number Selection

Use Serial Number Selection to search for and select valid serial numbers for the specific job
identified in Time and Expense Entry. Click the Serial Numbers button on the Detail card to access
the Serial Number Selection window.

When serial numbers are selected, they display in the Scrap and Nonconformance Serial Numbers
grid in separate rows. The status for each serial number also displays.

The default status for serial numbers selected from the search is Complete, with two
exceptions:

l If all quantity is Scrap, the default status is Scrap

l If all quantity is Non-Conform, the default status is Nonconformance.

Fields

290 October, 2024

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Labor Qty

Displays the labor quantity that was entered in the Labor Qty field on the Time > Daily Time > Detail
> Detail card.

Scrap Qty

Displays the scrap quantity that was entered in the Scrap Qty field on the Time > Daily Time >
Detail > Detail card.

Non-Conform Qty

Displays the non-conform quantity that was entered in the Non-Conform Qty field on the Time >
Daily Time > Detail > Detail card.

Select Serial Number

Click this button to search for and select a serial number that is valid for the job and part.

Add Serial Number

Click this button to add a serial number. A new row will display in the Scrap and Nonconformance
Serial Numbers grid. Enter a valid serial number in the Serial Number field of the new row.

Remove Serial Number

Click this button to remove a serial number from the Scrap and Nonconformance Serial Numbers
grid.

Serial Number

Displays a serial number that is valid for the job and part.

Serial Number Status

Displays the status of the selected serial number.

Selected

Indicates that the serial number is selected.

Select Serial Numbers

You must enter a valid job in the Time > Daily Time > Detail > Detail. In addition, you must enter the
appropriate quantities in the Labor Qty, Scrap Qty, and Non-Conform Qty fields.

To search for and select valid serial numbers, do the following:

Steps

291 October, 2024

 1. Click the Serial Numbers button on [Link] Serial Number Selection window appears.

2. Review the quantities displayed for labor, scrap, and non-conformance in the Quantities box.
These quantities should be the same as the quantities you entered in the Detail card.

3. Click Select Serial Numbers. The Serial Number Search window displays.

4. Click Search. Valid serial numbers for the part and job display.

5. Click Select All and OK. The selected serial numbers appear in the Scrap and
Nonconformance Serial Numbers grid.

6. Review the status of the selected serial numbers in the grid. The default status for serial
numbers selected from the search is now Complete, with two exceptions:

l If all quantity is Scrap, the default status is Scrap.

l If all quantity is Non-Conform, the default status is Nonconformance.

7. Click OK.

Time Entry - Daily - Approvals

Use the Approval card to review the status of a time transaction submitted for approval.

When you retrieve a time transaction in the Daily Time > Detail card, you can navigate to the
Approval card to review the following information:

l Date the transaction was approved

l List of approvers who approved the transaction

l List of approvers who are pending to approve the transaction

These fields are unavailable if the Time Management license is not installed and active.

Approvals Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Approved By

Displays a list of approvers associated with the expense the transaction

Approved Date

292 October, 2024

Displays the date and time the expense received final approval.

Pending Approval By

Displays a list of approvers who are pending to approve the transaction

Submitted By

Displays the user identifier of the individual who submitted the expense.

Time Entry - Daily - Comments

Use the Comments card to enter comments about the time transaction for approvers. You can also
review comments entered by approvers during the approval process.

You can navigate to the Comments card and enter a comment for your approvers. After the
transaction is approved or rejected by approvers, navigate to the Comments card to review any
comments entered by the approvers in Time and Expense Approval.

These fields are unavailable if the Time Management license is not installed and active.

Comments Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Comment

The Comments card provides you with an area to enter specific notes on each record. You can either
create new comments or review the existing comments for a record.

Comment Type

Indicates the comment type for the time. For example:

l SUB - Submit

l APP - Approve

l REJ - Reject

l INV - Invoice

Date Entered

Displays the date the record was created.

293 October, 2024

Submitted By

Displays the user identifier of the individual who created the record.

Time Entered

Indicates the time the record was created.

Time Entry - Daily - Co-Parts

Use the Co-Parts card to view or update labor against a job producing multiple parts. Available if the
Advanced Production module is installed, use the grid on this card to view or update the quantities
produced for the various parts manufactured on the current job.

Co-Parts Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Part

Displays the part identifier of the manufactured item.

Production Qty

Displays the number of individual parts completed on this labor transaction.

UOM

Displays the unit of measure for the operation part.

View Co-Parts

1. In the Time > Daily Time > Detail > Detail card, enter or retrieve a time transaction for a job
that is manufacturing multiple parts.

2. Navigate to the Co-Parts card. All parts being manufactured on this job display.

3. You can update the quantity for each produced part.

4. Click Save.

Time Entry - Daily - Labor Equipment

Use the Labor Equipment card to enter meter readings for equipment when entering time for a job
associated with the equipment.

294 October, 2024

This card is available when a resource is associated with the equipment used for the job, and the
equipment requires the tracking of meter readings for maintenance.

After you enter time against a job in the Daily Time > Details card, you can click the Labor Equipment
card and enter meter readings for the equipment. Default values may populate the fields depending
on the setup of the equipment in Equipment Maintenance.

Labor Equipment Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Current Meter

Displays the current meter reading for the equipment. This option is available with the related
equipment option is set to Meter.

EquipDescription

Displays a description associated with the equipment identifier.

Equipment ID

Displays a unique identifier for the equipment. This code is assigned by the user.

Hours

Displays the labor equipment hours.

Quantity

Displays the equipment quantity.

UOM

Displays the equipment meter unit of measure.

Time Entry - Weekly Time

Select the Weekly button, go to the Nav Tree, and select the Weekly node to enter and submit time
for a week. Fields in this card display in a grid format for easy entry. Tab through the fields and enter
values as needed.

This card allows you to quickly view or update hours on different days of the week for the same
project, job, or indirect labor. You can view or update multiple transactions on the same week for
different project, production, or indirect labor. You can submit one or more transactions for approval
in this card.

295 October, 2024

 These fields are unavailable if the Time Management license is not installed and active.

Weekly Time Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Shift

Displays the work shift for the employee and payroll date.

Labor Type

Displays the labor type for the transaction.

Week Begin

Displays the date the week begins.

Week End

Displays the date the week ends.

Labor Type

Displays the labor type. For example:

l Production

l Indirect

l Project

Shift

Displays the work shift for the selected employee.

Asm

Displays the Assembly sequence.

Asm

Displays the Assembly sequence.

Copy

296 October, 2024

Select this option to copy a selected time entry. A new transaction displays in the card. You can
modify the values as needed.

Expense Code

Displays the labor detail expense code.

Expense Code

Displays the expense code associated with the labor detail.

Fri Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

Indirect

Displays an indirect code for the labor transaction.

Indirect

Displays the Indirect code associated with the Labor Type. This value is used with Time Entry Codes
where the Labor Type is Indirect.

Job

Displays the Job identifier for the labor transaction.

You cannot modify a time transaction for a job that is tied to a closed project.

Mon Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

Opr

Displays the Operation sequence associated with the Work Breakdown Structure Phase identifier.

Opr

Displays the Operation sequence associated with the Work Breakdown Structure Phase identifier.

Project ID

Displays the project identifier.

You cannot modify a time transaction that is tied to a closed project.

297 October, 2024

Project Role Code

Displays the project role code. This code is associated with the Time Entry Code.

Project Rule Code

Displays the project role code.

Quick Entry

Displays the quick entry code for the transaction.

Quick Entry

Displays a quick entry code for the transaction.

Recall

Recalls a selected time entry.

Resource Group

Displays the employee resource group.

Resource Group

Displays the resource group associated with the transaction.

Resource ID

Displays the resource identifier.

Resource ID

Displays the resource identifier.

Sat Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

Submit

Submits the selected transaction for approval.

Sun Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

Thu Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

298 October, 2024

Time Type

Displays the time type code for the transaction.

Time Type

Displays the time type code for the time transaction.

Total Hrs

Displays the total labor hours for the week.

Tue Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

WBS Phase

Displays the Work Breakdown Structure Phase. This field is required when the Labor type is either
Production or Project.

WBS Phase

Displays the Work Breakdown Structure Phase. This field is required when the Labor type is either
Production or Project.

Wed Hrs

Used to enter and display the labor hours for the day.

Time Entry - Work Hours / Work Hours Details

Select the Weekly button, go to the Nav Tree, and then select the Work Hours / Work Hours Detail
card. This card displays available work hours and actual booked hours on a weekly basis. The hours
are compared and the difference is displayed on a daily and weekly basis.

Work hours are the number of labor hours an employee is available to work. Work hours are
determined by calendar assignment. Kinetic first searches for a calendar at the Employee level. If a
calendar is not found, the search continues hierarchically through the Resource, Resource Group,
site, and Company levels until a calendar is found.

Booked hours are the number of hours an employee has entered.

These fields are unavailable if the Time Management license is not installed and active.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

299 October, 2024

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

to

Displays the day of the week the selected resource ends work.

Work Hours for:

Displays the day of the week the selected resource begins work.

Difference

Displays the difference between scheduled work hours and booked work hours for the selected
week.

Fri Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Friday.

Fri Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for Friday.

Fri Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Friday.

Friday

Displays the Friday date for the selected work week.

Mon Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Monday.

Mon Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for Monday.

Mon Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Monday.

Monday

Displays the Monday date for the selected work week.

Sat Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Saturday.

300 October, 2024

Sat Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for Saturday.

Sat Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Saturday.

Saturday

Displays the Saturday date for the selected work week.

Sun Booked Hours

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Sunday.

Sun Work Hours

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Sunday.

Sunday

Displays the Sunday date for the selected work week.

Thur Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Thursday.

Thur Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for Tuesday.

Thurs Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Thursday.

Thursday

Displays the Thursday date for the selected work week.

Total Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for the selected week.

Total Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for the
selected work week.

Total Work Hours

301 October, 2024

Displays the total work hours the selected employee is available to work for the selected week.

Tue Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Tuesday.

Tue Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for Tuesday.

Tue Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Tuesday.

Tuesday

Displays the Tuesday date for the selected work week.

Wed Booked Hrs

Displays the work hours the selected employee entered for Wednesday.

Wed Diff Hrs

Displays the difference between the available work hours and the booked work hours for
Wednesday.

Wed Work Hrs

Displays the hours the selected employee is available to work on Wednesday.

Wednesday

Displays the Wednesday date for the selected work week.

Review Work Hours

To review the work hours of an employee for a specific week, complete the following steps:

1. In the Employee card, search for and select an employee identifier.

2. In the Calendar pane, select a date during the week you want to review.

3. Navigate to the Work Hours card.

The Work Hours card displays the work hours for the selected week.

302 October, 2024

Expense Entry - Expense
Use the cards under the Expenses tab on the Nav Tree to enter employee expenses and submit
them for approval. You can enter expenses for internal transactions such as general supplies or
training, or for transactions associated with a project.

After expense transactions are entered, you can view, modify, recall, and copy them. You can also
monitor the status of entered transactions and enter comments for approvers.

You can group related expenses together by assigning them a user-defined claim reference. This
allows you to easily track a group of expenses and reconcile the expenses with an Accounts Payable
(AP) invoice. You receive an AP invoice to reimburse incurred expenses.

Expense Entry - Detail

Use the Detail card to enter a single expense transaction and submit it for approval.

You can enter expenses on a daily basis, and you can enter multiple expense transactions on the
same day for different projects or indirect codes. Each entry is one expense transaction.

Detail Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Expense Date

Displays the date of the expense.

AP Invoice ID

Displays the Accounts Payable invoice identifier associated with the expense.

AP Invoice Status

Displays the status of the accounts payable invoice.

Approved Date

Displays the date the expense was approved.

Claim Amount

Displays the total claim amount. Non-reimbursable expenses displays a zero (0).

Claim Conversion Rate

Displays the claim conversion exchange rate in the base currency for tied to the expense date.

303 October, 2024

Claim Currency

Displays the currency associated with the claim amount.

Claim Reference

Use this field to enter a unique alpha-numeric identifier to group expenses together that is usually
paid to the employee in the same Accounts Payable invoice. Claim references are set to default in
from the previous expense entry. For example, entries incurred on the same trip can be associated
with one claim reference. Also use this field to launch Expense Group Maintenance.

Claim Tax Amount

Displays the claim tax amount. Non-reimbursable expenses displays a zero (0).

Claim Total Amount

Indicates the total claim amount. Non-reimbursable expenses displays a zero (0).

Copy

Select this option to copy a selected time entry. A new transaction displays in the card. You can
modify the values as needed.

Expense Amount

Displays the expense amount in the expense currency.

Expense Comment

Enter an expense comment for the record if required according to the instructions in the Expense
Comment Instruction field. Expense comments provide required information about the expense
entry.

Expense Comment Instruction

Displays instructions for entering additional information required for the expense entry. Optional
Expense Comment Instructions are associated with the Expense Type.

Expense Currency

Displays the currency associated with the expense.

Expense Tax Amount

Displays the expense tax in the expense currency.

Expense Total Amount

Displays the total expense amount. This amount includes any taxes associated with the expense.

304 October, 2024

Expense Type

Displays a miscellaneous charge code for the selected expense transaction.

The application retrieves the tax rate information associated with this expense type (if
available) and populates the Rate Type field on this card. Otherwise this information is
taken based on the entered tax liability.

Indirect

Indicates an indirect expense. That is, the transaction is not associated with a project.

Lock

Indicates the claim currency can not be changed by the user. Clear this check box to permit changes
for this employee.

Payment Method

Displays the payment method for the expense.

Project ID

Identifies the project to which this expense is related.

You cannot add or modify an expense transaction that is tied to a closed project.

Project Phase

Displays the project phase to which the expense is related.

Project...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application pulls in the record type
displayed on the button label.

You cannot add or modify an expense transaction that is tied to a closed project.

Quick Code

Displays the quick entry code associated with the expense entry.

Rate Type

Displays the claim rate group code.

305 October, 2024

Recall

Click this button to recall a selected expense entry.

Reimbursable

Indicates a reimbursable expense. Clear this check box if the expense is not reimbursable.

Status

Displays a description status for the record.

Submit

Click this button to submit a selected time transaction for approval.

Submit on Save

Select this checkbox to automatically submit new expense entries when you click Save. The Submit
on Save checkbox is also available in Site Configuration Control. Selecting this checkbox in Time
and Expense Entry overrides the site setting.

This functionality is available only on new records.

Submitted By

Displays the employee who submitted the expense.

Tax Include

Indicates a tax included expense amount.

Tax Liability

Displays the tax region associated with the expense.

Unit Rate

Indicates the per unit rate for the expense.

Units

Indicates the number of units associated with the expense.

WBS Phase...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application pulls in the record type
displayed on the button label.

306 October, 2024

Displays only those WBS Phase records that have associated job numbers. If a WBS Phase is
manually entered, it must have a job associated with it or the expense cannot be submitted.

Expense Entry - Detail - Approvals

Use the Approval fields to review the status of an expense transaction submitted for approval.

When you retrieve a expense in the Expense - Detail card, use the Approval fields to review the
following information:

l Date the transaction was approved

l List of approvers who approved the transaction

l List of approvers who are pending to approve the transaction

Approvals Fields

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Approved By:

Displays a list of individuals who have approved the expense.

Approved Date

Displays the date the expense was approved.

Pending Approval By:

Displays a list of required approvers for the expense.

Submitted By

Displays the employee who submitted the expense.

Expense Entry - Expenses - Tax

Select the Expenses button and use the Tax card to review a breakdown of the total tax amount on
an expense.

After entering an expense, navigate to the Tax card to review details of the tax amount included in
the expense transaction.

Tax Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

307 October, 2024

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Claim Currency Code

Displays the currency code for the claim.

Claim Currency Description

Displays a description for the claim currency code.

Claim Tax Amt

Displays the sales tax amount associated with the corresponding taxable claim amount. This amount
is displayed in the expense currency.

Description

Displays a description for the rate code.

Description

Displays a description for the tax code.

Expense Currency Code

Displays the currency code for the expense.

Expense Currency Description

Displays a description for the expense currency code.

Expense Tax Amt

Displays the sales tax amount associated with the corresponding taxable sales amount. This amount
is displayed in the expense currency.

Rate Code

Displays the expense tax rate code. If required, you can select another rate code available for the
provided tax type.

Tax ID

Displays the unique tax identifier assigned in the Sales Tax master record.

Expense Entry - Expenses - Comments

Select the Expenses button and go to the Comments card to enter comments about the expense
transaction for approvers. You can also review comments entered by approvers during the approval

308 October, 2024

process.

When you enter an expense transaction in the Expense > Detail card, you can navigate to the
Comments card and enter a comment for your approvers. After the transaction are approved or
rejected by approvers, you can navigate to the Comments card to review any comments entered by
approvers in Time and Expense Approvals.

Detail Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Comment

The Comments card provides you with an area to enter specific notes on each record. You can
either create new comments or review the record's existing comments.

Comment

The Comments card provides you with an area to enter specific notes on each record. You can
either create new comments or review the record's existing comments.

Comment Type

Indicates the comment type for the expense. For example:

l SUB - Submit

l APP - Approve

l REJ - Reject

l INV - Invoice

Date Entered

Displays the date the record was created.

Submitted By

Displays the user identifier of the individual who created the record.

Time Entered

Displays the time the record was created.

Expense Entry - Search

309 October, 2024

Use the Search panel to search for a group of expense transactions by a user-defined claim
reference number or an accounts payable invoice number.

The search retrieves the expenses matching your criteria in a read-only format. You can use the
search results to reconcile submitted expenses with an invoice you have received from your
accounts payable department.

For example, you may have assigned the same claim reference number to multiple expenses all
related to the same project and submitted them for approval. When you receive an accounts payable
(AP) invoice for your reimbursable expenses, you can verify that the total expense amount entered
against the claim reference number matches the invoice total.

In this case, you can search by the claim reference number, and verify that all the expenses have
been processed and have an invoice number. You can use the Show Summaries feature to
summarize the total claim amount and compare it with the invoice total.

Search for Expenses

1. Click the Expense Search button. The Search panel slides on.

2. Enter information in the fields and then click Search. Review the Fields help article for field
details.

3. Select the items you want to review and click OK.

4. The expenses display in the Expense > Search card for review.

Time Entry and Expense Entry - Overflow menu

Time Entry and Expense Entry - Retrieve Options
Use the Retrieve options to filter the time transactions and expense transactions that display in the
Time Entry and Expense Entry applications. You can filter the transactions by status.

By default, all transactions of all statuses display in the cards. To exclude a transaction of a specific
status from displaying, clear the check box for the status. Status filter options include the following:

l Retrieve Approved Records - retrieves transactions with a status of Approved

l Retrieve Partially Approved Records - retrieves transactions with a status of Partially

Approved

l Retrieve Entered Records - retrieves transactions with a status of Entered

l Retrieve Reject Records - retrieves transactions with a status of Rejected

310 October, 2024

 l Retrieve Submitted Records - retrieves transactions with a status of Submitted

l Retrieve Records By - retrieves transactions by day, week, or month.

Time Entry and Expense Entry - Retrieve Records By

Use the Retrieve Records By Actions item to retrieve transaction data by day, week, or month.

Select Day to retrieve records only for the day you selected in the calendar. If you select multiple
days, only the records for the first day of the selected range will display. Note that the Time > Weekly
Time card will not display any data, and the ability to add a new time weekly view record is disabled.

Select Week to retrieve records for the week of the day you selected in the calendar. If you select
multiple days spanning more than one week, only records for the week of the first selected day
display.

Select Month to retrieve records for the month of the day you selected in the calendar.

If you change between options, be sure to click Refresh to display the new results.

Time Entry and Expense Entry - Delete Transactions

Both Time Entry and Expense Entry have delete options you use to remove either time transactions
or expense transactions. Within Time Entry, go to the Overflow menu and select Delete Time Detail.
Within Expense Entry, go to the Overflow menu and select Delete Expense.

You can delete a transaction with a status of Entered, Submitted, Partially Approved, or Rejected.
You cannot delete a transaction with a status of Approved.

Time Entry - Delete a Transaction

To delete a time transaction, complete the following steps:

1. Launch Time Entry. When the Landing Page displays, select an employee.

2. Select the Daily button and go to the Time Details card.

You can also select the Calendar button and go to the date of the time
transaction. Then double-click the transaction entry. The Time Detail card
appears.

3. Go to the Time Details grid and select the time entry.

4. Go to the grid's Overflow menu and select Delete Time Detail.

The system deletes the time transaction.

311 October, 2024

Expense Entry - Delete a Transaction

To delete an expense transaction:

1. Launch Expense Entry. When the Landing Page displays, select an employee.

2. Select the Expenses button and go to the Expenses card.

You can also select the Calendar button and go to the date of the expense
transaction. Then double-click the transaction entry. The Expenses card
appears.

3. Go to the Expenses grid and select an expense entry.

4. Select the grid's Overflow menu and then Delete Expense.

The system deletes the expense transaction.

312 October, 2024

Viewing Imported Schedule Data in Kinetic
In Kinetic, you can view schedule data imported from Advanced MES in the Resource Scheduling
Board or the Multi-Resource Scheduling Board.

l Resource Scheduling Board - View and update scheduling information for a selected
resource.

l Multi-Resource Scheduling Board - View and update scheduling information for multiple
resources.

The Multi-Resource Scheduling Board is only available if you have the license for
Advanced Planning and Scheduling.

In the Resource Scheduling Board, you must view the import records for each record
separately.

Resource Scheduling Board Kinetic

Use the Resource Scheduling Board Kinetic to review and modify scheduled jobs at the resource or
resource group level.

Before you use any Scheduling Board, it is a good idea to first review the Scheduling
Boards Overview help article to gain an understanding of the elements of a Scheduling
Board and to learn how to navigate within the Board to best obtain the needed
information. If you encounter a concept or term in this help article with which you are
unfamiliar, please check the Scheduling Boards Overview help article for its definition.

For information on the special notice icons that may display on the Schedule card for this scheduling
board, please read the Icons Detail section of the Job Entry Tree View help article.

You can view all imported schedule records in the resource scheduling board. You must view the
import records for each record separately.

To view the multi-resource scheduling board to display the current schedule for multiple
selected resources, you must have Advanced Scheduling enabled.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Resource Scheduling Board

313 October, 2024

 This application is not available in Epicor Web Access.

Resource Scheduling Board - Selection

Use this card to select the resource or resource group for which you wish to review and possibly
modify production schedules.

Selection Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

End Date

The end date of the job or operation.

Resource

The resource attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling board by
Resource, this is the resource you specified.

Resource

The resource attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling board by
Resource, this is the resource you specified.

Resource Desc

The resource attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling board by
Resource, this is the resource you specified.

Resource Group

The resource group attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling
board by Resource Group, this is the resource group you specified.

If you are reviewing the scheduling board by Resource, this is the resource group where the
specified resource is located.

Resource Group Description

The resource group attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling
board by Resource Group, this is the resource group you specified.

Resource Group...

314 October, 2024

The resource group attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling
board by Resource Group, this is the resource group you specified.

If you are reviewing the scheduling board by Resource, this is the resource group where the
specified resource is located.

Resource...

The resource attached to the Operation Detail record. If you are reviewing the scheduling board by
Resource, this is the resource you specified.

Scheduling Board Type

Type of the scheduling board.

Start Date

The start date of the job or operation.

Review the Production Schedule

l If you want to review the production schedule for a resource, select Resource as the
Scheduling Board Type. Then either enter the resource ID in the Resource field, or click
Resource to access Resource Search and browse for the resource you want to review.

l If you want to review the production schedule for a resource group, select Resource Group as
the Scheduling Board Type. Then either enter the resource group ID in the Resource Group
field, or click Resource Group to access Resource Group Search and browse for the resource
group you want to review.

l Enter the date range for which you wish to view scheduling data.

l Advance to the Schedule card to review the production schedule for the specified resource or
resource group. On the Schedule card, you can use the tools on the Scheduling Board's
Toolbar and Overflow menu to modify your view of the production schedules, as well as to
maintain the schedules.

Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule

Use this card to review and modify the production schedules for the specified resource or resource
group.

This screen is split into two main panels:

l Job Operation List - This panel on the left scrolls horizontally to reveal the following
information:

l Operation in this format: Job (Assy Seq/Oper [Link] Det)

315 October, 2024

 l Part Number

l Cust ID

l Operation Code

l Setup Group

l Start Date

l Days Late

l Schedule Display Area - This panel on the right displays the schedule of each listed job
operation. The way that information is displayed in this area can be modified by each user. For
more information on how to modify this display and how to maintain job operation schedules in
this area, see the What to Do section of this help help article and the Scheduling Board
Preferences help article.

Before you use any Scheduling Board, it is a good idea to first review the
Scheduling Boards Overview help article to gain an understanding of the
elements of a Scheduling Board and to learn how to navigate within the Board to
best obtain the needed information. If you encounter a concept or term in this
help article with which you are unfamiliar, please check the Scheduling Boards
Overview help article for its definition.

For more information on job scheduling from the Job Entry application, please read the Job
Scheduling help article.

Review Schedules

l Review the production schedules of the listed job operations as presented in the scheduling
board.

l To resort the listed job operations, select a different sort option in the Sort By field in the
Navigation toolbar. Valid options include:

l Start Date

l Setup Group

l Part

l Customer ID

l Operation Code

316 October, 2024

 l To review the job operation schedules for a different timeframe, either click on the left or right
arrows just above the schedule display area; or select a new date in the Goto field on the
Navigation toolbar, and then click on a job operation in the list to advance the schedule display
to that date. For more information on modifying the timeframe display, please read the Board
Display Options section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

l To view the details of any of the listed job operations, select the record in the left portion of the
card with your mouse, and then advance to the Detail card.

l To review the meaning of or to change the display colors for the scheduling board, click the
User Preferences button in the toolbar. For more information, read the Scheduling Board
Preferences help article.

l For information on other view options for the schedule display area, please read the Toolbar
Options section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

For information on the special notice icons that may display on this card, please
read the Icons Detail section of the Job Entry Tree View help article.

Modify Schedules

l To modify the production schedule of a job operation, click at the beginning of the operation's
schedule bar, and then drag it to the new start date on the schedule display. The Move Job
window appears. Complete the fields as outlined in that help help article, and then click OK to
complete the move.

l Use the options on the Overflow menu to accept or undo schedule changes. For more
information, read the Overflow menu section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

Detail
Use the cards under the Detail tab to review the details of the job operations that is
selected/highlighted on the Schedule card.

Scheduling Details

Use the Scheduling Details card to review the details of the job that is selected/highlighted on the
Schedule card.

Scheduling Comments

Use the Scheduling Comments card to enter specific notes for a job operation record. In this card
you can either create new comments or review the existing ones entered in Job Entry.

317 October, 2024

 If a scheduling comment was entered in Job Entry, the Memo icon located on the
Standard toolbar displays a red star, indicating that there is a comment to be viewed in
this card.

Resource Scheduling Board - Operations List

The Operations List card lets you combine two or more jobs together into one batch job. Use this
card to select the jobs that you want to batch together.

You can also use this card to find and select a specific operation, and then advance to the Schedule
card where the schedule grid has been positioned to that operation.

You cannot batch a job that has subassemblies. There also cannot be any labor activity
on the operations within the selected source jobs.

Always batch jobs that share similar operations. Only the operations from the first job
will be used to create operations on the new job. If you batch jobs that do not have
similar operations, you could get unexpected results.

When you select the Batch check boxes on this card, the Batch Operations command becomes
active; this command is found under the Overflow menu. To learn more about this application, read
the Resource Scheduling Board – Batch Operations help article.

List Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Asm

The sequence number of the job assembly related to the selected job operation.

Batch

Indicates if this is a batch operation.

Days Late

The number of days late.

Description

The resource description.

Description

318 October, 2024

The what-if resource description.

Due Date

The date the operation is due to be completed.

End Time

Indicates the operation end time.

Est Prod Hrs

The estimated number of hours to complete the job operation.

Job

The number of the job you are reviewing.

Machines

Information about machines.

Max. Mfg. Lot Size

Indicates maximal manufacturing lot size.

Non-Stock Item

Indicates if this is a non-stock item.

OpDesc

The operation description.

Opr

The sequence number of the job operation.

Part

The number of the part being produced for the job, operation, or assembly.

Resource Est Hours

Calculates the estimated hours by resource related to scheduling blocks.

Run Qty

The run quantity.

Schedule Comment

319 October, 2024

Schedule comments can be entered here.

Setup Group

The Setup group.

Setup Group Description

Indicates the setup group description.

Start Date

The start date of the job or operation.

Start Time

Indicates the operation start time.

Review the List

1. On the Selection card, select a resource or a resource group.

2. Click the List tab.

3. All the current jobs assigned to the resource or the resource group appears on the list. To
indicate that a job will become part of a batch, click its Batch check box.

4. Continue to select the jobs that you want included within the batch job.

5. When you finish, click the Overflow menu and select the Batch Operations command.

6. The Batch Operations application appears. You use this application to define the batched job
that will be created.

7. After you have batched the jobs, they will still appear on this list. To remove them, click the
Refresh button on your Standard Toolbar.

Move Job
Kinetic versions of the Job Scheduling Board, the Resource Scheduling Board, and the Multi-
Resource Scheduling Board visually display the schedule you generate thorough the scheduling
engine. Click and drag scheduled jobs or operations to manually change the schedule. The Move
Job window appears, where you can fine-tune schedule changes.

A key control on this window is the Move Option list. Use this list to define the method you use to
factor the change within the schedule. The Move Option you select defines how the engine handles
schedule changes to jobs with multiple assemblies and sub-assemblies.

320 October, 2024

 Completing the Move Job function marks all operation schedules affected as What-If.
These changes are not recorded as the job schedule until you select either the Accept
All Changes or the Accept Current Job Changes option on the Overflow menu.

Move Job Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Assembly

The sequence number of the job assembly.

Capability

If applicable, the capability attached to the Operation Detail record.

Change

Select whether the proposed schedule change to the job is for the Start Date or for the Due Date.

Override Material Constraints

Select this check box to indicate that you want the proposed schedule change to look at material
constraints for the job.

Desc

The description of the part being produced on the job, assembly, or operation.

Due Date

The due date for the current operation. There is also a proposed due date that is for display only
unless you choose Due Date for the Change field.

Due Time

The time on the due date for the current operation. There is also a proposed due time that is for
display only unless you choose Due Date for the Change field.

Finite Capacity

Select this check box to indicate that you want the reschedule process to take into consideration any
resources or resource groups that are marked as having finite and only load them finitely.

321 October, 2024

 Definition:

Capacity - The supply of the resource. It measures either how much time is available
on the resource or the number of units that can be produced during a set time period.

If the Finite Horizon in Site Maintenance is set to zero, this check box is inactive.

Finite Horizon Hierarchy:

Resource > Resource Group > Site

The Finite Horizon hierarchy is correct, only if Site Horizon is >= than the Resource /
Resource Group horizon.

The value you define in the Site Maintenance > Planning > Finite Horizon field cannot
be less than the horizon value defined on resource groups and resources, with an
exception of zero. If you set this field to zero, the Scheduling Engine will still enforce
Finite Scheduling as far out as there is demand.

Ignore Locks

Select this check box to indicate whether scheduling locks are respected for linked jobs. The check
box is enabled only when the Move Option is set to Job - All Jobs, Job - Successor Jobs, and Job -
Predecessors Jobs.

Job

The number of the job for which you are proposing a schedule change.

Job Type

The type of job for which you are proposing a schedule change. A job can be for Manufacture, for
Service, or for a Project.

Level

The level in the bill of material where the assembly is located.

Minimize WIP

Select this check box to reduce the gaps between operations on a single job or a group of associated
jobs that are scheduled via the Schedule Multi-Job feature. When checked, once scheduling is
complete the scheduling engine runs the process again - but this time backwards from the end date
of the successor job - to minimize WIP between operations/jobs. This reduces scheduling gaps. is
available only when the Move Option is set to Job - All Jobs, and Job - All Operations.

Move Option

322 October, 2024

Move Options are dependent on the currently selected operation. Any operation that occurs before
the selected operation is considered a preceding operation, while any operation that comes after it is
considered a subsequent operation.

Select the option you want to use for making the proposed move in the schedule. Depending on
which scheduling board you are in, you might see any of the following options:

l Job - All Operations - This option reschedules operations on this resource group. All
operations are rescheduled after forward scheduling. However, if multiple operations for a
single job are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for any intervening
operations on additional resource groups.

l Branch - Preceding Operations - This option reschedules the selected operation and any
preceding operations within the current assembly. It then moves on to reschedule operations
contained in any preceding assemblies within the method.

l Branch - Subsequent Operations - This option reschedules the selected operation and any
subsequent operations within the current assembly. It then moves on to reschedule operations
contained in any subsequent assemblies within the method – up to the final assembly
(Assembly 0).

l Assembly - All Operations - This option reschedules all the operations on the assembly
around the selected operation. If multiple operations for a single assembly are scheduled at
this resource group, the method leaves spaces (amounts) of time available for other
operations required to be complete on any other resource groups.

l Assembly - Preceding Operations - This option only reschedules the preceding operations
contained within the current assembly. It reschedules the selected operation and any
operations that come before it within the assembly.

l Assembly - Subsequent Operations - This option only reschedules the subsequent

operations contained within the current assembly. It reschedules the selected operation and
any operations that come after it within the assembly.

l Operation Only - This reschedules operations on this resource group only.

l Job - All Jobs - In multi-job mode, all jobs related to the selected job (meaning the successor,
predecessors, and itself) are rescheduled as a unit.

l Job - Successor Jobs - In multi-job mode, all successor jobs related to the selected job,
including itself, are rescheduled as a unit.

l Job - Predecessor Jobs - In multi-job mode, all predecessor jobs related to the selected job,
including itself, are rescheduled as a unit.

Operation

The sequence number of the job operation that is affected by the proposed move.

323 October, 2024

Operation Detail

The sequence number of the job operation detail record (resource group, resource, or capability) that
is affected by the proposed move.

Part

The number of the part being manufactured on the job, assembly, or operation.

Prod Qty

The quantity to be produced of the part for the job.

Production Complete

This check box will display as selected if production is complete for the assembly or operation for
which you are proposing a move.

Qty Complete

The quantity that has been completed for the part on the job.

Recalculate Expected Yield

Determines whether you want the application to adjust the job production yield of any job that uses
this operation and has been flagged to use the automatic recalculation feature. This check box is
available if the selected job has the Production Yield option enabled in Job Entry.

Req By

The original date by which the job part and quantity was required.

Resource

Any resource assigned to the operation. In the Proposed Changes area of the window, you can
change to a different resource, if applicable.

Resource Group

Any resource group assigned to the operation.

Rev

The revision level of the part being produced for the job or assembly.

Setup Complete

This check box will display as selected if setup is complete for the assembly or operation for which
you are proposing a move.

Schedule

324 October, 2024

Select how the proposed change should be scheduled.

l Forward - Specifies from the Start Date and Time onwards.

l Backward - Specifies from the Due Date and Time backwards.

The default option displays based on the option selected in the Site Maintenance >
Detail > Planning > Scheduling Direction field.

The setting is only available if your company has an Advanced Planning and
Scheduling license, and the Use 3rd Party Scheduling Software check box is clear for
the current site in Site Configuration. Otherwise the proposed change defaults
Backward and cannot be changed.

Start Date

The start date for the current operation. There is also a proposed start date that is for display only
unless you choose Start Date for the Change field.

Start Time

The time on the start date for the current operation. There is also a proposed start time that is for
display only unless you choose Start Date for the Change field.

Update Job Operation Detail

Select this check box to change the resource originally defined in the Job Operation Detail with the
resource currently specified on the Move Job window. Both the resource group and the capability
values also update to reflect the new resource. Use this feature when you need to change the
original resource defined on the job record.

If the costing rates are different between the new resource and the original resource, the Override
Rates checkbox is also selected and the original costing rates are maintained. This checkbox does
not create new rates for production labor costs or burden costs.

This check box is available under these conditions:

l If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation equal one.

l If the Prevent Changes check box is selected within Company Configuration (Job module
card), the Update Job Operation Detail check box is available and selected by default.

This check box is disabled under these conditions:

325 October, 2024

 l If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation is greater than one.

l If the Prevent Changes check box is clear (not selected) within Company Configuration (Job
module card).

Move the Job

1. Click and drag a job in one of the scheduling boards from its current scheduled date to a
different date.

The Move Job window appears.

2. Verify the Proposed Changes. Make any necessary modifications to the settings.

The settings are only available if your company has an Advanced Planning and
Scheduling license, and the Use 3rd Party Scheduling Software check box is
clear for the current site in Site Configuration. Otherwise the proposed change
defaults Backward and cannot be changed.

3. Click OK.

Overflow menu
Use the Resource Group Scheduling Board application's Overflow menu to perform several key
functions. The commands on this menu are useful for undoing a change or all changes, accepting
current or all changes, performing batch operation and load leveling functions, queuing the Clear
External MES function or clearing an external MES schedule.

Resource Scheduling Board - Batch Operations

You use the Batch Operations application to combine (batch) two or more jobs that use similar
routing. This functionality lets you first select an operation shared by the jobs and then indicate the
direction within their routing – either backwards or forwards – from which the operations will be
combined. This creates a new job that will manufacture the part quantities required from all the
original source jobs.

Always batch jobs that share similar operations. Only the operations from the first job will be used to
create operations on the new job. If you batch jobs that do not have similar operations, you could get
unexpected results. After source jobs are batched together, they cannot be separated, so be sure
that you have selected the correct source jobs.

You cannot batch jobs for serial tracked parts or that contain subassemblies that are serial tracked if
the site is using Full Serial Tracking. You also can batch jobs for serial tracked parts if the site is
using Outgoing Tracking.

326 October, 2024

 It is not possible to batch operations in the middle of the routing. You can only combine
operations that are either all in front or all behind a starting operation.

The Batch Operations command is available when you select the Batch check box for
multiple jobs on the List card. To learn more about the Batch check box, read the
Resource Scheduling Board – Operations List help article.

Once the batched job is created, it is treated like a regular job. It can be scheduled and transactions
can be placed against it. If your operations allow it, you can even batch together other batch jobs!

When batching operations in a new job, the required quantity of the materials will be calculated to
use Qty Per Parent field unless all of the materials in the original jobs that were batched together
have the Fixed Qty check box checked. In this case, the new job will calculate the required quantity
of the materials with Fixed Qty checkbox checked too.

Resource Scheduling Board - Batch Operations Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Auto Receive

When selected, this check box indicates that labor or receipt transactions against this batch
operation will create automatic receipts to inventory. If you use this feature, this receipt updates the
quantity on hand on the part record. The process is triggered when you post labor quantities against
this batch operation that exceed the quantities required for the sales order.

Normally, you will select this check box for the last operation on the assembly or the final assembly.
Parts are received to inventory at the current unit cost, based on the part costing method (average,
standard or last).

If legal numbers are used for the transaction type and a legal number has not been
assigned, the legal number automatically generates during the auto receive process.
The process first looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a generation type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock Transaction Document Type marked as System Default for the transaction type.
If the process cannot locate a legal number configuration that meets the first set of
criteria, the process looks for the first active legal number configuration (alphabetically)
that has a Generation Type of Automatic and has a selected WIP to WIP or WIP to
Stock transaction document type. If the process cannot locate an active, automatically
generated legal number configuration number for a WIP to WIP or WIP to Stock
transaction document type, no legal number is generated.

You cannot use the Auto Receive function on an intersite job. If you attempt to select
the check box on such a job, an error message displays.

Primary Job Operation

327 October, 2024

The operation from which the source jobs’ routing will be combined. This must be an operation that
all the jobs have in common. Only operations from the source jobs selected for this batch appear on
this list; select the operation you need. For example:

l 000196-4-1 (0/10)

Always batch jobs that share similar operations. Only the operations from the first
job will be used to create operations on the new batch job. If you batch jobs that
do not have similar operations, you could get unexpected results.

Pull Direction

The direction in which the operations will be combined. You have two options:

l Forward – Selecting this option causes the batch job to combine operations, starting with the
selected Primary Job Operation and moving ahead through the routing.

l Backward – Selecting this option causes the batch job to combine operations, starting with the
selected Primary Job Operation and moving back through the routing.

You can either batch the operations from a point backwards to the beginning of
the routing, or from a point forwards to the end of the routing. You cannot batch
between two operations in the middle of the routing.

Job Processing Mode

The manufacturing mode through which this job is produced. This selection defines how operations
and material requirements are processed. There are two options:

l Sequential – The default option. A sequential job is processed through part quantities that are
completed in sequence. For example, a quantity needs to be complete before work begins on
the next quantity. This is the typical way jobs are set up within the application.

l Concurrent – A concurrent job’s production is based on the number of operations performed –

instead of the part quantity produced. For example, you select this option if the job has a
stamping operation that produces multiple parts. The production time on this job is measured
by the number of operations performed on the job.

Batch Operations

1. Within the Resource Scheduling Board (or Resource Group Scheduling Board), click the
List card.

2. All the jobs currently assigned to this resource or resource group appear in the grid. Select the
Batch check box on all the jobs you want to combine.

328 October, 2024

 3. Click the Overflow menu and select the Batch Operations command.

4. The Batch Operations application appears. On the Primary Job Operation list, select the
operation from which the routing on the source jobs will be combined. Only the operations
defined on all the selected jobs are displayed.

5. Select whether the operations will be batched by moving forward or backward through the
routing.

6. Select the batch job’s processing mode; there are two options – sequential or concurrent.

7. If you want to receive any excess quantities to inventory, select the Auto Receive check box.

8. Click OK.

A new batch job is created from the source jobs. If you wish, you can now open this job within Job
Entry and edit it. Each part manufactured through the batch job will appear on the Job Part card.

Several automatic functions are also launched; the What Happens section below details these
processes.

When batching operations in a new job, the required quantity of the materials will be
calculated to use Qty Per Parent field unless all of the materials in the original jobs that
were batched together have the Fixed Qty check box checked. In this case, the new job
will calculate the required quantity of the materials with Fixed Qty checkbox checked
too.

Resource Scheduling Board - Load Leveling

Use this function to compress the operations on a resource group so that no time exists between
them. This allows you to examine the possibility of eliminating any idle time at your bottleneck
resource groups. The changes made by the load leveling function are what-if changes only--you
need to accept them before they become your actual schedule.

The Load Leveling function will not modify the schedule of any job whose schedule you
have locked or started. You lock or start a job's schedule in Job Entry.

Resource Scheduling Board - Load Leveling Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Start Date

329 October, 2024

The date at which the first operation included in the load leveling function should start. The default is
whichever date is later, tomorrow's date or the highlighted operation's scheduled start date.

Example: Today is April 10, 2028. Operation XYZ at your lathe resource group was scheduled to
start on March 28, 2028. However, you have not started this operation. You then highlight this
operation and click . The default start date will be April 11, 2028. If you accept this default, the
system will schedule this operation to start on April 11 and level the load of all subsequent operations
at this resource group.

New Start Date

The new start date that should serve as the basis for the next instance of load leveling. By default,
this is the Start Date the next time that you Load Level.

Cut Off Date

The last date for operations to be included in load leveling. The default is the What-If start date for
the last operation on the Scheduling board. Only operations with a What-If start date that is before
the cut off date are included in load leveling.

Move Option

Select how the rest of the schedule should be adjusted to account for the proposed load leveling.
The following options are available:

l Job - All Operations - This reschedules operations on this resource group. However, if multiple
operations for a single job are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for
any intervening operations on additional resource groups.

l Branch - Preceding Operations - - This reschedules the selected operation and preceding
operations for the assembly, then goes on to reschedule the assembly's parents,
grandparents and so forth.

l Branch - Subsequent Operations - This reschedules the selected operation and subsequent
operations for the assembly, then goes on to reschedule the assembly's parents,
grandparents and so forth.

l Assembly - All Operations - This reschedules operations on this resource group. However, if
multiple operations for a single assembly are scheduled at this resource group, this option
leaves gaps for any intervening operations on additional resource groups.

l Assembly - Preceding Operations - This reschedules the selected operation and all operations
for this assembly that come before the selected operation.

l Assembly - Subsequent Operations - This reschedules the selected operation and all
operations for this assembly that come after the selected operation.

l Operation Only - This reschedules operations on this resource group only.

Load Level By

330 October, 2024

Indicates the basis on which you want to load level. Valid options include:

l Start Date

l Setup Group

l Operation Code

If you load by Setup Group, the Setup Group Scheduling Order window appears, where you can
establish the order in which you want setup groups to apply.

Consider Priority

Select this check box to indicate that the scheduling priority code of the job is considered when you
load level.

Level a Resource Group Load

1. Open the Scheduling Board for the resource group whose load you want to level.

2. Select the first operation you want to be included in the load leveling function, and then click
the Load Level button. You can also access load leveling from the Overflow menu.

3. Complete the fields in the Load Leveling window as outlined in the Field-Level Detail section
of this help help article.

4. Click OK. The software's load leveling function affects the schedule of this operation and of all
operations scheduled to start after this operation.

Example: Four operations are scheduled at your lathe resource group. Operation A is
scheduled to start on March 15. Operation B is scheduled to start on April 5. Operation C is
scheduled to start on April 30. Operation D is scheduled to start on May 18. You select
operation B on the lathe resource group scheduling board. If you then level the load, the
schedule for operations B, C, and D will be changed, if possible. The schedule for operation A
will not be changed, since operation A is scheduled to start before the selected operation.

Resource Scheduling Board - Actions - Queue Clear External MES

Use the Queue Clear External MES action to add the selected resource groups to the Clear
External MES queue.

If your company also uses Advanced MES, resource scheduling is integrated between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

Click Queue Clear External MES to add a selected resource group to the Clear External MES
queue. When you add a resource group to the Clear External MES queue, you are selecting for its
job schedule to be cleared on Advanced MES. The MESQueue field for the resource group is set to
Yes.

331 October, 2024

When the Export to Advanced MES process next runs with the Clear Schedule field set to Clear
Now or Clear and Resend, the job schedules for the queued resource groups are cleared on
Advanced MES (in addition to any other selected resources and resource groups).

When you add a resource group to the Clear External MES queue, there is no visible
change in this application. You can only see the changed MESQueue field in the
database.

This action only applies to resource groups with a resource type of M (Machine).

Resource Scheduling Board - Actions - Clear External MES Schedule

Use the Clear External MES Schedule action to launch Export to Advanced MES Process
application for the selected resource groups.

If your company also uses Advanced MES, resource scheduling is integrated between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

Click Clear External MES Schedule to open the Export to Advanced MES Process application.
The selected resource groups appear in the Filter > Resource Groups card.

When you run the Export to Advanced MES process with the Clear Schedule field set to Clear Now
or Clear and Resend, the job schedules for the selected resource groups are cleared on Advanced
MES (in addition to any other selected resources and resource groups).

This action only applies to resource groups with a resource type of M (Machine).

Export to Advanced MES

Use the Export to Advanced MES process to export CSV files from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced
MES. Kinetic exports in bulk (folder) rather then individual CSV files. Click the Export Folder button
to search for and select the name and directory of the file you want to export.

To distinguish between imported rows in a table, the CSV files include the following record types
used by the Import process in the Epicor Advanced MES application:

l TI800 - Resources records

l PI800 - Parts in master table with valid revision

l MP800 - Materials for main part exported

l MI710 - Material ID action request

l DC813 - Indirect codes (also called Down Codes)

332 October, 2024

 l DF813 - Scrap type reason codes (also called Scrap Codes)

l PP800 - Process card line, containing the Part Operations data.

l PE630 - Process card Machine Parameters (containing Engineering Workbench machine

parameters)

l PE800 - Process specific action request

l JB630 - Job description action request (Job Operations)

l JF630 - Father Job description action request

l OI860 - Shop Employee records

l SD360 - Clear Job Schedule

You can only export the database entry records marked as Machine MES and records
linked to them.

Example: If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected in Operation
Maintenance, the exporting process automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to
this operation in a method of manufacture (Engineering Workbench) and transfers them to the Epicor
Advanced MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are
manufactured items.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Engineering > General Operations > Export to Advanced MES

Export to Advanced MES - Selection

Use the Selection card to select options for the Export to Advanced MES process.

Selection Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Export Option

Determines the method to use to export operations from Kinetic to Advanced MES.

l Job Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete and
have the Machine MES check box selected.

333 October, 2024

 l Operation Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete,
that have the Machine MES check box selected and whose operation start date falls within the
selection parameters.

l Operation Start Date with Prior Operation Status - Evaluates the prior operation status
before creating a Advanced MES job for an operation that has the Machine MES check box
selected. The export process differs based on the scheduling relationship between the prior
operation and the current operation.

l Finish to Start Relationship - The operation export does not create a Advanced MES
job until the prior operation is complete and the start date of the operation with the
selected Machine MES check box is within the selection range.

l Start to Start Relationship - The operation is sent when the prior operation is started.
This operation also considers the scheduling offset value on the secondary operation.

l Finish to Finish Relationship - The secondary operation creates a Advanced MES job
as soon as the primary operation job is created.

Cutoff Horizon Date

Specifies the cutoff horizon date to control which job data is sent during the export process. The
cutoff horizon date is the first operation start date for any jobs that have the Machine MES option
selected. When a job is selected, all operations that have machine MES are sent to Advanced MES
as jobs.

Once an operation has been exported and has a Advanced MES Job, further updates from Kinetic
are blocked as Advanced MES has full control of the job. Kinetic is used for planning and costing and
Advanced MES is used for production execution.

The export process sends all static data each time the process runs.

Clear Schedule

Specifies how you want to clear the existing job schedule on Advanced MES before the new
exported job schedule is loaded. To make a change to the Advanced MES job schedule from Kinetic,
you must first clear the existing schedule.

To clear job schedule information, you must select the resource groups and/or resources for which
you want to clear the job schedule in the Filter > Resource Groups and Filter > Resources cards. If
a resource group or resource is not selected, the schedule for that resource or resource group is not
cleared.

Select one of the available options:

334 October, 2024

 l None - the job schedule is not cleared and standard processing occurs.

l Clear Now - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected resource
groups and resources. No other information is exported from Kinetic.

l Clear Now and Resend - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected
resource groups and resources. Exports the job descriptors for the selected resource groups
and resources. The exported production job schedule is based on the job descriptors, the
selected Export Option and whether the Net Change check box is selected.

Execute OData Calls

Select this check box if you want to use OData calls to directly export data from Kinetic to Advanced
MES instead of generating CSV files and importing them to Advanced MES.

Export Folder

Specifies the directory path for the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced MES
application.

Export Folder...

Click this button to search for and select the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced
MES application.

Log Filename

This field specifies the file name for the log file that Kinetic creates if an error occurs during the export
process.

When an error occurs, the error log file will be created in the Export folder directory under the UserID
of the employee who starts the export process.

Log Filename...

Click this button to search for and select an existing file where the log data is being stored.

Net Change

If selected, the export process only includes part, part revision, resource, scrap reason code, indirect
labor code, shop employee, job and job operation records that have the Sync Required check box
enabled. When the Sync Required check box for a record is selected, it indicates that the record is
new or that there have been changes since the last synchronization that should be included in the
next export process. The new or changed data for the selected records is exported.

If the Sync Required check box for a record is clear, any changes to that record since
the last synchronization are not included in the export process.

OData URL

335 October, 2024

Displays the OData URL specified in Site Configuration Control that will be used to make the calls .

Recurring

Select this check box to indicate that the process should be run on a repeating basis.

Do not set the export recurrence pattern too recur too frequently or it may impact the
efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. It is recommended to have a frequency
pattern of at least 30 minutes between exports. For more information, please refer to
Data Integration Best Practices.

Schedule

Select the schedule option during which you would like the export process to run.

If Now is selected, the export process will start once you save the export process.

Site

Specifies the site for which the export process runs.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter

Use the cards under the Filter card to select the resource groups and resources should have their
existing production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group and Resource filters are
disabled.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter - Resource Groups

Use the Resource Groups card to select the resource groups that should have their existing
production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resource groups to the list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group filters are disabled.

Resource Groups Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

336 October, 2024

Further identifies each resource group. The description appears on reports or windows throughout
the system. For example:

l Lathe Group 120

l CNC Milling Center

l Assembly Bench North

Input Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse from which the resource group pulls its material. Both warehouses
contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on this list.

If you use the Advanced Material module, you should assign input warehouses as soon
as possible. If a resource group for a job operation does not have an input warehouse,
inspection applications DMR Processing and Inspection Processing could
misintKineticret the absence of an input warehouse as a reason to assign a blank
destination warehouse. If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse,
a corresponding move queue is not created on the Material Queue.

When the Input Warehouse and In Bin are the same as the Output Warehouse and
Out Bin, and if Auto Move is checked, no automatic move request is generated, and
the Request Move check box is not selected in Data Collection Report Quantity or
End Activity. This arrangement works well for a production line, cell, or other resource
group that is in close proximity to other resource groups that also need this material.

Output Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse where material is to go once the work from this resource group needs to be
moved. Both warehouses contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on
this list.

If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse, a corresponding move
queue is not created on the Material Queue.

ProdBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

337 October, 2024

 Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

QProdBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

QSetupBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Resource Groups...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Resource Type

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource group to classify it for custom reporting
purposes.

If the Machine MES check box is selected and the resource group is integrated with Advanced MES,
this field indicates how the resource group integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource group contains Advanced MES machine resources. These
resources are manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resources in the group are Advanced MES tool resources. This resource is
exported to Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

338 October, 2024

 If the Resource Type is M (machine) and the Machine MES check box is selected, all
resources in the resource group must have a resource type of M (machine).

ResourceGrpID

The code that uniquely identifies each resource group. For example:

l LATHES

l C-MILLS

l ASSY BENCH

SetupBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Add Resource Group to Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resource Groups card.

2. Click New. A blank row appears in the Resource Groups grid.

3. Enter the resource group ID in the ResourceGrpID field.

4. Enter additional information in the remaining available fields.

To add a resource group, you must know the resource group ID and the resource
group must have a Resource Type of M (Machine).

Delete Resource Group from Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resource Groups card.

2. Select the resource group to delete from the filter list.

339 October, 2024

 3. Click Delete. The resource group is deleted from the filter list.

Export to Advanced MES Process - Filter - Resources

Use the Resources card to select the machine resources that should have their existing production
schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resources to the filter list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, the Resource filters are disabled.

Only resources with a resource type of Machine are available for selection.

Resources Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource. The description appears on reports or windows throughout the
application.

Location

If selected, indicate that this resource is a physical location on the shop floor. This means that an
employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource will be posted to the labor
transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

A resource cannot be flagged as a Location if the resource group is not flagged as a

Location.

ResourceID

Specifies the code that uniquely identifies each resource. For example:

l 3VM1

l ARC2

l AUX1

340 October, 2024

 For machine resources, if you integrate your Kinetic with Advanced MES, Kinetic
resource ID must match the Advanced MES machine configuration ID.

ResourceType

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource to classify it for custom reporting purposes.

If the resource is integrated with Advanced MES, this field indicates how the resource
integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES machine resource. This resource is

manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES tool resource. This resource is exported to
Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

Resources...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Add Resource to Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resources card.

2. Click New. A blank row appears in the Resources grid.

3. Enter the resource ID in the ResourceID field.

4. Enter additional information in the remaining available fields.

To add a resource, you must know the resource ID and the resource must have a
Resource Type of M (Machine).

Delete Resource from Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resources card.

2. Select the resource to delete from the filter list.

3. Click Delete. The resource is deleted from the filter list.

341 October, 2024

Multi Resource Scheduling Board Kinetic
Use this application to review and modify scheduled jobs at the resource level. You can review the
schedule for one resource or for many resources.

The Multi-Resource Scheduling Board is only available if you have the license for
Advanced Planning and Scheduling.

Before you use any Scheduling Board, it is a good idea to first review the Scheduling
Boards Overview help article to gain an understanding of the elements of a Scheduling
Board and to learn how to navigate within the Board to best obtain the needed
information. If you encounter a concept or term in this help article with which you are
unfamiliar, please check the Scheduling Boards Overview help article for its definition.

For information on the special notice icons that may display on the Schedule card for this scheduling
board, please read the Icons Detail section of the Job Entry Tree View help article.

Menu Path: Production Management > Scheduling > General Operations > Multi Resource
Scheduling Board

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Selection

Use this card to select the resource(s) for which you wish to review and possibly modify production
schedules.

The Multi-Resource Scheduling Board is only available if you have the license for
Advanced Planning and Scheduling.

Add a Resource

1. To add a resource to the Resource List grid, either click New on the Standard toolbar and
manually add the resource ID to the grid, or click Resource to access Resource Search and
browse for the resource(s) you want to review.

2. Advance to the Schedule card to review the production schedule for the specified resource(s).
On the Schedule card, you can use the tools on the Scheduling Board's Toolbar and Overflow
menu to modify your view of the production schedules, as well as to maintain the schedules.

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Schedule

Use this card to review and modify the production schedules for the specified resource(s).

This screen is split into two main panels:

342 October, 2024

 l Resource List - This panel on the left scrolls horizontally to reveal the following information:

l ID

l Resource

l Schedule Display Area - This panel on the right displays the schedule of each listed resource.
The way that information is displayed in this area can be modified by each user. For more
information on how to modify this display and how to maintain resource schedules in this area,
see the What to Do section of this help help article and the Scheduling Board Preferences help
article.

Before you use any Scheduling Board, it is a good idea to first review the
Scheduling Boards Overview help article to gain an understanding of the
elements of a Scheduling Board and to learn how to navigate within the Board to
best obtain the needed information. If you encounter a concept or term in this
help article with which you are unfamiliar, please check the Scheduling Boards
Overview help article for its definition.

Review Schedules

l Review the production schedules of the listed resources as presented in the scheduling board.

l To review the resource schedules for a different timeframe, either click on the left or right
arrows just above the schedule display area; or select a new date in the Goto field on the
Navigation toolbar, and then click on a resource in the list to advance the schedule display to
that date. For more information on modifying the timeframe display, please read the Board
Display Options section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

l To view the details of the job associated with any of the listed resources, select the record in
the left portion of the card with your mouse, and then advance to the Detail card.

l To review the meaning of or to change the display colors for the scheduling board, click the
User Preferences button in the toolbar. For more information, read the Scheduling Board
Preferences help article.

l For information on other view options for the schedule display area, please read the Toolbar
Options section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

For information on the special notice icons that may display on this card, please
read the Icons Detail section of the Job Entry Tree View help article.

Modify Schedules

343 October, 2024

 l To modify the production schedule of a resource, click at the beginning of the resource's
schedule bar, and then drag it to the new start date on the schedule display. The Move Job
window appears. Complete the fields as outlined in that help help article, and then click OK to
complete the move.

You can also drag and drop the resource's schedule onto another resource in the
list. When you click on the beginning of the resource's schedule, drag it up or
down to another resource, instead of left or right to another date.

l Use the options on the Overflow menu to accept or undo schedule changes. For more
information, read the Overflow menu section of the Scheduling Boards Overview help article.

l Review the setup for scheduling blocks. Each allocation scheduling block has its own setup
time. As a result, you can move a corresponding setup time to accommodate each scheduling
block. For example, if you have four scheduling blocks, the engine creates four setup blocks,
each of which can be moved as you like.

For the setup time logic to work properly for multiple blocks, the user who enters
setup time must not mark the work as "Setup Complete" after doing the first
setup. Otherwise, all setup on subsequent blocks involving that resource is
considered done.

Move Job
Kinetic versions of the Job Scheduling Board, the Resource Scheduling Board, and the Multi-
Resource Scheduling Board visually display the schedule you generate thorough the scheduling
engine. Click and drag scheduled jobs or operations to manually change the schedule. The Move
Job window appears, where you can fine-tune schedule changes.

A key control on this window is the Move Option list. Use this list to define the method you use to
factor the change within the schedule. The Move Option you select defines how the engine handles
schedule changes to jobs with multiple assemblies and sub-assemblies.

Completing the Move Job function marks all operation schedules affected as What-If.
These changes are not recorded as the job schedule until you select either the Accept
All Changes or the Accept Current Job Changes option on the Overflow menu.

Move Job Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Assembly

344 October, 2024

The sequence number of the job assembly.

Capability

If applicable, the capability attached to the Operation Detail record.

Change

Select whether the proposed schedule change to the job is for the Start Date or for the Due Date.

Override Material Constraints

Select this check box to indicate that you want the proposed schedule change to look at material
constraints for the job.

Desc

The description of the part being produced on the job, assembly, or operation.

Due Date

The due date for the current operation. There is also a proposed due date that is for display only
unless you choose Due Date for the Change field.

Due Time

The time on the due date for the current operation. There is also a proposed due time that is for
display only unless you choose Due Date for the Change field.

Finite Capacity

Select this check box to indicate that you want the reschedule process to take into consideration any
resources or resource groups that are marked as having finite and only load them finitely.

Definition:

Capacity - The supply of the resource. It measures either how much time is available
on the resource or the number of units that can be produced during a set time period.

If the Finite Horizon in Site Maintenance is set to zero, this check box is inactive.

Finite Horizon Hierarchy:

Resource > Resource Group > Site

345 October, 2024

 The Finite Horizon hierarchy is correct, only if Site Horizon is >= than the Resource /
Resource Group horizon.

The value you define in the Site Maintenance > Planning > Finite Horizon field cannot
be less than the horizon value defined on resource groups and resources, with an
exception of zero. If you set this field to zero, the Scheduling Engine will still enforce
Finite Scheduling as far out as there is demand.

Ignore Locks

Select this check box to indicate whether scheduling locks are respected for linked jobs. The check
box is enabled only when the Move Option is set to Job - All Jobs, Job - Successor Jobs, and Job -
Predecessors Jobs.

Job

The number of the job for which you are proposing a schedule change.

Job Type

The type of job for which you are proposing a schedule change. A job can be for Manufacture, for
Service, or for a Project.

Level

The level in the bill of material where the assembly is located.

Minimize WIP

Select this check box to reduce the gaps between operations on a single job or a group of associated
jobs that are scheduled via the Schedule Multi-Job feature. When checked, once scheduling is
complete the scheduling engine runs the process again - but this time backwards from the end date
of the successor job - to minimize WIP between operations/jobs. This reduces scheduling gaps. is
available only when the Move Option is set to Job - All Jobs, and Job - All Operations.

Move Option

Move Options are dependent on the currently selected operation. Any operation that occurs before
the selected operation is considered a preceding operation, while any operation that comes after it is
considered a subsequent operation.

Select the option you want to use for making the proposed move in the schedule. Depending on
which scheduling board you are in, you might see any of the following options:

l Job - All Operations - This option reschedules operations on this resource group. All
operations are rescheduled after forward scheduling. However, if multiple operations for a
single job are scheduled at this resource group, this option leaves gaps for any intervening

346 October, 2024

 operations on additional resource groups.

l Branch - Preceding Operations - This option reschedules the selected operation and any
preceding operations within the current assembly. It then moves on to reschedule operations
contained in any preceding assemblies within the method.

l Branch - Subsequent Operations - This option reschedules the selected operation and any
subsequent operations within the current assembly. It then moves on to reschedule operations
contained in any subsequent assemblies within the method – up to the final assembly
(Assembly 0).

l Assembly - All Operations - This option reschedules all the operations on the assembly
around the selected operation. If multiple operations for a single assembly are scheduled at
this resource group, the method leaves spaces (amounts) of time available for other
operations required to be complete on any other resource groups.

l Assembly - Preceding Operations - This option only reschedules the preceding operations
contained within the current assembly. It reschedules the selected operation and any
operations that come before it within the assembly.

l Assembly - Subsequent Operations - This option only reschedules the subsequent

operations contained within the current assembly. It reschedules the selected operation and
any operations that come after it within the assembly.

l Operation Only - This reschedules operations on this resource group only.

l Job - All Jobs - In multi-job mode, all jobs related to the selected job (meaning the successor,
predecessors, and itself) are rescheduled as a unit.

l Job - Successor Jobs - In multi-job mode, all successor jobs related to the selected job,
including itself, are rescheduled as a unit.

l Job - Predecessor Jobs - In multi-job mode, all predecessor jobs related to the selected job,
including itself, are rescheduled as a unit.

Operation

The sequence number of the job operation that is affected by the proposed move.

Operation Detail

The sequence number of the job operation detail record (resource group, resource, or capability) that
is affected by the proposed move.

Part

The number of the part being manufactured on the job, assembly, or operation.

Prod Qty

347 October, 2024

The quantity to be produced of the part for the job.

Production Complete

This check box will display as selected if production is complete for the assembly or operation for
which you are proposing a move.

Qty Complete

The quantity that has been completed for the part on the job.

Recalculate Expected Yield

Determines whether you want the application to adjust the job production yield of any job that uses
this operation and has been flagged to use the automatic recalculation feature. This check box is
available if the selected job has the Production Yield option enabled in Job Entry.

Req By

The original date by which the job part and quantity was required.

Resource

Any resource assigned to the operation. In the Proposed Changes area of the window, you can
change to a different resource, if applicable.

Resource Group

Any resource group assigned to the operation.

Rev

The revision level of the part being produced for the job or assembly.

Setup Complete

This check box will display as selected if setup is complete for the assembly or operation for which
you are proposing a move.

Schedule

Select how the proposed change should be scheduled.

l Forward - Specifies from the Start Date and Time onwards.

l Backward - Specifies from the Due Date and Time backwards.

348 October, 2024

 The default option displays based on the option selected in the Site Maintenance >
Detail > Planning > Scheduling Direction field.

The setting is only available if your company has an Advanced Planning and
Scheduling license, and the Use 3rd Party Scheduling Software check box is clear for
the current site in Site Configuration. Otherwise the proposed change defaults
Backward and cannot be changed.

Start Date

The start date for the current operation. There is also a proposed start date that is for display only
unless you choose Start Date for the Change field.

Start Time

The time on the start date for the current operation. There is also a proposed start time that is for
display only unless you choose Start Date for the Change field.

Update Job Operation Detail

Select this check box to change the resource originally defined in the Job Operation Detail with the
resource currently specified on the Move Job window. Both the resource group and the capability
values also update to reflect the new resource. Use this feature when you need to change the
original resource defined on the job record.

If the costing rates are different between the new resource and the original resource, the Override
Rates checkbox is also selected and the original costing rates are maintained. This checkbox does
not create new rates for production labor costs or burden costs.

This check box is available under these conditions:

l If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation equal one.

l If the Prevent Changes check box is selected within Company Configuration (Job module
card), the Update Job Operation Detail check box is available and selected by default.

This check box is disabled under these conditions:

l If the scheduling blocks assigned to this operation is greater than one.

l If the Prevent Changes check box is clear (not selected) within Company Configuration (Job
module card).

Move the Job

1. Click and drag a job in one of the scheduling boards from its current scheduled date to a
different date.

349 October, 2024

 The Move Job window appears.

2. Verify the Proposed Changes. Make any necessary modifications to the settings.

The settings are only available if your company has an Advanced Planning and
Scheduling license, and the Use 3rd Party Scheduling Software check box is
clear for the current site in Site Configuration. Otherwise the proposed change
defaults Backward and cannot be changed.

3. Click OK.

Detail
Use the cards under the Detail tab to review the details of the resource that is selected/highlighted
on the Schedule card.

Scheduling Details

Use the Scheduling Details card to review the details of the job that is selected/highlighted on the
Schedule card.

List Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Asm

The sequence number of the job assembly related to the selected resource.

CapabilityID

Days Late

Due Date

The date when the operation is due to be completed.

End Time

The time that the operation is due to end.

Est Prod Hrs

The estimated number of hours to complete the job operation.

Job

350 October, 2024

The number of the job you are reviewing.

Machines

Max. Mfg. Lot Size

OpDesc

Operation

The sequence number of the job operation to which the selected resource is assigned.

Opr

The sequence number of the job operation to which the selected resource is assigned.

Part

The number of the part being produced for the job, operation, or assembly.

Production

ResourceGrpID

The resource group attached to the Operation Detail record. This is the resource group where the
selected resource is located.

ResourceID

The resource attached to the Operation Detail record. This is the resource you specified on the
Schedule card.

Run Qty

Schedule Comment

Setup

Setup Group

Setup Group Description

Start Date

The start date of the job or operation.

Start Time

The time that the operation is due to start.

Scheduling Comments

351 October, 2024

Use the Scheduling Comments card to enter specific notes for a job operation record. In this card
you can either create new comments or review the existing ones entered in Job Entry.

If a scheduling comment was entered in Job Entry, the Memo icon located on the Standard toolbar
displays a red star, indicating that there is a comment to be viewed in this card.

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Operations List

This card displays a list of all of the operations that are associated with the resource(s) you are
reviewing on the scheduling board. Use this card to find and select a specific operation, and then
advance to the Schedule card where the schedule grid has been positioned to that operation.

Schedule a Operation

1. On the Selection card, select one or more resources.

2. Click the List tab. All of the operations associated with the resource(s) you chose are listed in
the Operations grid.

3. Select an operation, and then click the Schedule tab. The scheduling board will be positioned
at that operation.

Overflow menu
Use the Multi Resource Scheduling Board application's Overflow menu to perform several key
functions. The commands on this menu are useful for undoing a change or all changes, accepting
current or all changes, queuing the Clear External MES function or clearing an external MES
schedule.

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Actions - Queue Clear External MES

Use the Queue Clear External MES action to add the selected resources to the Clear External
MES queue.

If your company also uses Advanced MES, resource scheduling is integrated between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

Click Queue Clear External MES to add the selected resources to the Clear External MES queue.
When you add a resource to the Clear External MES queue, you are selecting for its job schedule to
be cleared on Advanced MES. The MESQueue field for the resource is set to Yes.

When the Export to Advanced MES process next runs with the Clear Schedule field set to Clear
Now or Clear and Resend, the job schedules for the queued resources are cleared on Advanced
MES (in addition to any other selected resources and resource groups).

352 October, 2024

 When you add resources to the Clear External MES queue, there is no visible change
in this application. You can only see the changed MESQueue field in the database.

This action only applies to resources with a resource type of M (Machine).

Multi Resource Scheduling Board - Actions - Clear External MES Schedule

Use the Clear External MES Schedule action to launch Export to Advanced MES Process
application for the selected resources.

If your company also uses Advanced MES, resource scheduling is integrated between Kinetic and
Advanced MES.

Click Clear External MES Schedule to open the Export to Advanced MES Process application.
The selected resources appear in the Filter > Resources card.

When you run the Export to Advanced MES process with the Clear Schedule field set to Clear Now
or Clear and Resend, the job schedules for the selected resources are cleared on Advanced MES
(in addition to any other selected resources and resource groups).

This action only applies to resources with a resource type of M (Machine).

Export to Advanced MES

Use the Export to Advanced MES process to export CSV files from Kinetic to Epicor Advanced
MES. Kinetic 10 application exports in bulk (folder) rather then individual CSV files. Click the Export
Folder button to search for and select the name and directory of the file you want to export.

To distinguish between imported rows in a table, the CSV files include the following record types
used by the Import process in the Epicor Advanced MES application:

l TI800 - Resources records

l PI800 - Parts in master table with valid revision

l MP800 - Materials for main part exported

l MI710 - Material ID action request

l DC813 - Indirect codes (also called Down Codes)

l DF813 - Scrap type reason codes (also called Scrap Codes)

l PP800 - Process card line, containing the Part Operations data.

353 October, 2024

 l PE630 - Process card Machine Parameters (containing Engineering Workbench machine
parameters)

l PE800 - Process specific action request

l JB630 - Job description action request (Job Operations)

l JF630 - Father Job description action request

l OI860 - Shop Employee records

l SD360 - Clear Job Schedule

You can only export the database entry records marked as Machine MES and records
linked to them.

Example: If an operation record has the Machine MES check box selected in Operation
Maintenance, the exporting process automatically selects all the materials (part records) linked to
this operation in a method of manufacture (Engineering Workbench) and transfers them to the Epicor
Advanced MES application as materials. Parts in the Epicor Advanced MES application are
manufactured items.

Menu Path

Navigate to this application from the Main Menu:

l Production Management > Engineering > General Operations > Export to Advanced MES

Export to Advanced MES - Selection

Use the Selection card to select options for the Export to Advanced MES process.

Selection Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Export Option

Determines the method to use to export operations from Kinetic to Advanced MES.

l Job Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete and
have the Machine MES check box selected.

l Operation Start Date - Creates Advanced MES jobs for all operations that are not complete,
that have the Machine MES check box selected and whose operation start date falls within the
selection parameters.

354 October, 2024

 l Operation Start Date with Prior Operation Status - Evaluates the prior operation status
before creating a Advanced MES job for an operation that has the Machine MES check box
selected. The export process differs based on the scheduling relationship between the prior
operation and the current operation.

l Finish to Start Relationship - The operation export does not create a Advanced MES
job until the prior operation is complete and the start date of the operation with the
selected Machine MES check box is within the selection range.

l Start to Start Relationship - The operation is sent when the prior operation is started.
This operation also considers the scheduling offset value on the secondary operation.

l Finish to Finish Relationship - The secondary operation creates a Advanced MES job
as soon as the primary operation job is created.

Cutoff Horizon Date

Specifies the cutoff horizon date to control which job data is sent during the export process. The
cutoff horizon date is the first operation start date for any jobs that have the Machine MES option
selected. When a job is selected, all operations that have machine MES are sent to Advanced MES
as jobs.

Once an operation has been exported and has a Advanced MES Job, further updates from Kinetic
are blocked as Advanced MES has full control of the job. Kinetic is used for planning and costing and
Advanced MES is used for production execution.

The export process sends all static data each time the process runs.

Clear Schedule

Specifies how you want to clear the existing job schedule on Advanced MES before the new
exported job schedule is loaded. To make a change to the Advanced MES job schedule from Kinetic,
you must first clear the existing schedule.

To clear job schedule information, you must select the resource groups and/or resources for which
you want to clear the job schedule in the Filter > Resource Groups and Filter > Resources cards. If
a resource group or resource is not selected, the schedule for that resource or resource group is not
cleared.

Select one of the available options:

l None - the job schedule is not cleared and standard processing occurs.

l Clear Now - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected resource
groups and resources. No other information is exported from Kinetic.

355 October, 2024

 l Clear Now and Resend - Clears the existing job schedule in Advanced MES for the selected
resource groups and resources. Exports the job descriptors for the selected resource groups
and resources. The exported production job schedule is based on the job descriptors, the
selected Export Option and whether the Net Change check box is selected.

Execute OData Calls

Select this check box if you want to use OData calls to directly export data from Kinetic to Advanced
MES instead of generating CSV files and importing them to Advanced MES.

Export Folder

Specifies the directory path for the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced MES
application.

Export Folder...

Click this button to search for and select the folder that you want to export to the Epicor Advanced
MES application.

Log Filename

This field specifies the file name for the log file that Kinetic creates if an error occurs during the export
process.

When an error occurs, the error log file will be created in the Export folder directory under the UserID
of the employee who starts the export process.

Log Filename...

Click this button to search for and select an existing file where the log data is being stored.

Net Change

If selected, the export process only includes part, part revision, resource, scrap reason code, indirect
labor code, shop employee, job and job operation records that have the Sync Required check box
enabled. When the Sync Required check box for a record is selected, it indicates that the record is
new or that there have been changes since the last synchronization that should be included in the
next export process. The new or changed data for the selected records is exported.

If the Sync Required check box for a record is clear, any changes to that record since
the last synchronization are not included in the export process.

OData URL

Displays the OData URL specified in Site Configuration Control that will be used to make the calls .

Recurring

356 October, 2024

Select this check box to indicate that the process should be run on a repeating basis.

Do not set the export recurrence pattern too recur too frequently or it may impact the
efficient running of Kinetic and Advanced MES. It is recommended to have a frequency
pattern of at least 30 minutes between exports. For more information, please refer to
Data Integration Best Practices.

Schedule

Select the schedule option during which you would like the export process to run.

If Now is selected, the export process will start once you save the export process.

Site

Specifies the site for which the export process runs.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter

Use the cards under the Filter card to select the resource groups and resources should have their
existing production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group and Resource filters are
disabled.

Export to Advanced MES - Filter - Resource Groups

Use the Resource Groups card to select the resource groups that should have their existing
production schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resource groups to the list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, Resource Group filters are disabled.

Resource Groups Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource group. The description appears on reports or windows throughout
the system. For example:

357 October, 2024

 l Lathe Group 120

l CNC Milling Center

l Assembly Bench North

Input Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse from which the resource group pulls its material. Both warehouses
contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on this list.

If you use the Advanced Material module, you should assign input warehouses as soon
as possible. If a resource group for a job operation does not have an input warehouse,
inspection applications DMR Processing and Inspection Processing could
misintKineticret the absence of an input warehouse as a reason to assign a blank
destination warehouse. If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse,
a corresponding move queue is not created on the Material Queue.

When the Input Warehouse and In Bin are the same as the Output Warehouse and
Out Bin, and if Auto Move is checked, no automatic move request is generated, and
the Request Move check box is not selected in Data Collection Report Quantity or
End Activity. This arrangement works well for a production line, cell, or other resource
group that is in close proximity to other resource groups that also need this material.

Output Warehouse

Specifies the warehouse where material is to go once the work from this resource group needs to be
moved. Both warehouses contained within the current site and shared warehouses are displayed on
this list.

If the Input Warehouse is the same as the Output Warehouse, a corresponding move
queue is not created on the Material Queue.

ProdBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

358 October, 2024

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

QProdBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

QSetupBurRate

These rates are used as the labor costing rate when you enter quotes in the Quote Management
module. Separate rates can be assigned for production and setup labor quoted in each resource
group. If you do not enter any quoting rates, the production/setup costing rates appear as the
defaults in Quote Entry. If you do not use the Quote Management module, quoting rates are not
used.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the estimated production hours in quote entry. The Setup Rate
is multiplied by the estimated setup hours.

Resource Groups...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Resource Type

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource group to classify it for custom reporting
purposes.

If the Machine MES check box is selected and the resource group is integrated with Advanced MES,
this field indicates how the resource group integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource group contains Advanced MES machine resources. These
resources are manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resources in the group are Advanced MES tool resources. This resource is
exported to Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

If the Resource Type is M (machine) and the Machine MES check box is selected, all
resources in the resource group must have a resource type of M (machine).

359 October, 2024

ResourceGrpID

The code that uniquely identifies each resource group. For example:

l LATHES

l C-MILLS

l ASSY BENCH

SetupBurRate

These rates control the burden, or overhead cost, associated with running each resource group.
Separate rates can be assigned for production and reported in each resource group.

Definition:

Setup Labor Used to track any preparation time for a specific operation, such as
getting the machine ready.

The Production Rate is multiplied by the burden (machine) hours or labor cost at the time of labor
entry, depending on whether you have selected Flat or Percent. The Setup Rate is multiplied by
the setup hours or cost.

Add Resource Group to Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resource Groups card.

2. Click New. A blank row appears in the Resource Groups grid.

3. Enter the resource group ID in the ResourceGrpID field.

4. Enter additional information in the remaining available fields.

To add a resource group, you must know the resource group ID and the resource
group must have a Resource Type of M (Machine).

Delete Resource Group from Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resource Groups card.

2. Select the resource group to delete from the filter list.

3. Click Delete. The resource group is deleted from the filter list.

Export to Advanced MES Process - Filter - Resources

360 October, 2024

Use the Resources card to select the machine resources that should have their existing production
schedules cleared in Advanced MES.

You can also click New while in this card to add new resources to the filter list.

If the Clear Schedule field value is None, the Resource filters are disabled.

Only resources with a resource type of Machine are available for selection.

Resources Fields

Fields for the current card are listed on this help article.

Some fields on the interface have a context menu, which is indicated by a triangle in the upper right
corner of the field. To open the context menu, right-click on the field.

Description

Further identifies each resource. The description appears on reports or windows throughout the
application.

Location

If selected, indicate that this resource is a physical location on the shop floor. This means that an
employee can report labor to it, and the burden rate from this resource will be posted to the labor
transaction, which then gets posted to the job.

A resource cannot be flagged as a Location if the resource group is not flagged as a

Location.

ResourceID

Specifies the code that uniquely identifies each resource. For example:

l 3VM1

l ARC2

l AUX1

For machine resources, if you integrate your Kinetic with Advanced MES, Kinetic
resource ID must match the Advanced MES machine configuration ID.

ResourceType

Specifies the resource type assigned to this resource to classify it for custom reporting purposes.

361 October, 2024

 If the resource is integrated with Advanced MES, this field indicates how the resource
integrates with Advanced MES.

l Machine - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES machine resource. This resource is

manually synchronized with Advanced MES as a Machine Configuration.

l Tool - Indicates resource is a Advanced MES tool resource. This resource is exported to
Advanced MES as a Tool ID.

Resources...

Click this button to search for existing records. This search application retrieves the record type
displayed on the button label.

Add Resource to Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resources card.

2. Click New. A blank row appears in the Resources grid.

3. Enter the resource ID in the ResourceID field.

4. Enter additional information in the remaining available fields.

To add a resource, you must know the resource ID and the resource must have a
Resource Type of M (Machine).

Delete Resource from Filter List

1. Navigate to the Filter > Resources card.

2. Select the resource to delete from the filter list.

3. Click Delete. The resource is deleted from the filter list.

362 October, 2024